WO2018143126A1 - Article management system, article management device, management device, and article management method - Google Patents

Article management system, article management device, management device, and article management method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018143126A1
WO2018143126A1 PCT/JP2018/002739 JP2018002739W WO2018143126A1 WO 2018143126 A1 WO2018143126 A1 WO 2018143126A1 JP 2018002739 W JP2018002739 W JP 2018002739W WO 2018143126 A1 WO2018143126 A1 WO 2018143126A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
unit
article
power
housing
management system
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/002739
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
薮野 寛之
孝広 佐藤
将泰 向井
中村 敬
Original Assignee
パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2017016151A external-priority patent/JP2020055650A/en
Priority claimed from JP2017016110A external-priority patent/JP2020055649A/en
Priority claimed from JP2017016087A external-priority patent/JP2020057027A/en
Application filed by パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 filed Critical パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Publication of WO2018143126A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018143126A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65GTRANSPORT OR STORAGE DEVICES, e.g. CONVEYORS FOR LOADING OR TIPPING, SHOP CONVEYOR SYSTEMS OR PNEUMATIC TUBE CONVEYORS
    • B65G1/00Storing articles, individually or in orderly arrangement, in warehouses or magazines
    • B65G1/02Storage devices
    • B65G1/04Storage devices mechanical
    • B65G1/137Storage devices mechanical with arrangements or automatic control means for selecting which articles are to be removed

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to an article management system, an article management apparatus, a management apparatus, and an article management method for managing one or more articles stored in a casing.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a vending machine system capable of switching between a normal mode and a free mode based on authentication information read by a card reader.
  • a housing for storing articles is a dedicated product.
  • Articles housed in the housing must also have a shape and size suitable for the main body housing.
  • the structure for storing the article and the structure of the article outlet are also complicated.
  • the present disclosure provides a versatile and reliable article management system, article management apparatus, management apparatus, and article management method capable of managing one or more articles with a simple configuration.
  • An article management system is an article management system that manages one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing that receives power supply, and that receives power common to the casing And a transmission unit that transmits a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the common power, and a determination unit that receives the power reception signal and determines the interruption of the common power based on the received power reception signal.
  • An article management apparatus is an article management apparatus that includes an openable / closable casing that receives power supply, and that manages one or more articles stored in the casing. And a power receiving unit that receives common power and a transmission unit that transmits a power reception signal indicating a power receiving state of the common power.
  • a management device is a management device connected to an article management device having a power reception unit, and receives a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of power received by the power reception unit of the article management device.
  • a receiving unit that receives the received signal; and a determination unit that determines interruption of the power based on the received power reception signal.
  • An article management method is an article management method using an article management apparatus that manages one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing that receives power supply, and is common to the casing.
  • the power receiving signal indicating the power receiving state of the common power is transmitted.
  • An article management method is an article management method using a management apparatus connected to an article management apparatus having a power reception unit, wherein the power received by the power reception unit of the article management apparatus A power reception signal indicating a power reception state is received, and the interruption of the power is determined based on the received power reception signal.
  • an article management system an article management apparatus, a management apparatus, and an article management method that can manage one or more articles with a simple configuration and have high versatility and reliability.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a top view of a lunch box which is an example of an article to be managed by the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3A is a perspective view showing a closed housing in the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3B is a perspective view showing the opened housing in the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of a user who uses the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a registered person list in the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a price list in the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a shooting range of the in-compartment camera in the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a state where the user holds an article over a code reader in the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a side view showing an unlocked state and a locked state of the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a top view showing a locked state of the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating error processing performed by the control device of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a collation process performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an identification display reading process performed by the code reader and the control device of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of comparison and charging processing performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating another example of comparison and billing processing performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the housing of the article management system according to the first modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit of the article management system according to the second modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor of the in-compartment sensor unit according to the second modification example of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a plurality of articles are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the second modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the housing of the article management system according to the first modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit of the article management system according to the second modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a state in which an article is removed from the detachable sensor according to the second modification example of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the second modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the control device in the article management system according to the second modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit of the article management system according to the third modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor of the in-compartment sensor unit according to the third modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a plurality of articles are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the third modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lunch box is removed from the detachable sensor according to the third modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit of the article management system according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a plurality of articles are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the fourth modification example of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a state in which an article is attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the fourth modification example of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a state in which an article is removed from the in-compartment sensor unit according to the fourth modification example of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the weight sensor and the article in the article management system according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the individual storage unit of the article management system according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 37 is a perspective view of an individual storage unit in which articles are stored in the article management system according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a state before and after taking out an article from an individual storage unit in the article management system according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an individual storage shelf in the article management system according to the seventh modification example of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a part of an individual storage shelf according to a seventh modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 41 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an article management system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 42 is a perspective view of a plurality of individual housings in the article management system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 43 is a front view showing a housing in which a plurality of individual housings according to the second embodiment are arranged.
  • FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a person list in the article management system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a collation process performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device of the article management system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of storing a plurality of articles in a casing in the article management system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a storage position table showing the correspondence between articles and storage positions in the article management system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the modification of the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 53 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the state confirmation process performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 55 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an article management system according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 56 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an operation of state confirmation processing performed by the management device of the article management system according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 58 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a connection relationship between the control device and the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the unlocking process performed by the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a connection relationship between the control device and the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first modification example of the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a connection relationship between the control device and the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 63 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an article management system according to a modification of the embodiment.
  • FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the operation of the communication terminal of the article management system according to the modification of the embodiment.
  • FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of an unlock code display screen according to a modification of the embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the article management system 1 is a system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in an openable / closable casing 10. Note that the number of articles 2 managed by the article management system 1 may be only one.
  • a control device 20 that can communicate with the management device 30 is attached to the housing 10. In the present embodiment, the housing 10 is not a dedicated housing.
  • the article management system 1 is configured by attaching a hardware configuration such as the control device 20 to a commercially available general casing 10 as a retrofit.
  • the casing 10 and the control device 20 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
  • the article management system 1 performs storage of the article 2 and charges for the price of the article 2 taken out from the housing 10. That is, the article management system 1 can make the housing 10 have a so-called vending machine function.
  • the housing 10 is installed in a place where a plurality of persons gather, such as a workplace (office building), a school, and a hospital. Any person or a predetermined person can open the housing 10 and take out the article 2 stored in the housing 10.
  • the control device 20 and the management device 30 specify the article 2 taken out from the housing 10 and the person who has taken out, and charge the price of the specified article 2 to the specified person. In this way, the article management system 1 can store and sell the article 2 stored in the housing 10.
  • FIG. 2 is a top view of a lunch box which is an example of an article 2 to be managed by the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the lunch box is stored in the housing 10 and stored in an environment where temperature management is performed.
  • a user who has a long time to buy a lunch box, or a user who wants a special lunch box (for example, for vegetarians) who is different from a commercially available lunch box may open the housing 10 and purchase his / her favorite lunch box. it can. Settlement is automatically performed based on pre-registered personal information. For this reason, lunch can be purchased cashlessly.
  • FIG. 3A and 3B are perspective views of the housing 10 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 3A shows a state where the housing 10 is closed.
  • FIG. 3B shows a state where the housing 10 is opened.
  • the casing 10 houses a plurality of lunch boxes 2a to 2c.
  • Each of the plurality of lunch boxes 2a to 2c is an example of the article 2, and the types thereof are different from each other.
  • the lunch box 2a is a lunch box including meat as a main ingredient
  • the lunch box 2b is a lunch box including fish as a main ingredient.
  • the lunch box 2c is a vegetarian lunch box that does not contain meat and fish.
  • the lunch boxes 2a to 2c may be lunch boxes according to the style of dishes such as Western, Chinese and Japanese.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an operation example of a user who uses the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • an internal camera 40 is attached to the inside of the housing 10.
  • a control device 20, a code reader 50, and a card reader 60 are attached to the outside of the housing 10.
  • the user holds an identification card for identifying himself / herself such as an ID card or a credit card held by the user over the card reader 60 for personal authentication (matching with a registration list) (S1). ).
  • the lock mechanism 70 (see FIGS. 5 and 10) is unlocked, so that the housing 10 can be opened (S2).
  • the user opens the casing 10 (door 12) and takes out the article 2 from the casing 10 (S3).
  • the user causes the code reader 50 to read the identification display 51 (see FIG. 2) attached to the taken-out article 2 (S4).
  • the taken-out article 2 is specified and charged.
  • a user closes the housing
  • the timing at which the user closes the housing 10 may be immediately after the article 2 is taken out and before the identification display 51 is read by the code reader 50.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 10, a control device 20, a management device 30, a warehouse camera (first detection unit) 40, and a code reader (first 2 detection unit) 50, a card reader (acquisition unit) 60, a lock mechanism 70, an open / close sensor 80, and a guide unit 90.
  • the article management system 1 may not include the dedicated casing 10. That is, the control device 20, the internal camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90 are attached to a highly versatile housing (such as a commercially available showcase) 10. By arranging in the vicinity of the housing 10, the article management system 1 can be configured. The attachment is performed using an attachment such as a screw or an adhesive sheet. That is, since a dedicated housing is not necessary as the housing 10, it can be realized as a highly versatile article management system 1.
  • the housing 10 is an openable / closable housing for housing a plurality of articles 2 therein.
  • FIG. 5 shows an example in which the internal camera 40, the lock mechanism 70, and the open / close sensor 80, which are first detection units, are arranged inside the housing 10. Below, the detailed structure of the housing
  • the housing 10 includes a main body 11 and a door 12.
  • the main body 11 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped casing that forms an outer casing of the casing 10.
  • the main body 11 forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped storage space 11a for storing a plurality of articles 2 therein.
  • At least one surface of the main body 11 is open, and a door 12 is attached so as to cover the open surface.
  • the shape of the main body 11 and the storage space 11a may be a substantially cubic shape, a substantially cylindrical shape, or a substantially spherical shape, and is not particularly limited.
  • the size of the main body 11 is not limited to, for example, the capacity of the storage space 11a is about 60 liters to 100 liters.
  • the main body 11 is formed, for example, by molding and combining metal materials or resin materials, but the material of the main body 11 is not particularly limited, and may be formed using wood or the like.
  • the storage space 11a of the main body 11 is divided into a plurality of partial spaces by a partition member.
  • a partition member As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, two shelf members 13 are arranged in the storage space 11a.
  • the two shelves 13 divide the storage space 11a into three in the vertical direction (upper, middle, and lower).
  • the shelf member 13 is formed using, for example, a flat plate or a flat net.
  • a pair of grooves or a pair of protrusions are provided at the same height on the two inner surfaces (the left inner surface and the right inner surface) facing each other of the main body 11.
  • the shelf member 13 is inserted into the pair of grooves or placed on the pair of protrusions.
  • a plurality of pairs of grooves or a pair of protrusions may be provided at different heights. Thereby, according to the magnitude
  • the shelf member 13 may be removable.
  • a lunch box 2a is arranged in the upper stage
  • a lunch box 2b is arranged in the middle stage
  • a lunch box 2c is arranged in the lower stage.
  • the lunch boxes 2a are arranged side by side and stacked.
  • the door 12 is fixed to the main body 11 so that it can be opened and closed.
  • the door 12 is a substantially rectangular plate, and is connected to one side of the main body 11 so as to be rotatable about one side. That is, the door 12 is a so-called side-opening door.
  • the storage space 11a of the main body 11 is blocked from the outside, and the article 2 cannot be taken out.
  • the storage space 11a is opened to the outside, and the article 2 can be taken out.
  • the door 12 is formed using a translucent member such as a transparent glass plate, for example. Thereby, even if it does not open the door 12, the mode of the articles
  • the door 12 may be formed using a light shielding member. Although not shown, packing is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the door 12 so as to fill a gap between the door 12 and the main body 11 when the door 12 is closed. Thereby, the sealing property (airtightness) of the storage space 11a can be improved.
  • the casing 10 is an openable / closable casing that receives power supply.
  • the housing 10 includes a temperature adjustment unit 14 that adjusts the temperature of the storage space 11 a using supplied power.
  • the temperature adjustment unit 14 can cool the storage space 11a and keep the temperature at a predetermined temperature.
  • the temperature adjustment part 14 may heat not only cooling but the storage space 11a.
  • the temperature adjustment part 14 may cool or heat only a partial area
  • the temperature adjustment unit 14 may be capable of keeping the storage space 11a at a different temperature for each region.
  • the temperature adjusting unit 14 is realized by, for example, a compressor (compressor) or a Peltier element.
  • the compressor or the Peltier element is driven by electric power supplied from the outside (specifically, the control device 20).
  • the housing 10 includes a power cord 15 for receiving power from the outside.
  • the power cord 15 has, for example, a plug that can be connected to a commercial power source.
  • the power cord 15 is connected to the control device 20. That is, power is supplied to the housing 10 from the outside via the control device 20.
  • the control device 20 controls the internal camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90. Specifically, the control device 20 supplies power to each of the in-compartment camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90, and controls signals between them. Or send and receive information. The control device 20 transmits and receives information by communicating with the management device 30.
  • the control device 20 is realized by, for example, a single board computer. Specifically, the control device 20 includes a nonvolatile memory in which a program is stored, a volatile memory that is a temporary storage area for executing the program, an input / output port, a processor that executes the program, and the like.
  • the control device 20 (single board computer) is housed in a housing and is attached to the outer wall surface of the housing 10 as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B.
  • the control device 20 includes a control unit 21, a power receiving unit 24, a power feeding unit 25, and a communication unit 26.
  • the control unit 21 includes a lock control unit 22 that controls the lock mechanism 70 and an information processing unit 23 that inputs and outputs various types of information.
  • the lock control unit 22 controls the lock mechanism 70. Specifically, the lock control unit 22 unlocks the lock mechanism 70 when the collation result by the collation unit 32 of the management device 30 indicates that the person matches. In the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment, only the person registered in advance in the person list 35 managed by the management apparatus 30 is allowed to take out (that is, purchase) the article 2 from the housing 10. . For this reason, the lock control unit 22 unlocks the lock mechanism 70 only when the collation unit 32 confirms that the user who wants to take out the article 2 is a person registered in the person list 35. Thereby, the user can be permitted to take out the article 2.
  • the lock control unit 22 locks the lock mechanism 70 when the opening / closing sensor 80 detects that the door 12 is closed. Specific unlocking processing and locking processing will be described later.
  • the information processing unit 23 controls each of the internal camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90, and transmits / receives a control signal or information to / from each of them. .
  • the information processing unit 23 acquires first detection information from the internal camera 40.
  • the information processing unit 23 acquires second detection information from the code reader 50.
  • the information processing unit 23 acquires person information from the card reader 60.
  • the information processing unit 23 acquires the opening / closing information of the housing 10 from the opening / closing sensor 80.
  • the information processing unit 23 outputs guide information or error information to the guide unit 90. Further, the information processing unit 23 transmits information acquired from each processing unit to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 26. Specific processing performed by the information processing unit 23 will be described later in detail together with the description of the operation of the article management system 1.
  • the power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside and supplies it to the control unit 21. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the power receiving unit 24 includes a power cord and a plug, and is connected to a household outlet and receives power.
  • the power feeding unit 25 supplies the power received by the power receiving unit 24 to the housing 10.
  • the power supply unit 25 is configured by a plug insertion port, and the power cord 15 provided in the housing 10 is inserted. That is, power is supplied to the housing 10 via the control device 20.
  • the external power supply device, the control device 20 and the housing 10 are connected in series.
  • the power receiving unit 24 receives power common to the housing 10. Specifically, the power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside as power common to the housing 10.
  • the communication unit 26 communicates with the communication unit 37 of the management device 30 to perform transmission / reception (input / output) of various information or commands.
  • the communication unit 26 performs wireless communication or wired communication.
  • the communication unit 26 performs wireless communication based on a communication standard such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark), 3G, 4G, or LTE (Long Termination Evolution).
  • the communication unit 26 is an example of an output unit that outputs first detection information indicating a detection result by the internal camera 40 and second detection information indicating a detection result by the code reader 50. Specifically, the communication unit 26 transmits the first detection information and the second detection information to the management device 30 by wireless communication or wired communication, and the first detection information and the second detection information are compared with the management device 30. Is transmitted to the unit 31. For example, the communication unit 26 outputs, as first detection information, a first internal image and a second internal image obtained by photographing with the internal camera 40. The communication unit 26 may transmit the first image inside the image and the second image inside the image at the same time, or may transmit each time the first image inside the image and the second image inside the image are acquired.
  • the communication unit 26 outputs the person information acquired by the card reader 60. Specifically, the communication unit 26 transmits the person information to the management device 30 by wireless communication or wired communication, thereby transmitting the person information to the matching unit 32 of the management device 30.
  • the management device 30 manages the article 2 based on information transmitted from the control device 20. Specifically, the management device 30 specifies at least the identification and verification (personal authentication) of the person who opened the casing 10, the identification of the article 2 taken out from the casing 10, and the charge for the consideration of the article 2. Do one or the like.
  • the management device 30 is, for example, a server device.
  • the management apparatus 30 includes, for example, one computer or a plurality of computers connected via a network such as a LAN (Local Area Network) or a WAN (Wide Area Network).
  • a network such as a LAN (Local Area Network) or a WAN (Wide Area Network).
  • the management device 30 includes a comparison unit 31, a verification unit 32, a billing unit 33, a storage unit 34, and a communication unit 37.
  • the storage unit 34 stores a person list 35 and a price list 36.
  • the comparison unit 31 performs comparison based on the first detection information and the second detection information. That is, the comparison unit 31 compares the detection results of the article 2 inside and outside the housing 10. Specifically, the comparison unit 31 determines the first number that is the increase / decrease number of the plurality of articles 2 before and after the opening and closing of the housing 10 based on the first detection information and the second detection information, and the Comparison is made with a second number which is the number of articles 2 detected by the second detection unit 50 outside. The comparison unit 31 compares the first number with the second number, and outputs the comparison result to the collation unit 32 and the billing unit 33.
  • the first number indicates, for example, the number of articles 2 decreased from the housing 10 as a positive number, and indicates as a negative number when the number of articles 2 increases.
  • the comparison result is information indicating whether the first number and the second number match or do not match.
  • the first number and the second number match it means that the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 and the number of articles 2 detected by the code reader 50 match.
  • the coincidence between the first number and the second number means that the user has taken out the article 2 in accordance with a normal usage method.
  • the first number and the second number do not match, it means that the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 and the number of articles 2 detected by the code reader 50 do not match. To do. That is, the discrepancy between the first number and the second number means that some unauthorized use was made intentionally or accidentally. For example, when the first number is larger than the second number, it is considered that the article 2 taken out by the user is not detected by the code reader 50. Further, when the second number is larger than the first number, it is considered that the user mistakenly detected the article 2 by the code reader 50 a plurality of times. Further, when the second number is a negative number, it is considered that an unauthorized article 2 is added to the housing 10 as a factor.
  • the comparison unit 31 first counts the first number by performing image processing on each of the first in-compartment image and the second in-compartment image acquired via the communication unit 37. Specifically, the comparison unit 31 counts the first number by subtracting the number of articles 2 included in the second interior image from the number of articles 2 included in the first interior image. For example, when the number of articles 2 included in the first image in the first store is 10 and the number of articles 2 included in the second store image is 8, the first number is 2. That is, it can be seen that two articles 2 have been removed from the housing 10.
  • the first number becomes a negative number.
  • the first number is -1. This may occur, for example, when an article 2 (for example, an empty lunch box) is added due to user's malicious intention or the like. In this case, error notification or charging processing for a predetermined amount is performed. Details will be described later.
  • the collation unit 32 collates the person list 35 with the person indicated by the person information, and outputs a collation result indicating the person's match or mismatch.
  • the collation unit 32 outputs the collation result to the billing unit 33 or outputs it to the lock control unit 22 of the control device 20 via the communication unit 37.
  • the collation unit 32 determines whether or not the person indicated by the person information acquired by the card reader 60 is registered in the person list 35. That is, the collation unit 32 performs personal authentication processing.
  • the charging unit 33 charges the person indicated by the person information acquired by the card reader 60 for at least one price of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the billing unit 33 determines the billing amount based on the comparison result by the comparison unit 31.
  • the charging unit 33 calculates an accurate charge amount and charges the calculated amount to the person. Specifically, the billing unit 33 charges the price of the target article detected by the code reader 50 when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a match between the first number and the second number. That is, since the comparison result confirms that the number of articles 2 taken out and the number of target articles detected by the code reader 50 are the same, the charging unit 33 charges the price of the target articles.
  • the charging unit 33 refers to the price list 36 stored in the storage unit 34, for example, and acquires the individual price of the target article.
  • the billing unit 33 calculates the total amount as the billing amount by multiplying and adding the price and the number of the target articles.
  • the billing unit 33 refers to the person list 35 to settle a billing amount by a credit card associated with the person indicated by the person information, a prepaid card balance decrement processing, or a debit of a billing amount for a bank account. Perform processing.
  • the billing unit 33 may provide purchase history data including a billing amount for each person to the employer or the personnel or general affairs department of a company.
  • the charging unit 33 determines the maximum charge amount within a corresponding range, and determines the determined charge amount Charge a person.
  • the charging unit 33 sets the first number and the second number to the price of the highest priced item among the plurality of items 2. A value obtained by multiplying the larger one is charged as a consideration.
  • a malicious person hereinafter referred to as a Service-to-Self
  • the code reader 50 detects the identification indication 51 of the article 2 to identify the removed article 2
  • at least one of the removed articles 2 is identified by an unauthorized person. I can't do that.
  • the charging unit 33 performs the charging process by regarding the taken-out article 2 as the highest priced article among the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10. Specifically, the billing unit 33 charges as a price an amount obtained by multiplying the price of the item with the highest price among the plurality of items 2 by the first number.
  • the storage unit 34 is a memory for storing the person list 35.
  • the storage unit 34 is a nonvolatile storage medium such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) or a semiconductor memory.
  • the person list 35 is a list showing one or more persons registered in advance.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the registered person list 35 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • an ID is a management number uniquely assigned to a person, for example, an employee number.
  • the card information is a credit card number or a prepaid card number for settlement when charging a person.
  • Account information indicating a person's bank account or the like may be included in the person list 35 instead of the card information.
  • the price list 36 is a list indicating the prices of the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the price list 36 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the price list 36 is associated with a type and a price.
  • the type is, for example, the name of the article 2.
  • unique information such as a serial number
  • a price may be associated with each of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the communication unit 37 transmits and receives information to and from the control device 20 by wireless communication or wired communication.
  • the communication unit 37 performs wireless communication based on a communication standard such as Wi-Fi, 3G, 4G, or LTE, for example.
  • the communication unit 37 receives the first detection information, the second detection information, and the person information. In addition, the communication unit 37 transmits a verification result, a comparison result, billing information, and error information.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 is an example of a first detection unit that detects a plurality of articles 2 stored in the openable / closable casing 10 inside the casing 10.
  • the internal camera 40 is one or more cameras that photograph the inside of the housing 10.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 is attached to, for example, the inner surface of the main body 11 and photographs the storage space 11a. An image captured by the internal camera 40 is output to the control device 20.
  • the internal camera 40 is provided at the corner of the storage space 11a.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 is arranged in the upper part of the main body 11 and in the vicinity of the connection portion with the door 12. The internal camera 40 shoots from the front side of the storage space 11a as viewed from the door 12 side toward the back side.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 is a small camera that receives power supply via, for example, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable, is connected to the control device 20 with a USB cable, and operates with power supplied from the control device 20.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 may have a battery (battery) and may be operated by electric power supplied from the battery.
  • the internal camera 40 may have a fisheye lens. Thereby, the storage space 11a can be imaged over a wide range. Alternatively, the internal camera 40 may be attached to a movable pan head so that the shooting direction can be changed.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a shooting range 41 of the in-compartment camera 40 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is the figure which looked at the storage space 11a from the front (from the door 12 side).
  • the shooting range 41 of the internal camera 40 does not include the entire storage space 11a.
  • the lunch box 2c article 2 arranged in the lower stage is not photographed by the in-compartment camera 40, the lunch box 2c cannot be detected.
  • the article management system 1 includes a mirror 42 inside the housing 10 as shown in FIG.
  • the mirror 42 is disposed within the shooting range 41 of the internal camera 40 and captures the blind spot of the shooting range 41.
  • the mirror 42 shows a range 43 including the lunch box 2 c located in the imaging range 41.
  • the lunch box 2c reflected in the mirror 42 is included in the image photographed by the internal camera 40.
  • the articles 2 in the storage space 11a can be detected without increasing the number of cameras 40 in the warehouse.
  • the number of articles 2 housed in the housing 10 is counted by performing image recognition on the captured image taken by the internal camera 40.
  • a marker 44 having a predetermined color or a predetermined shape is attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the marker 44 is, for example, white or black, or a single color sticker such as a primary color such as red, green, or blue, and is attached to the surface of the article 2.
  • the color of the marker 44 is different from the color of the article 2.
  • the article 2 is a lunch box, blue or the like that is difficult to be used as a lunch box ingredient can be selected as the color of the marker 44.
  • the marker 44 is emphasized by extracting the blue portion from the photographed image. By counting the number of markers 44, the number of articles 2 stored in the housing 10 can be easily counted.
  • a reflective material may be attached to the article 2 instead of the marker 44.
  • the brightness of only the marker 44 is increased. Therefore, for example, the marker 44 can be emphasized by binarizing the pixel value of the captured image using a high threshold.
  • the number of articles 2 in the casing 10 before the casing 10 is opened is compared with the number of articles 2 after the casing 10 is closed.
  • the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 is specified.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 performs at least two photographings before or immediately after the housing 10 is opened and after the housing 10 is closed.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 performs imaging based on control by the control unit 21 of the control device 20. Specifically, the in-compartment camera 40 performs shooting at a timing when a shooting command is received from the control unit 21.
  • the imaging command is output from the control unit 21 before, for example, opening the housing 10 and after closing the housing 10.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 generates the first in-compartment image by photographing the inside of the housing 10 before the housing 10 is opened. That is, the first interior image is an image representing the state inside the housing 10 before the housing 10 is opened.
  • the internal camera 40 generates a second internal image by photographing the interior of the housing 10 after the housing 10 is closed. That is, the second internal image is an image that represents the internal state of the housing 10 after the housing 10 is closed.
  • the shooting timing of the internal camera 40 may be controlled based on the detection result of the open / close sensor 80.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 may generate the first in-compartment image by photographing the inside of the housing 10 immediately after the housing 10 is opened based on the detection result by the open / close sensor 80.
  • the storage camera 40 captures the inside of the housing 10 to generate a first storage image.
  • the first internal image is an image representing the internal state of the housing 10 immediately after the housing 10 is opened.
  • “immediately after being opened” is within a predetermined period after the housing 10 is opened.
  • the predetermined period is shorter than the time required for the user to take out the article 2 after opening the housing 10, and is, for example, 0 second to 1 second, but is not limited thereto.
  • the internal camera 40 captures an image within a predetermined period after the opening / closing sensor 80 detects that the housing 10 has been opened.
  • the internal camera 40 captures the inside of the housing 10 to generate a second internal image.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 takes an image within a predetermined period when the opening / closing sensor 80 detects that the housing 10 is closed.
  • the predetermined period is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 0 second to 1 second.
  • the timing of shooting of the internal camera 40 may be controlled in conjunction with the operation of the card reader 60.
  • the internal camera 40 may take an image of the inside of the housing 10 when the card reader 60 acquires person information.
  • the lock mechanism 70 has not been unlocked yet, so it is possible to reliably photograph the state in the cabinet before the housing 10 is opened.
  • the internal camera 40 may always take an image of the inside of the housing 10.
  • the internal camera 40, the control device 20, the management device 30, or the like may record video (moving images) for a predetermined period before and after opening and closing of the housing 10.
  • the information processing unit 23 of the control device 20 or the comparison unit 31 of the management device 30 displays the image before the housing 10 is opened from the plurality of images (frames) constituting the recorded video as the first interior image. And the image after the housing 10 is closed may be acquired as the second internal image.
  • the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 detects that the housing 10 is opened by the opening / closing sensor 80, the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 acquires an image before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) as the first interior image.
  • the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 detects that the housing 10 is closed by the open / close sensor 80, the image after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is used as the second interior image. You may get it.
  • a predetermined period for example, 1 second
  • the code reader 50 is an example of a second detection unit that detects a target article that is at least one of the plurality of articles 2 outside the housing 10. Specifically, the code reader 50 detects the target article, which is the article 2 taken out from the casing 10 by the user, outside the casing 10. In the present embodiment, the code reader 50 reads the identification display 51 attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the code reader 50 is a camera that is fixed to the outer surface of the housing 10 and photographs a predetermined area outside the housing 10.
  • the code reader 50 is a small camera that receives power supply via a USB cable, is connected to the control device 20 with a USB cable, and operates with power supplied from the control device 20.
  • the code reader 50 may include a battery (battery) and operate with electric power supplied from the battery.
  • the article 2 is given a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark) as an identification display 51.
  • a QR code registered trademark
  • the identification display 51 attached to the article 2 is information unique to the attached article 2.
  • the identification display 51 is a two-dimensional code in which serial numbers (manufacturing numbers) of the article 2 are matrixed.
  • the two-dimensional code is printed on a label 52 attached to the upper surface of the article 2.
  • the article 2 is a lunch box, it is not preferable to tilt the article 2 or turn it over to prevent the ingredients from being scattered and the juice from spilling out. That is, it is desirable that the article 2 is carried while maintaining the posture stored in the housing 10. This is the same when the identification display 51 is read by the code reader 50.
  • the code reader 50 can read the identification display 51 attached to the target article when the target article is in the same attitude as that stored in the housing 10. It has a detection range.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the user 3 holds the article 2 over the code reader 50 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9, the code reader 50 has a substantially conical detection range 53 having a vertically downward center axis. For this reason, when the user 3 takes out the article 2, the identification display 51 can be read by the code reader 50 in the same posture.
  • the code reader 50 is, for example, a bar code reader, and the identification display 51 attached to the article 2 may be a bar code. Further, the code reader 50 may not be fixed to the housing 10 and the detection range 53 may be freely changed by a user holding it with his / her hand.
  • the card reader 60 is an example of an acquisition unit that acquires person information indicating a person who opens the housing 10.
  • the card reader 60 is a contact-type or non-contact-type card reader that reads card information such as a credit card or an ID card as person information.
  • the card reader 60 is fixed to the outer surface of the housing 10.
  • the card reader 60 acquires card information stored in the IC chip by communicating with the IC chip mounted on a credit card or ID card.
  • the card reader 60 may read card information from an IC chip mounted on a portable information terminal such as a mobile phone or a smartphone.
  • the card reader 60 reads card information by performing close proximity wireless communication with a credit card, an ID card, or a portable information terminal.
  • the read card information is output (transmitted) to the verification unit 32 of the management device 30 via the control device 20.
  • the card information is an example of person information indicating the person who opens the housing 10, that is, the owner of the card.
  • the card information includes information unique to the card owner.
  • the card information includes information indicating at least one of a card number, an owner's name, and an expiration date of the card.
  • the credit card or ID card may be a magnetic stripe card.
  • a magnetic reader magnetic card reader
  • the card reader 60 can be used as the card reader 60.
  • the article management system 1 includes a biometric information acquisition unit that acquires biometric information of a person who opens the housing 10 as personal information. You may provide as an example of an acquisition part.
  • the article management system 1 may include a biological information acquisition unit instead of the card reader 60, and may include a biological information acquisition unit in addition to the card reader 60.
  • the biological information includes information indicating at least one of a fingerprint, a retina, an iris, a face, a voiceprint, and a blood vessel (vein).
  • the biological information acquisition unit is, for example, a fingerprint sensor, a vein sensor, a microphone, or a camera (image sensor). At this time, the camera may be used also as the code reader 50.
  • the lock mechanism 70 restricts opening and closing of the housing 10. Specifically, the lock mechanism 70 limits the opening and closing of the door 12.
  • the lock mechanism 70 is connected to the control device 20, and unlocking and locking are controlled by the lock control unit 22.
  • FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the lock mechanism 70 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 shows a state where the door 12 of the housing 10 is opened.
  • the lock mechanism 70 includes an electronic lock (male key) 71 and a female key 72.
  • the electronic lock 71 of the lock mechanism 70 and the control device 20 are connected by a connection cable 73.
  • the electronic lock 71 is a lock that switches between unlocking and locking depending on whether or not a predetermined voltage is applied.
  • the electronic lock 71 is unlocked when a predetermined voltage (for example, 12 V) is applied, and maintains the locked state when no voltage is applied. That is, the electronic lock 71 is a normally-off type electronic lock.
  • the electronic lock 71 has a claw portion 71a and a holding housing 71b.
  • the claw portion 71a is held so as to be able to be taken in and out of the holding housing 71b.
  • the holding housing 71 b is fixed to the inner side surface of the main body 11 of the housing 10.
  • the holding housing 71b is fixed to the inner surface of the main body 11 using a fixing tool such as a screw.
  • the claw portion 71a and the holding housing 71b are formed using, for example, a strong (rigid) metal or resin material.
  • the female key 72 has a hole 72a.
  • the claw portion 71a of the electronic lock 71 is inserted into the hole 72a.
  • the female key 72 is formed using a strong (rigid) metal or resin material.
  • connection cable 73 is an example of wiring that electrically and physically connects the electronic lock 71 and the control device 20.
  • the connection cable 73 includes a power cable for supplying power to the electronic lock 71.
  • the electronic lock 71 includes a drive unit housed in the holding housing 71b.
  • the drive unit is a servo motor or the like that moves the claw unit 71a using an applied voltage.
  • FIG. 11 is a side view showing an unlocked state and a locked state of the lock mechanism 70 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a top view of the locking mechanism 70 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment in a locked state.
  • the claw portion 71a protrudes from the holding casing 71b.
  • the protruding claw portion 71a is inserted into the hole 72a of the female key 72, and movement of the claw portion 71a in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the protruding direction) is restricted.
  • the claw portion 71a is restricted from moving in all directions orthogonal to the protruding direction. Thereby, the claw part 71a and the female key 72 are latched, and the locked state of the lock mechanism 70 is maintained.
  • the drive unit moves the claw portion 71a so as to be housed in the holding housing 71b. While the voltage is applied, the state in which the claw portion 71a is housed in the holding housing 71b is maintained. As a result, as shown on the right side of FIG. 11, the claw portion 71 a and the female key 72 are not locked, so that the door 12 can be opened.
  • FIG. 11 shows an example in which the claw portion 71a is completely stored in the holding housing 71b, the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the claw portion 71a and the female key 72 may be in a positional relationship where they are not locked (not in contact).
  • the female key 72 is configured in a ring shape and restricts the movement of the claw portion 71a in all directions orthogonal to the protruding direction. Absent.
  • the female key 72 restricts the movement of the claw portion 71a in the direction of opening the door 12, but does not need to restrict the movement of the claw portion 71a in the direction of closing the door 12.
  • the lock mechanism can be automatically locked only by closing the door 12. That is, it is not necessary to stop the application of voltage after detecting that the door 12 is closed.
  • the application of voltage can be stopped and power consumption can be reduced. it can.
  • an electronic lock (male key) 71 may be attached to the door 12 and a female key 72 may be attached to the housing 10.
  • a female key 72 may be attached to the housing 10.
  • the female key 72 may be a recess provided in the housing 10 or the door 12 (for example, similar to a recess 772 of the individual housing 710 described later).
  • the lock mechanism 70 is a physical lock mechanism.
  • the lock mechanism 70 may be a lock mechanism using an electromagnet. The same applies to the individual lock mechanism 770 described later.
  • the opening / closing sensor 80 detects opening / closing of the housing 10. Specifically, the open / close sensor 80 detects that the door 12 is opened and closed.
  • the open / close sensor 80 is a contact-type open / close sensor such as a tact switch.
  • the opening / closing sensor 80 is fixed to the main body 11 or the electronic lock 71, for example.
  • the open / close sensor 80 has a switch portion (not shown) that is pressed when the door 12 is closed and is pushed up when the door 12 is opened.
  • the open / close sensor 80 transmits a predetermined signal (close signal) to the control device 20 when the switch unit is pressed, and stops transmission of the close signal when the switch unit is not pressed.
  • the control device 20 can determine whether the door 12 is opened or closed based on whether or not the closing signal is received. Specifically, the lock control unit 22 of the control device 20 determines that the door 12 is closed when the close signal is received. When the lock signal is not received, the lock control unit 22 determines that the door 12 is opened.
  • the open / close sensor 80 may transmit a predetermined signal (open signal) when the switch unit is not pressed, and may stop transmitting the open signal when the switch unit is pressed. Alternatively, the open / close sensor 80 may transmit a close signal and an open signal in accordance with the pressed state of the switch unit.
  • the open / close sensor 80 may not be a contact type open / close sensor.
  • the open / close sensor 80 may be a magnetic sensor.
  • a reed switch or a coil that is electrically connected to the lock control unit 22 is attached to the main body 11, and a permanent magnet is attached to the door 12.
  • the permanent magnet comes close to the reed switch, the reed switch becomes conductive, and a current flows.
  • the permanent magnet approaches the coil, and current flows through the coil by electromagnetic induction. These currents are output to the lock control unit 22 as a closing signal.
  • the guide unit 90 guides the target article to the person who opens the housing 10. For example, the guide unit 90 guides the article 2 recommended for the person who opens the housing 10 or the article 2 that has been designated (reserved) in advance by the person.
  • the guide unit 90 includes a display unit 91 and an audio output unit 92.
  • the display unit 91 displays guidance information for guiding the storage position of the target article.
  • the display unit 91 is a liquid crystal display (LCD) or an organic EL display that has a plurality of pixels arranged in a matrix and can display an image or video.
  • the display unit 91 displays a guide image and the like.
  • the display unit 91 may be a plurality of light emitting elements attached to predetermined positions of the housing 10.
  • the plurality of light emitting elements are arranged in a line along the edge of the opening of the main body 11 of the housing 10. By switching between lighting and extinguishing of each of the plurality of light emitting elements, the position of the target article corresponding to the position of the lighted light emitting element can be indicated.
  • the plurality of light emitting elements are, for example, LED (Light Emitting Diode) elements, but are not limited thereto.
  • the voice output unit 92 outputs guidance information for guiding the storage position of the target article as voice.
  • the audio output unit 92 is a speaker element, for example, and is attached to the housing 10 or the control device 20.
  • the guide unit 90 also functions as a notification unit. That is, the guide unit 90 notifies a person around the housing 10 that some problem has occurred in the article management system 1.
  • the guide unit 90 when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number, the guide unit 90 notifies the person indicated by the person information that a problem has occurred. Specifically, the guide unit 90 notifies the person who took out the article 2 from the housing 10 that some fraud has been performed.
  • the sound output unit 92 may emit a warning sound (buzzer sound) or a warning sound.
  • the display unit 91 may cause the LED element to blink. When the display unit 91 can display images or characters, a warning message or the like may be displayed.
  • the guide unit 90 notifies the person indicated by the person information that there is an error.
  • all the articles 2 are each provided with a unique identification display 51.
  • the code reader 50 may read the identification display 51 of one article 2 a plurality of times by mistake.
  • the guide unit 90 can inform the user that there is an error.
  • FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 13 shows the operation of the article management system 1 when the user operates according to the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • the card reader 60 detects the approach of the ID card (S10).
  • the card reader 60 reads card information from the ID card by proximity wireless communication.
  • the card reader 60 transmits the read card information to the control device 20 as person information indicating a person who is trying to open the housing 10 (S12).
  • the control device 20 transmits the person information transmitted from the card reader 60 to the management device 30 via the communication unit 26 (S14).
  • the management device 30 receives person information via the communication unit 37.
  • the verification unit 32 performs verification (personal authentication) processing using the received personal information (S16). Specifically, the collation unit 32 collates the person list 35 with the person indicated by the person information, and outputs a collation result. The collation result is transmitted to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 (S18). The control device 20 receives the collation result via the communication unit 26.
  • the control unit 21 In the control device 20, the control unit 21 generates a predetermined command based on the collation result (S20). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 and the lock control unit 22 of the control unit 21 generate a shooting command and an unlock command when the collation result indicates that the person matches. Note that when the collation result indicates that the person does not match, the information processing unit 23 causes the guide unit 90 to perform error notification. Details will be described later.
  • the information processing unit 23 outputs the generated shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S22).
  • the in-compartment camera 40 photographs the inside of the housing 10 (S24), and transmits the first in-compartment image obtained by the photographing to the control device 20 (S26).
  • the lock control unit 22 of the control unit 21 outputs the generated unlock command to the lock mechanism 70 (S28).
  • the lock control unit 22 supplies a predetermined voltage for unlocking to the lock mechanism 70 as an unlock command.
  • the unlocking command may be output simultaneously with the shooting command.
  • the imaging command may be output after the unlocking command is output.
  • the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked in response to the unlock command (S30). Specifically, the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked by the drive unit storing the claw portion 71a in the holding housing 71b by the supplied voltage. At this time, the guide unit 90 may guide that the lock mechanism 70 has been unlocked. For example, the display unit 91 may light the LED element. Alternatively, the voice output unit 92 may output voice guidance indicating that the lock mechanism 70 has been unlocked. The user can open the door 12 by unlocking the lock mechanism 70.
  • the open / close sensor 80 detects that the door 12 has been opened (S32). Although not shown in FIG. 13, the open / close sensor 80 may transmit an open signal indicating that the door 12 has been opened to the control device 20. Then, the control device 20 may activate the code reader 50 by receiving an open signal. As a result, the power consumption can be reduced by starting the code reader 50 only when necessary and not supplying power when it is not necessary.
  • the code reader 50 reads the identification display 51 of the article 2 (S34).
  • the code reader 50 outputs the identification information (such as the serial number of the article 2) included in the read identification display 51 to the control device 20 (S36).
  • the open / close sensor 80 detects that the door 12 is closed (S38), and transmits a close signal indicating that the door 12 is closed to the control device 20 (S40).
  • control unit 21 After receiving the close signal, the control unit 21 generates a predetermined command (S42). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 and the lock control unit 22 of the control unit 21 generate a shooting command and a locking command.
  • the information processing unit 23 outputs the generated shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S44).
  • the internal camera 40 receives the imaging command to image the inside of the housing 10 (S46), and transmits the second internal image obtained by the imaging to the control device 20 (S48).
  • the lock control unit 22 outputs the generated locking command to the lock mechanism 70 (S50).
  • the lock control unit 22 stops supplying a predetermined voltage to the lock mechanism 70 as a lock command.
  • the locking command may be output simultaneously with the shooting command.
  • the imaging command may be output after the locking command is output.
  • the lock mechanism 70 is locked in response to the locking command (S52). Specifically, when the supply of voltage is stopped and the operation of the driving unit is stopped, the claw portion 71a protrudes from the holding housing 71b. Thereby, the claw portion 71a is inserted into the hole 72a of the female key 72, and the lock mechanism 70 is locked.
  • control device 20 transmits the first image inside the image and the second image inside the image (that is, the first detection information) and the identification information (second detection information) to the management device 30 via the communication unit 26. (S54).
  • the communication unit 26 transmits the first image inside the image, the second image inside the image, and the identification information together.
  • the management device 30 the first image in the warehouse, the second image in the cabinet, and the identification information are received via the communication unit 37.
  • the comparison unit 31 performs a comparison process based on the first and second image images and the identification information (S56). Specifically, the comparison unit 31 includes a first number that is an increase / decrease number of the plurality of articles 2 before and after the opening / closing of the housing 10 and a second number that is the number of articles 2 detected by the code reader 50. Make a comparison.
  • the charging unit 33 performs a charging process based on the comparison result (S58). Specifically, the billing unit 33 determines a billing amount based on the identified item 2 and the price of the item 2, and performs a settlement process or a withdrawal process for the determined billing amount.
  • the management device 30 transmits billing information to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 (S60).
  • the billing information is information indicating a billing amount, for example.
  • control unit 21 In the control device 20, the control unit 21 generates voice guidance or a guidance image based on the billing information (S62). The generated voice guidance or guidance image is output to the guidance unit 90, and the display unit 91 or voice output unit 92 of the guidance unit 90 outputs the voice guidance or guidance image.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 20 according to the present embodiment.
  • the control device 20 waits until personal information is acquired (No in S101).
  • the communication unit 26 transmits the personal information to the management device 30 (S102, S14 in FIG. 13).
  • the management device 30 performs a collation process (S16) based on the person information.
  • the control device 20 waits until the communication unit 26 receives a verification success notification or until a predetermined period elapses (No in S103 and No in S114).
  • the control device 20 performs error processing (S117). Details of the error processing will be described later.
  • the verification success notification is a verification result indicating that the persons match.
  • the verification failure notification is a verification result indicating that the persons do not match.
  • the control unit 21 When the communication unit 26 receives the verification success notification (Yes in S103), the control unit 21 generates a photographing command and an unlocking command (S104, S20 in FIG. 13). Next, the information processing unit 23 of the control unit 21 transmits a shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S105, S22 of FIG. 13), and further, the lock control unit 22 transmits an unlocking command to the lock mechanism 70. (S106, S28 in FIG. 13). Note that, as described above, either the imaging command or the unlocking command may be transmitted first or simultaneously. Since the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked, the user opens / closes the housing 10 and takes out the article 2.
  • the control device 20 waits until the identification information and the closing signal are received (No in S107 and No in S115). When the predetermined period has passed without receiving at least one of the identification information and the closing signal (Yes in S115), the control device 20 performs error processing (S117).
  • the control unit 21 When the identification information and the closing signal are received (Yes in S107), the control unit 21 generates a photographing command and a locking command (S108, S42 in FIG. 13). Next, the information processing unit 23 of the control unit 21 transmits a shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S109, S44 of FIG. 13), and the lock control unit 22 transmits a locking command to the lock mechanism 70 (S110, S50 in FIG. 13).
  • the communication unit 26 transmits the first in-compartment image, the second in-compartment image, and the identification information (S111, S54 in FIG. 13).
  • the first and second internal images are images transmitted from the internal camera 40 as a response to the shooting command transmitted in each of steps S106 and S108.
  • error processing described later is performed (S117).
  • the control device 20 waits until the communication unit 26 receives the billing information (No in S112 and No in S116).
  • the control device 20 performs error processing (S117).
  • the control unit 21 When the communication unit 26 receives the billing information (Yes in S112), the control unit 21 generates guidance information such as voice guidance or a guidance image based on the billing information, and causes the guidance unit 90 to output the guidance information (S113). Thereafter, the control device 20 returns to step S101 and waits for the next person information to be acquired.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing error processing performed by the control device 20 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the control device 20 determines whether or not the housing 10 is in a closed state (S121). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 determines whether a close signal is received from the open / close sensor 80.
  • the lock control unit 22 When the housing 10 is in a closed state (Yes in S121), the lock control unit 22 generates a lock command and transmits it to the lock mechanism 70 (S122). Thereafter, the lock control unit 22 maintains the lock state of the lock mechanism 70. That is, the lock control unit 22 prohibits unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 even when personal information or the like is acquired.
  • the information processing unit 23 reports an error (S123). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 generates a guidance image, audio guidance, or warning sound indicating that an error has occurred, and outputs it to the guidance unit 90.
  • the display unit 91 or the voice output unit 92 of the guide unit 90 outputs a guide image, voice guide, or warning sound to notify a person who is about to open the housing 10. Further, the information processing unit 23 may notify the management device 30 of the occurrence of an error via the communication unit 26.
  • the lock control unit 22 When the housing 10 is not closed (No in S121), the lock control unit 22 notifies the error by the information processing unit 23 without outputting a locking command (S123). If a locking command is output with the housing 10 opened, the housing 10 may not be closed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the closed state of the casing 10 by outputting the locking command only when the casing 10 is closed.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a collation process performed by the management device 30 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the collation process is the process of step S16 shown in FIG. 13 and is performed after receiving personal information via the communication unit 37.
  • the collation unit 32 collates the person list 35 with the person indicated by the person information (S131).
  • the matching unit 32 generates and outputs a matching result indicating matching of the person as a matching success notification (S133).
  • the verification success notification is transmitted to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 and is output to the billing unit 33.
  • the collation unit 32 If the person indicated by the person information does not match the person included in the person list 35 (No in S132), the collation unit 32 generates a collation result indicating a mismatch between the persons as a collation failure notification and outputs the collation failure notification (S134).
  • the verification failure notification is transmitted to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a code reading process performed by the code reader 50 and the control device 20 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the code reading process is the process of step S34 shown in FIG.
  • the code reader 50 waits until the identification display 51 is read (No in S141).
  • the information processing unit 23 acquires the read identification display 51 and determines whether or not it is the same as the previously read identification display ( S142).
  • the information processing unit 23 includes a storage unit and stores an identification display read before. Only the identification display read immediately before may be memorize
  • the information processing unit 23 transmits the identification information included in the identification display 51 to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 26 (S143). ).
  • the information processing section 23 reports an error (S144). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 generates a warning sound or a guidance image or voice guidance that informs that the read identification display 51 is the same as the read identification display 51, and outputs it to the guide unit 90.
  • the display unit 91 or the voice output unit 92 of the guide unit 90 can output a guide image or a voice guide to notify the user of an error.
  • the determination of the read identification display 51 may be performed by the code reader 50 instead of the information processing unit 23.
  • the management device 30 may make the determination.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of comparison and billing processing performed by the management device 30 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. Note that the comparison and billing processes are steps S56 and S58 shown in FIG. 13 and are performed after receiving the first detection information (internal image) and the second detection information (identification information) via the communication unit 37.
  • the comparison unit 31 counts the increase / decrease number of the article 2 as the first number based on the first image in the first box and the second image in the box (S151). Specifically, the comparison unit 31 counts the number of articles 2 included in each image by performing image processing on each of the first and second image images.
  • the comparison unit 31 performs a binarization process for each of the first and second internal images.
  • the comparison unit 31 performs binarization processing on a pixel value of each image with a value higher than the median value (for example, 80% of the maximum value) as a threshold value.
  • the white marker 44 can be emphasized in the image.
  • the comparison unit 31 can highlight the marker 44 in the image by extracting only the color of the marker 44 (for example, blue).
  • the comparison unit 31 obtains the number of articles 2 (first article number) before the housing 10 is opened by counting the number of highlighted markers 44 in the first image inside the cabinet. Similarly, the comparison unit 31 obtains the number of articles 2 (second article number) after the housing 10 is closed by counting the number of highlighted markers 44 in the second internal image. To do. The comparison unit 31 calculates the first number by subtracting the second number of items from the first number of items.
  • the comparison unit 31 counts the number of identification information received by the communication unit 37 as a second number (S152).
  • the number of identification information is the number of identification displays 51 read by the code reader 50.
  • the number of pieces of identification information matches the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 by the user as long as it is used according to the correct procedure.
  • the comparison unit 31 compares the first number with the second number (S153). If the first number and the second number match (Yes in S153), the charging unit 33 calculates a charging amount based on the identification information (S154). Specifically, the billing unit 33 refers to the price list 36 stored in the storage unit 34 to acquire individual prices of the target article. The billing unit 33 calculates the total amount as the billing amount by multiplying and adding the price and the number of the target articles.
  • the billing unit 33 multiplies the price of the highest article 2 by the larger of the first number and the second number, thereby charging the bill. Is calculated (S155). If the first number and the second number do not match, it is considered that some injustice has been performed by the Service-to-Self. For this reason, the billing unit 33 calculates the maximum amount that can be lost by the Service-to-Self as the billing amount.
  • the billing unit 33 After calculating the billing amount, the billing unit 33 generates billing information and transmits it to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 (S156).
  • the example in which the charging unit 33 charges the maximum amount when the first number and the second number are inconsistent and there is a suspicion of fraud is not limited to this. Instead of charging the maximum amount, an error (illegal) may be notified to the user.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing another example of comparison and charging processing performed by the management apparatus 30 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 differs from FIG. 18 in the processing when the first number and the second number do not match, and the other processing is the same.
  • the comparison unit 31 uses the comparison result indicating the mismatch as an error notification via the communication unit 37.
  • the control device 20 controls the control device 20 (S155a). The control device 20 that has received the error notification performs the error processing shown in FIG.
  • the article management system 1 is configured to detect the plurality of articles 2 housed in the openable / closable casing 10 in the casing 10 (for example, The camera 40) and a second detection unit (for example, a code reader 50) that detects a target article that is at least one of the plurality of articles 2 outside the housing 10 are provided. Further, the article management system 1 includes an output unit (for example, the communication unit 26) that outputs first detection information indicating a detection result by the first detection unit and second detection information indicating a detection result by the second detection unit. Prepare.
  • the first detection information indicating the detection results inside the casing 10 of the plurality of articles 2 housed in the casing 10 and the second detection information indicating the detection results outside the casing 10 are output. Therefore, by performing the comparison based on the two pieces of information, the state of the article 2 inside and outside the casing 10 can be grasped. Therefore, for example, according to the article management system 1, it is possible to manage whether or not the article 2 is taken out from the casing 10, how many articles 2 are stored in the casing 10, and the like.
  • the internal camera 40 which is an example of the first detection unit
  • the code reader 50 which is an example of the second detection unit
  • the case 10 may be attached to the case 10 and the dedicated case 10 is not required. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a highly versatile article management system 1 that can manage a plurality of articles 2 with a simple configuration.
  • the article management system 1 further includes the first number and the casing 10 which are the increase / decrease numbers of the plurality of articles 2 before and after the opening and closing of the casing 10 based on the first detection information and the second detection information.
  • the comparison part 31 which compares with the 2nd number which is the number of the articles
  • the article management system 1 further includes an acquisition unit (for example, a card reader 60) that acquires person information indicating a person who opens the housing 10, and the communication unit 26 further outputs the person information.
  • an acquisition unit for example, a card reader 60
  • the communication unit 26 further outputs the person information.
  • the person who opens and closes the housing 10 can be specified by acquiring the person information. Therefore, for example, only the specified person can open and close the casing 10, and the casing 10 cannot be opened to an unspecified person. In this way, the management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
  • the article management system 1 further collates a person list 35 indicating one or more persons registered in advance with a person indicated by the person information, and outputs a collation result indicating matching or mismatching of the persons.
  • the unit 32 is provided.
  • the article management system 1 further includes a lock mechanism 70 that restricts opening and closing of the housing 10 and a lock control unit 22 that controls the lock mechanism 70. When the match is indicated, the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked.
  • the opening and closing of the housing 10 can be restricted, so that the management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
  • the article management system 1 further includes a billing unit 33 that charges at least one consideration of the plurality of articles 2 to the person indicated by the person information.
  • the article management system 1 can be used as an automatic sales system.
  • the billing unit 33 charges the price of the target article when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a match between the first number and the second number.
  • the billing unit 33 sets the first number to the price of the highest priced item among the plurality of items 2. A value obtained by multiplying the larger number of the second number is charged as a consideration.
  • the Service-to-Self pretends that only the cheap article 2 has been taken out even though the article 2 with high price and the cheap article 2 have been taken out from the housing 10.
  • the Service-to-Self since it is possible to charge the Service-to-Self as if the two highest-priced articles 2 were taken out of the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10, there is a loss for the manager of the articles 2. Does not occur.
  • the Service-to-Self are charged an amount that is greater than or equal to the actual charge amount of the extracted item 2. For this reason, for the Service-to-Self, a fine effect occurs and it also becomes a deterrent. Therefore, as a result, the management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
  • the article management system 1 further includes a notification unit (for example, a guide unit 90) that notifies a person when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number. Also good.
  • a notification unit for example, a guide unit 90
  • the first detection unit is one or more cameras (specifically, the internal camera 40) that captures the inside of the housing 10.
  • the camera since the camera may be attached to a location where the inside of the housing 10 can be photographed, a plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10 can be easily detected.
  • the article management system 1 further includes a mirror 42 that is disposed inside the housing 10 and within the imaging range 41 of one or more in-house cameras 40 and reflects the blind spot of the imaging range 41. Good.
  • the articles 2 existing in the blind spot of the camera are reflected in the mirror 42, more articles 2 can be detected by one camera.
  • the article 2 located at the blind spot of the camera can be detected with a simple configuration as compared with the case where a pan head or the like for driving the camera is provided.
  • the article management system 1 may further include a marker 44 or a reflector having a predetermined color or a predetermined shape attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the marker 44 can be emphasized by image processing such as binarization processing, the number of articles 2 can be easily counted. Therefore, since the occurrence of counting errors (for example, counting omissions or duplications) can be suppressed, the accuracy of management of the article 2 can be increased.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 generates a first in-compartment image by photographing the inside of the housing 10 before the housing 10 is opened or immediately after the housing 10 is opened.
  • the second interior image is generated by photographing the inside of the housing 10 after the body 10 is closed, and the communication unit 26 outputs the first interior image and the second interior image as the first detection information.
  • the comparison part 31 counts a 1st number by image-processing each of the 1st image in a container and the 2nd image in a container.
  • the second detection unit is a code reader 50 that reads the identification display 51 attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the code reader 50 may be attached to the outer surface of the housing 10 or in the vicinity thereof, the article 2 taken out from the housing 10 can be easily detected.
  • the identification display 51 is a bar code or a two-dimensional code.
  • the identification display 51 can be easily read using a barcode reader or a camera.
  • the detection range 53 is such that the identification display 51 attached to the target article can be read.
  • the identification display 51 is information unique to the attached article, and the article management system 1 further notifies the person when the code reader 50 reads the same identification display a plurality of times. (For example, a guide unit 90).
  • the person when a plurality of articles 2 are taken out from the housing 10, the person can be informed when the identification display 51 of one article 2 is erroneously or maliciously read a plurality of times. . Therefore, when a Service-to-Other person makes a mistake, it is possible to make an error notice. In addition, when the Service-to-Self performs maliciously, it is possible to notify other people around the case 10 of unauthorized use. Therefore, as a result, the article 2 can be managed more strictly.
  • the article management system 1 further includes a guide unit 90 that guides the target article to the person who opens the housing 10.
  • the guide unit 90 includes a display unit 91 that displays guide information for guiding the storage position of the target article.
  • the article management system 1 can be used even by a hearing-impaired person or the like. Therefore, the article management system 1 with high user accessibility can be realized.
  • the guide unit 90 includes a voice output unit 92 that outputs guidance information for guiding the storage position of the target article as a voice.
  • the article management system 1 can be used even by a low vision person or a color blind person by outputting the guidance information as sound. Therefore, the article management system 1 with high user accessibility can be realized.
  • the article management system 1 includes the control device 20 including the communication unit 26 and the management device 30 including the comparison unit 31, and the communication unit 26 transmits the first detection information and the first information by wireless communication or wired communication. By transmitting the two detection information to the management device 30, the first detection information and the second detection information are output to the comparison unit 31.
  • control device 20 can be attached to the housing 10 and the management device 30 can be arranged in a remote place away from the housing 10.
  • the management device 30 manages the person list 35, the price list 36, and the like, so that falsification by a Service-to-Self can be suppressed. Therefore, management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
  • the article management system 1 further includes a housing 10.
  • a dedicated housing 10 can be used according to the article 2 to be stored. Since the dedicated housing 10 is used, versatility is lowered, but strict management suitable for the article 2 can be performed.
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the housing 10a of the article management system according to this modification.
  • the configuration of the housing 10a illustrated in FIG. 20 is substantially the same as the configuration of the housing 10 according to the first embodiment, and includes two shelf members 13a and 13b instead of the two shelf members 13. Is different.
  • the shelf members 13a and 13b are examples of partition members for dividing the storage space 11a in the main body 11 into a plurality of partial spaces, like the shelf member 13 according to the first embodiment.
  • the shelf members 13a and 13b are formed using a flat plate or a flat net.
  • the shelf member 13a is arranged on the upper side of the shelf member 13b.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 is attached to the upper corner of the inner wall of the main body unit 11 as in the first embodiment. That is, the shelf member 13a is arranged at a position closer to the in-compartment camera 40 than the shelf member 13b.
  • the length in the depth direction is different between the shelf material 13a and the shelf material 13b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the length L1 of the shelf 13a in the depth direction is shorter than the length L2 of the shelf 13b in the depth direction. Therefore, the lunch box 2a disposed on the upper shelf 13a is disposed on the back side of the storage space 11a, and the lunch box 2c disposed on the floor surface of the lower body portion 11 is disposed on the front side of the storage space 11a. Can be arranged. That is, when the lunch boxes 2a to 2c are viewed from above, the lunch boxes 2a to 2c can be arranged so that part or all of them do not overlap.
  • the lunch boxes 2a to 2c (a plurality of articles 2) can be prevented from overlapping in the photographed image. Therefore, it is easy to count the number of lunch boxes 2a to 2c (a plurality of articles 2) by image processing, and the occurrence of counting errors and the like can be suppressed.
  • FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit 140 of the article management system according to this modification.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor 143 of the in-compartment sensor unit 140 according to this modification.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a state in which a plurality of articles 2 are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 140 according to this modification.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the article 2 is detached from the detachable sensor 143 according to the present modification.
  • the article management system includes an in-compartment sensor unit 140 shown in FIG. 21 as an example of the first detection unit instead of the in-compartment camera 40.
  • the in-compartment sensor unit 140 includes a support plate 141, a plurality of electrode portions 142, a plurality of detachable sensors 143, and a plurality of wirings 144.
  • the support plate 141 supports a plurality of detachable sensors 143. As shown in FIG. 21, the support plate 141 is provided with a plurality of electrode portions 142, and the removable sensor 143 is supported in association with the electrode portions 142.
  • the support plate 141 is, for example, a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and is disposed inside the housing 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23, the support plate 141 is fixed in an upright manner with respect to the floor surface of the main body 11 so as to be parallel to the inner surface of the back of the main body 11.
  • the plurality of electrode portions 142 are electrodes for applying a voltage to the corresponding detachable sensor 143.
  • the electrode part 142 also functions as a detection electrode for detecting a detection signal (current during energization) of the detachable sensor 143.
  • each of the plurality of electrode portions 142 is connected to the wiring 144.
  • the wiring 144 is a conductive wire for transmitting a detection signal to the control device 20 and is connected to the control device 20.
  • the plurality of wirings 144 are collectively connected to one connector (not shown), for example.
  • the end of the cable connected to the control device 20 is exposed inside the housing 10, and the connector of the wiring 144 is connected to the end.
  • the in-compartment sensor unit 140 can be easily installed in the housing 10. That is, it is not necessary to connect each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 to the control device 20.
  • a larger number of electrode portions 142 than the detachable sensor 143 are provided on the support plate 141.
  • one electrode part 142 is selected from the plurality of electrode parts 142 in accordance with the size, shape, arrangement, and the like of the article 2, and the removable electrode attached to the article 2 to the selected electrode part 142.
  • the sensor 143 can be contacted and fixed.
  • each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 sandwiches the ends of the plurality of articles 2.
  • Each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 is fixed to the support plate 141 so as to be in contact with the electrode part 142 located at a position corresponding to the height of the article 2.
  • the plurality of detachable sensors 143 are sensors that are detachably attached to each of the plurality of articles 2. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, the detachable sensor 143 is a clip-type sensor. Specifically, the detachable sensor 143 includes a clip body 143a, a sandwiching part 143b, a conductive part 143c, and a guide part 143d. The detachable sensor 143 detects the detachment of the corresponding article 2 by energizing when the holding portions 143b come into contact with each other.
  • the clip main body 143a has a shape substantially along the side surface of the triangular prism, and a clamping portion 143b provided on one side is in contact.
  • the clip body 143a has elasticity and elastically deforms when a force is applied. Specifically, when an object is inserted between the holding portions 143b, the clip body 143a is elastically deformed.
  • the clip body 143a is formed using, for example, an insulating material such as a resin material.
  • the clamping part 143b clamps at least a part of the corresponding article 2.
  • the sandwiching portion 143b is formed using a conductive material such as metal.
  • the conductive portion 143c is electrically connected to the sandwiching portion 143b.
  • the conductive portion 143c contacts the electrode portion 142 when the detachable sensor 143 is attached to the support plate 141.
  • a current flows through the electrode portion 142 through the conductive portion 143c.
  • the guide part 143d is a part of the clip main body 143a, and is a part located on the tip side from the sandwiching part 143b.
  • the guide parts 143d are formed so as to be separated from each other as they are separated from the holding part 143b. Thereby, the article 2 can be easily held by the holding part 143b by inserting it along the guide part 143d.
  • Each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 is fixed to the support plate 141 so as to contact the corresponding electrode part 142.
  • the detachable sensor 143 may be screwed to the support plate 141 or may be bonded to the support plate 141 with an adhesive sheet.
  • the detachable sensor 143 or the support plate 141 may be a magnetic body, and the detachable sensor 143 may be fixed to the support plate 141 by a magnetic force.
  • the clip body 143a when the article 2 is inserted between the sandwiching portions 143b, the clip body 143a is elastically deformed to apply an urging force to the sandwiching portion 143b so as to sandwich the article 2. .
  • the holding portions 143b are insulated without being in contact with each other. For this reason, no current flows through the sandwiching portion 143b.
  • the clamping part 143b comes into contact. At this time, since a voltage is applied to the clamping part 143b via the conductive part 143c and the electrode part 142, the clamping part 143b is energized. The current flowing through the sandwiching portion 143b is output to the control device 20 as a detection signal through the conductive portion 143c, the electrode portion 142, and the wiring 144.
  • FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system according to this modification.
  • the article management system according to the present modification includes a detachable sensor 143 instead of the internal camera 40, as compared with the article management system according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. Prepare.
  • FIG. 25 only one detachable sensor 143 is shown.
  • the article management system according to this modification includes a plurality of detachable sensors 143.
  • This modification is different from the first embodiment in that the control device 20 does not generate a shooting command.
  • the lock control unit 22 when the collation result indicates that the person matches (that is, when the personal authentication is successful), the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S20a).
  • the lock control unit 22 outputs an unlock command to the lock mechanism 70 (S28), and the lock mechanism 70 is released (S30).
  • the detachable sensor 143 detects the take-out of the article 2 (S33a). Specifically, when the article 2 is taken out, as shown in FIG. 24, the sandwiching portions 143b come into contact with each other and are energized. The detachable sensor 143 outputs the current flowing through the electrode portion 142 and the wiring 144 as a detection signal to the control device 20 (S33b).
  • the information processing unit 23 of the control device 20 can determine the number of articles 2 taken out by counting the number of detection signals.
  • the information processing unit 23 transmits the determined number as detection information together with the identification information to the management device 30 (S54a).
  • the operations of the constituent elements other than the control device 20 and the detachable sensor 143 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
  • the image process is not performed, and the comparison is performed using the number indicated in the detection information as the first number.
  • FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 20 of the article management system according to this modification. Below, it demonstrates centering on difference with the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • the lock control unit 22 when the communication unit 26 receives a verification success notification (Yes in S103), the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S204, S20a in FIG. 25), and the generated unlock command Is transmitted (S106, S28 in FIG. 25). At this time, the information processing unit 23 does not generate a shooting command.
  • control unit 21 waits until receiving the detection signal, the identification information, and the close signal (No in S207 and No in S115).
  • the control device 20 performs error processing (S117).
  • the lock control unit 22 When all of the detection signal, the identification information, and the closing signal are received (Yes in S207), the lock control unit 22 generates a locking command (S208).
  • the subsequent processing is the same as the processing shown in FIG.
  • the first detection unit includes a plurality of detachable sensors 143 that are detachably attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the inside of the casing 10 is not photographed before and after opening and closing, but the removal of the plurality of articles 2 is detected based on the detection signals from the individual detachable sensors 143.
  • casing 10 can be improved. Therefore, the accuracy of management of the article 2 can be increased.
  • each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 includes a sandwiching portion 143b that sandwiches at least a part of the corresponding article 2, and the corresponding article 2 is energized when the sandwiching sections 143b come into contact with each other. Detection of desorption.
  • the first detection unit further includes a support plate 141 that supports the plurality of detachable sensors 143.
  • FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit 240 of the article management system according to this modification.
  • FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor 243 of the in-compartment sensor unit 240 according to this modification.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a state where a plurality of articles 2 are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 240 according to the present modification.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a state where the article 2 is detached from the detachable sensor 243 according to the present modification.
  • the article management system includes an in-compartment sensor unit 240 shown in FIG. 27 as an example of the first detection unit instead of the in-compartment camera 40.
  • the in-compartment sensor unit 240 includes a support plate 141, a plurality of electrode portions 142, a plurality of detachable sensors 243, and a plurality of wirings 144.
  • the support plate 141, the electrode part 142, and the wiring 144 are the same as in the second modification.
  • the plurality of detachable sensors 243 are sensors that are detachably attached to each of the plurality of articles 2. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, the detachable sensor 243 is a hinge type sensor. Specifically, the detachable sensor 243 has two plate portions 243a and 243b and a shaft portion 243c. The detachable sensor 243 detects detachment of the corresponding article 2 by energizing when the two plate portions 243a and 243b come into contact with each other.
  • the two plate portions 243a and 243b are combined so as to be rotatable with respect to one side as an axis.
  • Each of the two plate portions 243a and 243b is a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and is fixed to the shaft portion 243c so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 243c.
  • one of the two plate portions 243a and 243b is placed on the corresponding article 2.
  • the other of the two plate portions 243 a and 243 b is fixed to the support plate 141 in contact with the electrode portion 142.
  • the plate portions 243a and 243b are formed using a conductive material such as metal, for example.
  • the plate portions 243a and 243b are connected via the shaft portion 243c, but are insulated at the connection portion. That is, the plate portions 243a and 243b are energized when the main surfaces come into contact with each other, and a current flows.
  • the sizes and shapes of the plate portions 243a and 243b are, for example, the same as each other, but may be different.
  • a plate portion 243b is placed on each of the stacked articles 2.
  • the plate portion 243a and the plate portion 243b are not in contact with each other and are not energized.
  • the detachable sensor 243 located at the uppermost position in FIG. 29 is not in contact with the article 2 and is in a state where the plate portion 243a and the plate portion 243b are energized.
  • the plate part 243b placed on the article 2 rotates around the shaft part 243c by gravity and contacts the plate part 243a.
  • the plate portion 243a and the plate portion 243b are energized, and a current is output as a detection signal to the control device 20 via the electrode portion 142 and the wiring 144.
  • the control unit 21 can determine that the article 2 has been taken out.
  • each of the plurality of detachable sensors 243 is combined with each other so as to be rotatable about one side, and one is placed on the corresponding article 2.
  • the two plate portions 243a and 243b are connected to each other, and when the two plate portions 243a and 243b come into contact with each other, energization is detected to detect the detachment of the corresponding article 2.
  • the article 2 can be easily detached by using the hinge-type detachable sensor 243.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit 340 of the article management system according to this modification.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a state where a plurality of articles 2 are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 340 according to the present modification.
  • the article management system includes an in-compartment sensor unit 340 shown in FIG. 31 as an example of the first detection unit instead of the in-compartment camera 40.
  • the in-compartment sensor unit 340 includes a support plate 341, a rail part 342, a sensor part 343, and a wiring 344.
  • the support plate 341 supports the sensor unit 343. As shown in FIG. 31, the support plate 341 is provided with a plurality of rail portions 342, and the sensor portion 343 is supported on each of the plurality of rail portions 342.
  • the support plate 341 is, for example, a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and is disposed inside the housing 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the support plate 341 is fixed upright with respect to the floor surface of the main body 11 so as to be parallel to the inner surface of the back of the main body 11.
  • the rail part 342 forms a track when the sensor part 343 moves.
  • the rail portion 342 is a through-hole that penetrates the support plate 341 in the thickness direction, and is a long slit-like shape that extends along the height direction when the support plate 341 is fixed to the main body portion 11. It is a through hole.
  • the sensor unit 343 is supported so as to be movable along the direction in which the rail unit 342 extends (that is, the height direction).
  • a support rod may be fixed vertically with respect to the floor surface of the main body portion 11.
  • the sensor unit 343 may be supported so as to be movable in the height direction along the support bar so as to grasp the support bar.
  • the sensor unit 343 is movable along the rail unit 342 and detects a position in the rail unit 342. Specifically, the sensor unit 343 detects the distance along the rail unit 342 from the floor surface of the main body unit 11 to the sensor unit 343, that is, the height.
  • the sensor unit 343 is connected to the wiring 344 and outputs position information (specifically, height information) indicating the position of the sensor unit 343 to the control device 20.
  • the sensor unit 343 includes a guide unit 343a and a plate unit 343b.
  • the guide portion 343a extends obliquely upward from the tip of the plate portion 343b.
  • the plate portion 343b is placed on the article 2.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the article 2 is attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 340 according to the present modification.
  • the end of the article 2 comes into contact with the guide portion 343a.
  • the guide part 343a is pushed up to the end of the article 2 and the sensor part 343 is lifted. Accordingly, the plate portion 343b is placed on the end portion of the article 2, and the height of the sensor portion 343 substantially coincides with the height of the article 2.
  • the plurality of articles 2 are stacked and stored inside the housing 10.
  • the in-compartment sensor unit 340 detects the height of the article 2 located at the uppermost stage among the plurality of stacked articles 2. Specifically, since the sensor unit 343 is placed on the article 2 positioned at the uppermost stage, the height of the sensor unit 343 changes according to the number of articles 2. That is, as the number of stacked articles 2 increases, the height of the sensor unit 343 increases. As the number of stacked articles 2 decreases, the height of the sensor unit 343 decreases.
  • the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 calculates a decrease in height before and after the article 2 is taken out based on the position information output from the sensor unit 343, and reduces the calculated height.
  • the number of articles 2 taken out can be determined based on the minute and the height of one article 2.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a state where the article 2 is removed from the in-compartment sensor unit 340 according to the present modification.
  • the height before taking out the article 2 is h1
  • the height is reduced to h2.
  • the decrease in height is represented by h2-h1.
  • the number of articles 2 is calculated by dividing the decrease by the height of one article 2.
  • the article management system for example, a plurality of articles 2 are stacked and stored inside the housing 10, and the first detection unit (in-house sensor unit 340) is stacked. In addition, the height of the article 2 located at the uppermost stage among the plurality of articles 2 is detected.
  • the number of articles 2 taken out can be determined by detecting a change in height.
  • the second modification and the third modification only the uppermost article 2 can be taken out, but according to the present modification, the middle article among the stacked articles 2 is used.
  • the article 2 located or the article 2 located in the lower stage can be extracted. In this way, the article 2 that the user wants to take out can be freely taken out from the stacked articles 2.
  • the present invention is not limited to this.
  • a plurality of types of articles 2 having different heights may be stacked.
  • an article A having a height of Ha and an article B having a height of Hb may be stacked.
  • the control unit 21 can estimate the taken-out article 2 according to the height reduction. For example, when the decrease in height is Ha, the control unit 21 can estimate that the removed article 2 is the article A. Similarly, when the decrease in height is Hb, the control unit 21 can estimate that the removed article 2 is the article B. Moreover, when the amount of decrease in height is Ha + Hb, the control unit 21 can estimate that the article A and the article B have been taken out. When the decrease in height is twice Ha, the control unit 21 can estimate that two articles A have been taken out.
  • the heights Ha and Hb may be equal to or higher than the height of the storage space 11a of the housing 10 (height from the floor surface to the ceiling surface). In this case, the heights of the combinations of the articles A and B stacked in the storage space 11a are all different. Therefore, it is possible to determine the type and the number of the articles 2 taken out based on the height reduction.
  • the height of the storage space 11a of the housing 10 is 30 cm
  • the height Ha of the article A is 5 cm
  • the height Hb of the article B is 7 cm.
  • the least common multiple of Ha and Hb is 35 cm, which is larger than the height of the storage space 11a.
  • the combinations of the articles 2 stored in the storage space 11a and the heights of the articles 2 stacked according to the combinations are as follows.
  • the least common multiple of Ha and Hb is smaller than the height of the storage space 11a, the number and type of the articles 2 taken out may not be determined. For example, when the height Ha of the article A is 2 cm and the height Hb of the article B is 3 cm, the least common multiple of Ha and Hb is 6 cm. For this reason, when the decrease in height is 6 cm, it is not possible to determine whether three articles A or two articles B have been taken out.
  • the number of articles 2 taken out may be limited.
  • the guide unit 90 notifies the user that the number of articles 2 taken out at one time is two or less. Thereby, the number and kind of taken-out articles 2 can be determined.
  • the first detection unit may be realized by a distance measuring device.
  • the distance measuring device may be fixed to the ceiling surface of the housing 10 so as to measure the distance from itself to the floor surface of the housing 10.
  • the distance measuring device uses a TOF (Time Of Flight) method or a stereo method.
  • a plurality of articles 2 are stacked and arranged between the distance measuring device and the floor surface of the housing 10.
  • the distance from the distance measuring device to the uppermost article 2 is increased. Therefore, the number of the articles 2 can be calculated by dividing the increase in the distance to the uppermost article 2 by the height of one article 2.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the weight sensor 440 and the article 2 in the article management system according to this modification.
  • the article management system according to this modification includes a weight sensor 440 as the first detection unit.
  • the weight sensor 440 detects the weight of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the weight sensor 440 is disposed on the floor surface of the main body 11 of the housing 10.
  • the weight sensor 440 may be further arrange
  • the weight sensor 440 detects the weight (total weight) of the plurality of articles 2 placed on the weight sensor 440 and outputs it to the control device 20. When the weight per article 2 is substantially equal, the total weight detected by the weight sensor 440 is divided by the weight per piece to calculate the number of articles 2 placed on the weight sensor 440. be able to.
  • the weight sensor 440 outputs the total weight before and after taking out the article 2 to the control device 20.
  • the total weight may be measured based on a measurement command (corresponding to a shooting command) from the control unit 21, and the measured total weight may be output to the control unit 21. .
  • the weight sensor 440 may output the measured total weight to the control unit 21 every time a change occurs in the measured total weight.
  • the first detection unit detects the weights of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the number of articles 2 taken out can be determined by detecting a change in weight.
  • the article 2 that the user wants to take out can be freely taken out from the stacked articles 2.
  • the article 2 since the article 2 only needs to be placed on the weight sensor 440, the article 2 may not be stacked when there is a sufficient space. Thereby, generation
  • the type and number of the articles 2 can be specified from the change in the total weight.
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the individual storage unit 540 of the article management system according to this modification.
  • FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the individual storage unit 540 in which the articles 2 are stored in the article management system according to this modification.
  • the individual storage unit 540 includes a film body 541 and a contact sensor 543, as shown in FIG. A plurality of through holes 542 are provided in the film body 541.
  • the film main body 541 accommodates one article 2 therein.
  • the shape of the film body 541 is, for example, a cylindrical shape having openings at both ends, but may be a bag shape having an opening at one end and the other end closed.
  • the opening is provided to put the article 2 and may be closed after the article 2 is put.
  • a fastener or the like may be provided in the opening.
  • the film body 541 is formed using, for example, a highly flexible material.
  • the film body 541 is made of, for example, an insulating resin material.
  • the through hole 542 is a ventilation hole for allowing air in the housing 10 to pass through the individual housing unit 540 when the individual housing unit 540 is put in the housing 10. Thereby, for example, the article 2 can be cooled in a state of being stored in the individual storage unit 540 using the cool air in the housing 10.
  • Contact sensor 543 detects contact and non-contact of article 2.
  • the contact sensor 543 is provided on the inner side surface of the film main body 541. When the article 2 is stored in the film main body 541, the article 2 comes into contact with the contact sensor 543.
  • wiring is connected to the contact sensor 543.
  • An end portion of a cable connected to the control device 20 is disposed inside the housing 10.
  • the detection result by the contact sensor 543 can be output to the control device 20.
  • the contact sensor 543 outputs a detection signal to the control device 20 when, for example, the article 2 is taken out from the individual storage unit 540, that is, when the contact between the article 2 and the contact sensor 543 is lost.
  • FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a state before and after taking out the article 2 from the individual storage unit 540 in the article management system according to this modification.
  • the plurality of articles 2 can be stacked while being stored in the individual storage unit 540.
  • FIG. 38 shows an example in which three individual storage units 540 are stacked.
  • the article 2 is taken out from the individual storage unit 540 located in the middle stage.
  • the film main body 541 has flexibility, the middle individual storage unit 540 is crushed and deformed by the gravity of the upper individual storage unit 540.
  • the film body 541 may have rigidity. In this case, the shape of the film main body 541 is maintained even after the article 2 is taken out.
  • FIG. 39 a seventh modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.
  • FIG. 10 a plurality of articles 2 are stored together in the housing 10, whereas in this modification, there is an individual storage space for storing the plurality of articles 2 individually. Is provided.
  • Each of the plurality of individual storage spaces is provided with a sensor that detects an article 2 to be stored.
  • FIG. 39 is a front view of the individual storage shelf 610 in the article management system according to this modification.
  • FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a part of the individual storage shelf 610 according to this modification.
  • FIG. 39 shows a state in which the article 2 is stored in the individual storage space 613a of the individual storage shelf 610.
  • FIG. 40 shows an individual storage space 613a in which the article 2 is not stored.
  • the individual storage shelf 610 is a storage shelf for forming a plurality of individual storage spaces 613a for storing a plurality of articles 2 individually.
  • the individual storage shelf 610 is disposed inside the housing 10, and thus a plurality of individual storage spaces 613 a are provided inside the housing 10.
  • the individual storage shelf 610 includes a frame body portion 611 and a plurality of shelf portions 613.
  • an individual sensor 640 is disposed on each shelf 613.
  • a plurality of light emitting portions 691 are provided in the frame body portion 611.
  • the frame body portion 611 is a main body housing of the individual storage shelf 610.
  • the frame body part 611 supports the plurality of shelf parts 613.
  • the means for supporting the shelf portion 613 is, for example, the same as the means for supporting the shelf material 13 by the main body portion 11 in the first embodiment.
  • the shape of the frame body portion 611 is, for example, a rectangular tube that is long in the vertical direction.
  • the frame body portion 611 has an upper surface portion, a floor surface portion, a left side surface portion, and a right side surface portion, and an opening is provided in the front-rear direction.
  • the “front” in the front-rear direction is the side on which the light emitting unit 691 is provided, and is the door 12 side when it is arranged inside the housing 10.
  • “Backward” in the front-rear direction is the opposite side of the front side, and is the back side when arranged inside the housing 10.
  • the frame body portion 611 does not have to have an upper surface portion and a floor surface portion. Further, the frame body portion 611 may not have one of the left side surface portion and the right side surface portion.
  • the shelf part 613 is an example of a partition part for forming the individual storage space 613a.
  • the shelf part 613 is a net shelf formed using a flat net, for example.
  • an individual storage space 613a is formed by two adjacent shelf portions 613 and a frame body portion 611.
  • the size of the individual storage space 613 a may be changeable according to the size of the article 2.
  • the shelf 613 can be changed stepwise in the vertical direction or to an arbitrary position.
  • the individual sensor 640 is an example of a first detection unit arranged for each individual storage space 613a.
  • the individual sensor 640 detects the article 2 arranged in the corresponding individual storage space 613a.
  • the individual sensor 640 is, for example, a capacitance type sensor, a weight sensor, or an infrared sensor, but is not particularly limited.
  • a wiring (not shown) is connected to each of the plurality of individual sensors 640.
  • a plurality of wirings connected to each of the plurality of individual sensors 640 are collectively fixed to the frame body portion 611 or the like.
  • An end portion of a cable connected to the control device 20 is disposed inside the housing 10.
  • a plurality of wirings connected to each of the plurality of individual sensors 640 are collected and connected to an end portion of the cable (for example, connector connection), so that detection results from the plurality of individual sensors 640 are output to the control device 20. be able to.
  • the plurality of light emitting units 691 is an example of the display unit 91 provided in the guide unit 90.
  • the plurality of light emitting units 691 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of individual storage spaces 613a.
  • the frame body portion 611 is disposed in the vicinity of the corresponding individual storage space 613a.
  • the lighting state of the light emitting units 691 changes according to the article 2 stored in the corresponding individual storage space 613a.
  • the light emitting unit 691 is realized by a light emitting element such as an LED.
  • the light emitting unit 691 is turned on when the article 2 is stored in the corresponding individual storage space 613a, and is turned off when the article 2 is not stored. Further, when the stored article 2 is a special article directed to a specific person, the light emitting unit 691 may perform blinking lighting. The light emitting unit 691 may be capable of changing the emission color.
  • the first detection unit is configured as follows. It has the some individual sensor 640 which detects the articles
  • the article management system 1 if the person is permitted to open the casing 10, the article 2 stored in the casing 10 can be taken out freely.
  • a special article directed to a specific person is included in the plurality of articles 2 housed in the casing 10, and only a specific person is included. Is a system that can take out the special article.
  • one housing 10 is used in two ways of usage: reserved use (sales) and general use.
  • FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 701 according to the present embodiment.
  • the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment is different from the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment in that the control device 720 and the management device 30 are replaced with the control device 720 and the management device 30.
  • the point provided with the management device 730 is different from the point that one or more individual casings 710 are arranged in the casing 10.
  • the casing 10 and the control device 720 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
  • FIG. 42 is a perspective view of individual casing 710 in article management system 701 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 43 is a front view showing the housing 10 in which a plurality of individual housings 710 according to the present embodiment are arranged.
  • the individual casing 710 is an openable casing that forms an individual storage space 713 that individually stores at least one of the plurality of articles 2. As shown in FIG. 42, an individual lock mechanism 770 that restricts opening and closing of the individual case 710 is attached to the individual case 710. In addition, an individual sensor 640 that detects the article 2 to be stored is provided inside the individual casing 710.
  • At least one of the plurality of individual casings 710 is assigned to a predetermined person (hereinafter referred to as a specific person).
  • the individual case 710 to which the specific person is assigned is a dedicated case for the assigned specific person, and only the specific person can be opened and closed.
  • the individual casing 710 stores an article 2 (for example, a special lunch box that matches the constitution of the specific person) specified in advance by the specific person. Since the individual lock mechanism 770 is provided in the individual casing 710, it is prohibited for a person other than the specific person to take out.
  • the plurality of individual casings 710 are arranged inside the casing 10 as shown in FIG. 43, the individual storage shelves 610 shown in the seventh modification of the first embodiment are stored in the housing 10, and three individual housings 710 are arranged in the lower three stages of the individual storage shelves 610. An example is shown.
  • the individual casing 710 is dedicated to a specific person using the light emitting units (individual light emitting units) 691 arranged in the vicinity of the three individual casings 710.
  • the individual light emitting unit 691 is lit in a lighting state different from that of the normal light emitting unit 691.
  • the individual light emitting unit 691 and the normal light emitting unit 691 emit light with different emission colors (such as red and green).
  • the light emitting unit 691 blinks when a specific person opens the housing 10. Thereby, the location of the individual casing 710 dedicated to a specific person can be notified.
  • the individual casing 710 includes a frame body portion 711 and a drawer portion 712.
  • the frame body portion 711 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped housing whose front surface is open, and accommodates the drawer portion 712 in a removable manner.
  • a concave portion 772 into which the claw portion 771 a of the electronic lock 771 of the individual lock mechanism 770 is inserted is provided inside the frame body portion 711.
  • the frame body part 711 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped casing formed from a resin or a metal material, but the material, shape, and size of the frame body part 711 are not particularly limited. Note that the frame body portion 711 may be provided with a vent hole for allowing the cool air in the housing 10 to pass therethrough.
  • the drawer part 712 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped housing having an open upper surface.
  • the opened upper surface is covered with the upper surface of the frame body part 711 when inserted into the frame body part 711.
  • an individual storage space 713 is formed by the frame body portion 711 and the drawer portion 712.
  • a grip portion 714 On the front surface of the drawer portion 712, a grip portion 714 for facilitating the drawer portion 712 is provided.
  • the grip portion 714 is a convex portion (knob) protruding from the front surface of the drawer portion 712, but may be a concave portion provided on the front surface of the drawer portion 712.
  • An individual sensor 640 is provided on the floor surface of the drawer portion 712.
  • the individual sensor 640 is the same as that shown in the seventh modification of the first embodiment.
  • the individual sensor 640 is connected to the control device 720 by a cable.
  • the cable may be embedded in the drawer 712 (such as a side plate or a bottom plate).
  • the opening / closing method of the individual casing 710 is a drawer type, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the opening / closing method of the individual case 710 may be a lateral opening method using a door.
  • the opening / closing method of the individual casing 710 may be a vertical opening, a sliding type, a double door opening, or the like.
  • the individual lock mechanism 770 is attached to each of the plurality of individual housings 710 and restricts the opening and closing of the attached individual housings 710.
  • the individual lock mechanism 770 includes an electronic lock 771 and a recess 772 as shown in FIG.
  • the electronic lock 771 includes a claw portion 771a and a holding housing 771b, similarly to the electronic lock 71 according to the first embodiment.
  • the claw portion 771a When a predetermined voltage is applied from the outside, the claw portion 771a is housed in the holding housing 771b, and when the voltage application is stopped, the claw portion 771a protrudes from the holding housing 771b. By inserting the protruding claw portion 771a into the recess 772, the individual casing 710 is locked.
  • the recess 772 corresponds to a female key. Instead of the recess 772, a female key 72 may be attached to the frame body portion 711 as in the first embodiment.
  • the electronic lock 771 is connected to the control device 720 by a cable.
  • the cable may be embedded in the drawer 712 (such as a side plate or a bottom plate).
  • the control device 720 is different from the control device 20 according to the first embodiment in that the control unit 21 newly includes an individual lock control unit 727.
  • the individual lock control unit 727 controls a plurality of individual lock mechanisms 770.
  • the individual lock control unit 727 is assigned to a specific person among the plurality of individual lock mechanisms 770 when the collation result transmitted from the management device 730 indicates a match with a predetermined person (specific person).
  • the individual lock mechanism 770 corresponding to the individual casing 710 is unlocked. That is, when the person who intends to open the casing 10 is a specific person, the individual lock control unit 727 unlocks the individual lock mechanism 770 attached to the individual casing 710 dedicated to the specific person.
  • the management device 730 includes a collation unit 732 instead of the collation unit 32, and the storage unit 34 has a person list 735 instead of the person list 35. Is different from the stored point.
  • FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a person list 735 in the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 44, in the person list 735, reservation information is further added to the person list 35 shown in FIG.
  • Reservation information includes flag information and individual case information.
  • the flag information is information indicating whether or not the corresponding person is a specific person.
  • a circle mark (O) indicates that the corresponding person is a specific person
  • a cross mark (X) indicates that the corresponding person is not specific information.
  • the individual case information is information for specifying the individual case 710 assigned to the specific person, and indicates the position of the individual case 710, for example.
  • the collation unit 732 collates the person list 735 with the person indicated by the person information. Furthermore, when the person indicated by the person information matches the person included in the person list 735, the collation unit 732 refers to the person list 735 to determine whether or not the person is a specific person. Based on the flag information of the person list 735, the collation unit 732 reads the individual case information when the person is a specific person. The collation unit 732 transmits, via the communication unit 37, the person is a specific person and the individual case information assigned to the specific person to the control device 720 as a collation result.
  • FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing collation processing performed by the management device 730 of the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment.
  • the collation process is the process of step S ⁇ b> 16 shown in FIG. 25 and is performed after receiving the personal information via the communication unit 37.
  • the same reference numerals are given to the same processes as those in the verification process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 16, and the description will be simplified.
  • the collation unit 732 collates the person list 735 with the person indicated by the person information (S131). If the person indicated by the person information matches the person included in the person list 735 (Yes in S132) and is a specific person (Yes in S332), the matching unit 732 obtains the individual case information from the person list 735. Obtain (S333). The collation unit 732 generates a collation result indicating a person match as a collation success notification and outputs the collation result together with the individual case information (S334). The verification success notification and the individual case information are transmitted to the control device 720 via the communication unit 37 and are output to the charging unit 33.
  • the matching unit 732 collates the matching result indicating the matching of the person. Generate and output as a success notification (S133).
  • the verification success notification is transmitted to the control device 720 via the communication unit 37 and is output to the charging unit 33.
  • the collation unit 732 If the person indicated by the person information does not match the person included in the person list 735 (No in S132), the collation unit 732 generates and outputs a collation result indicating a person mismatch as a collation failure notification (S134).
  • the verification failure notification is transmitted to the control device 720 via the communication unit 37.
  • FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 720 of the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 46, processes similar to those performed by the control device 20 according to the second modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. To do.
  • the individual lock control unit 727 determines whether or not the person indicated by the person information is a specific person. Determination is made (S303). Specifically, the individual lock control unit 727 determines whether individual housing information has been received together with a verification success notification.
  • the individual lock control unit 727 When the individual case information is received, that is, when the person indicated by the person information is a specific person (Yes in S303), the individual lock control unit 727 generates an individual unlock command (S304). Specifically, the individual lock control unit 727 generates an individual unlock command for unlocking the individual lock mechanism 770 attached to the individual case 710 indicated by the individual case information. In the present embodiment, the individual lock control unit 727 supplies a predetermined voltage to be applied to the electronic lock 771 of the individual lock mechanism 770 as an individual unlock command, for example.
  • the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S204), and transmits the generated unlock command to the lock mechanism 70 (S106).
  • the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S204), and transmits the generated unlock command to the lock mechanism 70. (S106).
  • the subsequent processing is the same as that in the first embodiment.
  • the information processing unit 23 may change the lighting state of the light emitting unit 691 when the person indicated by the person information is a specific person. For example, when the person indicated by the person information is a specific person, the information processing unit 23 blinks and lights the light emitting unit 691 corresponding to the individual case 710 indicated by the individual case information. Thereby, the position of the individual casing 710 assigned to the specific person can be guided to the specific person who opened the casing 10.
  • the information processing unit 23 controls the audio output unit 92 to notify the position of the individual casing 710 by voice guidance. May be.
  • the information processing unit 23 may generate a voice guidance such as “Your things are in the bottom box” and have the voice output unit 92 output the voice guidance.
  • the article management system 701 forms, for example, one or more individual storage spaces 713 that are arranged inside the housing 10 and individually store at least one of the plurality of articles 2.
  • One or more individual casings 710 that can be opened and closed, one or more individual locking mechanisms 770 that limit the opening and closing of each of the one or more individual casings 710, and an individual lock control unit that controls the one or more individual locking mechanisms 770 727.
  • One of the one or more individual casings 710 is assigned to a predetermined person, and the individual lock control unit 727 displays one or more individual lock mechanisms when the collation result indicates a match with the predetermined person.
  • the individual lock mechanism 770 corresponding to the individual casing 710 assigned to a predetermined person is unlocked.
  • the article 2 dedicated to a specific person can be stored in the housing 10. That is, one housing 10 can be divided and used for a part shared by a plurality of persons (general use) and a part used personally (reserved use).
  • the individual casing 710 and the individual lock mechanism 770 prohibit the removal of the article 2 other than the specific person, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the individual housing 710 may not be provided with a door or the like.
  • the individual lock mechanism 770 may be directly attached to the article 2.
  • the individual lock mechanism 770 may include a chain or string such as a chain lock and an electronic lock attached to the end of the chain or string.
  • the individual lock mechanism 770 may be fixed to the individual casing 710 or the casing 10 through a ring member attached to the article 2 or a through-hole provided in the article 2.
  • the article management system 1 includes the second detection unit that detects the article 2 outside the housing 10, whereas the article management system according to the present embodiment includes the second detection unit. Does not have a part.
  • the position where the article 2 is stored is determined in advance, and the extracted article 2 is specified based on the storage position of the extracted article 2.
  • FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 801 according to the present embodiment.
  • the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment replaces the control device 20, the management apparatus 30, and the in-compartment camera 40 as compared with the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the control device 820, the management device 830, and the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are provided, and the code reader 50 is not provided.
  • the casing 10 and the control device 820 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
  • a plurality of articles 2 are stored in a predetermined position in the housing 10.
  • Each storage position of the plurality of articles 2 may be determined in advance, or a storage position may be determined for each type of the article 2.
  • FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of storing a plurality of articles 2 (lunch boxes 2a to 2c) in the casing 10 in the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment.
  • the lunch box 2a is a Western-style lunch box and is arranged in the upper stage.
  • the lunch box 2b is a Chinese lunch box and is arranged in the middle stage.
  • the lunch box 2c is a Japanese-style lunch box and is arranged in the lower stage.
  • the control device 820 controls the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843. Specifically, the control device 820 receives a detection signal output from any of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843, generates position information of the extracted article 2 based on the received detection signal, The generated position information is transmitted to the management apparatus 30.
  • the control unit 821 of the control device 820 includes an information processing unit 823.
  • the information processing unit 823 identifies the weight sensor that transmitted the detection signal.
  • control device 820 information processing unit 823
  • a plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are connected to each other through different cables. Therefore, the information processing unit 823 specifies the weight sensors 841 to 843 that are the transmission source of the detection signal by specifying the cable through which the detection signal is transmitted.
  • the communication unit 26 is an example of an output unit that outputs detection information indicating detection results from the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843.
  • the communication unit 26 displays position information indicating the position of the target article. Output as detection information.
  • the position information is the detection result (that is, the total weight) of each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843.
  • the position information can indicate the position of the article 2 by indicating the weight sensor.
  • a change in the total weight of any of the weight sensors 841 to 843 indicates the position of the removed article 2 (target article).
  • the position information may be information that explicitly indicates the position of the target article such as an upper stage, a middle stage, or a lower stage.
  • the management apparatus 830 includes a specifying unit 831 instead of the comparison unit 31, and a storage position table 836 is provided in the storage unit 34 instead of the price list 36. The point that is memorized is different.
  • the identifying unit 831 identifies the article 2 taken out from the housing 10 based on the position information transmitted from the control device 820. Specifically, the specifying unit 831 specifies the type and the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10. For example, when the total weight detected by the weight sensor 841 changes, the specifying unit 831 refers to the storage position table 836 so that the taken-out article 2 is arranged in the upper stage where the weight sensor 841 is installed. The lunch box 2a is specified. Furthermore, the specifying unit 831 specifies the number of lunch boxes 2a that have been taken out according to the decrease in the total weight. Based on the identification result by the identification unit 831, the accounting unit 33 performs accounting processing for the extracted person.
  • the correspondence relationship between the type of the article 2 and the storage position is managed by the management device 830.
  • a storage position table 836 indicating the correspondence between the article 2 and the storage position is stored in the storage unit 34 of the management device 830.
  • FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a storage position table 836 showing the relationship between the article 2 and the storage position in the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment.
  • the type of the article 2 and the storage position are associated with each other.
  • the storage position table 836 also serves as the price list 36 according to the first embodiment. For this reason, in the storage position table 836, the type of the article 2 and the price are associated with each other.
  • the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are an example of a detection unit that detects the plurality of articles 2 inside the housing 10. As shown in FIG. 48, the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are provided in the upper, middle and lower stages, respectively. The plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 detect the total weight of the articles 2 placed on each. Specifically, the weight sensor 841 is placed on the shelf 13 forming the upper stage, and detects the total weight of the one or more lunch boxes 2a arranged in the upper stage. The weight sensor 842 is placed on the shelf member 13 forming the middle stage, and detects the total weight of the one or more lunch boxes 2b arranged in the middle stage.
  • the weight sensor 843 is placed on the floor surface of the main body 11 that forms the lower stage, and detects the total weight of the one or more lunch boxes 2c arranged on the lower stage. Based on the change in the total weight detected by each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843, it is possible to determine the identification and the number of the lunch boxes 2a to 2c that have been taken out.
  • the number specifying method is the same as that of the fifth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram showing an operation of the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment. Here, it demonstrates centering on difference with the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 50, only the weight sensor 841 is shown, but the weight sensors 842 and 843 operate in the same manner.
  • the process until the lock mechanism 70 performs the unlocking process (S30) according to the unlocking command transmitted by the control device 820 is the second modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is the same.
  • At least one of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 detects a change in weight (S33c). For example, when the user takes out the lunch box 2a, the weight sensor 841 detects a change in weight.
  • the weight sensor 841 that has detected the change in weight outputs a detection signal (S33d).
  • the detection signal includes information indicating the total weight of the lunch box 2a placed on the weight sensor 841.
  • each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 may transmit the detected total weight to the control device 820 constantly (or periodically).
  • the information processing unit 823 of the control device 820 or the specifying unit 831 of the management device 830 calculates the difference between the total weight transmitted immediately before and the newly transmitted total weight for each weight sensor. A change in weight may be calculated.
  • each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 measures and measures the total weight based on a measurement command (corresponding to a shooting command) from the information processing unit 823.
  • the total weight may be transmitted to the information processing unit 823.
  • the plurality of weight sensors 841 may measure and transmit the total weight twice before or after the housing 10 is opened and after the housing 10 is closed. .
  • the control unit 820 After generating and outputting the locking command (S42 and S50), the control unit 820 transmits the position information included in the detection signal to the management device 830 (S54b). Specifically, the communication unit 26 transmits information indicating the weight sensor 841 that has detected a change in the total weight and information indicating the total weight as a detection result as position information.
  • the management device 830 receives the position information via the communication unit 37, and the specifying unit 831 performs the specifying process of the article 2 based on the position information (S56b).
  • the identifying unit 831 refers to the storage position table 836 to identify the type and number of articles 2 that have been taken out. For example, since the total weight detected by the weight sensor 841 has changed, the specifying unit 831 specifies that the removed article 2 is the lunch box 2a. Further, the specifying unit 831 calculates the change in the total weight, and divides the calculated change by the price of the lunch 2a, thereby determining the number of the lunch boxes 2a that have been taken out.
  • the charging unit 33 performs a charging process based on the identification result by the identifying unit 831 (S58). Specifically, the billing unit 33 calculates the billing amount by multiplying the price of the lunch box 2a by the number of the lunch boxes 2a taken out, and bills the person specified by the collation unit 32.
  • the article management system 801 detects a plurality of articles 2 stored in a predetermined position in the casing 10 that can be opened and closed.
  • a detection unit for example, weight sensors 841 to 843
  • an output unit for example, communication unit 26
  • the detection unit detects that the target article that is at least one of the plurality of articles 2 has been moved
  • the output unit outputs position information indicating the position of the target article as detection information.
  • the removed article 2 can be specified by detecting the position of the removed article 2. Therefore, in the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment, a means for detecting the article 2 outside the housing 10 such as the code reader 50 is not necessary, so that the configuration can be further simplified. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a highly versatile article management system 801 that can manage a plurality of articles 2 with a simple configuration.
  • the article management system according to the present modification includes the in-compartment camera 40 as an example of a detection unit, as in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system according to this modification.
  • the control device 820 since the code reader 50 is not provided, the control device 820 generates and outputs the shooting command and the locking command (S42, S44, and S50), and then the communication unit 26 performs the first operation.
  • the internal image and the second internal image (that is, position information) are transmitted to the management device 830 (S54c).
  • the specifying unit 831 specifies the type and number of the extracted articles 2 based on the first and second image images (S56c). Specifically, the specifying unit 831 specifies the position and the number of the articles 2 taken out by performing image processing on each of the first and second image images. For example, when the markers 44 are attached to the plurality of articles 2, by specifying the positions and the number of the markers 44 that are included in the first internal image and are not included in the second internal image, The position and the number of the articles 2 taken out are specified.
  • the identifying unit 831 can identify the type of the removed article 2 from the position of the article 2 by referring to the storage position table 836.
  • the in-compartment camera 40 is provided as an example of a detection unit, a means for detecting the article 2 outside the housing 10 such as the code reader 50 is not provided, and the taken-out article 2 is removed.
  • the type and number can be specified.
  • the article management system 801 includes the weight sensors 841 to 843 or the internal camera 40 as an example of the detection unit, the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the article management system 801 may include the in-compartment sensor unit 140, 240, or 340 shown in the second to fourth modifications of the first embodiment as a detection unit.
  • the article management system 801 may include the plurality of contact sensors 543 or the plurality of individual sensors 640 shown in the sixth modification example or the seventh modification example of the first embodiment as a detection unit. .
  • the taken-out article 2 can be easily identified.
  • the article management system according to the present embodiment is different in that the control device 20 and the management device 30 further manage the state of power supplied to the housing 10.
  • the control device 20 and the management device 30 further manage the state of power supplied to the housing 10.
  • FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment is different from the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment in place of the control device 20 and the management device 30. And the point provided with the management apparatus 930 is different.
  • the control device 920 manages the power state supplied to the housing 10.
  • the housing 10 is an openable / closable housing that receives power supply.
  • the housing 10 includes a temperature adjustment unit 14 that adjusts the temperature of the storage space 11a (for example, cooling and heat insulation) using supplied power.
  • the casing 10 and the control device 920 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
  • control device 920 is different from the control device 20 according to the first embodiment in that a control unit 921 is provided instead of the control unit 21.
  • the control device 920 includes a power receiving unit 24 and a power feeding unit 25 as in the first embodiment.
  • the power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside and supplies it to the control unit 921.
  • the power feeding unit 25 supplies the power received by the power receiving unit 24 to the housing 10. That is, common power is supplied to the control device 920 and the housing 10.
  • the control unit 921 includes an information processing unit 923 as shown in FIG.
  • the information processing unit 923 is an example of a transmission unit that transmits a power reception signal indicating a common power reception state. Specifically, the information processing unit 923 generates an alive signal when power is received by the power receiving unit 24. The information processing unit 923 transmits the generated alive signal to the management device 930 via the communication unit 26.
  • the alive signal is a signal indicating that the common power is correctly received. That is, the alive signal is a signal indicating that the control device 920 and the housing 10 are receiving normal power and are operating normally.
  • the information processing unit 923 periodically generates and transmits an alive signal while the power receiving unit 24 receives common power.
  • the information processing unit 923 transmits an alive signal at a time interval of several minutes or less.
  • the transmission interval of the alive signal may be 1 minute or less, for example, a short time such as 1 second. The shorter the time interval, the more accurately the power supply state can be detected.
  • the control unit 921 includes a lock control unit 922.
  • the lock control unit 922 controls the lock mechanism 70 in the same manner as the lock control unit 22 of the first embodiment.
  • the lock control unit 922 further prohibits the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 when it is determined that the common power is cut off. Since the lock mechanism 70 includes the normally-off type electronic lock 71, the lock mechanism 70 is not unlocked when the power is cut off, but can be unlocked when the power supply is restored.
  • the lock control unit 922 prohibits unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 even when the supply of power is restored. Thereby, even if collation (personal authentication) of the person who is going to open the housing
  • the article management system 901 it is possible to prevent the article 2 having deteriorated quality from being taken out.
  • the management device 930 is different from the management device 30 according to the first embodiment in that it further includes a determination unit 938.
  • the determination unit 938 receives the power reception signal, and determines the interruption of the common power based on the received power reception signal. In the present embodiment, the determination unit 938 determines that the common power is cut off when the alive signal is not received for a predetermined period.
  • the predetermined period is, for example, a time longer than the transmission interval of the alive signal and shorter than twice the transmission interval.
  • the communication unit 37 of the management device 930 receives the alive signal at substantially constant time intervals. That is, as long as the communication unit 37 continues to receive the alive signal at substantially constant time intervals, the determination unit 938 determines that the control device 920 is receiving normal common power. On the other hand, when the communication unit 37 does not receive the alive signal for a period longer than the time interval, the determination unit 938 determines that the control device 920 cannot receive normal power and cannot transmit the alive signal.
  • FIG. 53 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment.
  • the control device 920 and the management device 930 related to the determination of the power state are illustrated among a plurality of components constituting the article management system 901.
  • the control device 920 generates an alive signal at a substantially constant time interval (S402) and transmits it to the management device 930 (S403).
  • the management device 930 since the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal at substantially constant intervals, the determination unit 938 determines that the power has been normally supplied.
  • the control device 920 does not transmit the alive signal, and thus the management device 930 cannot receive the alive signal.
  • the determination unit 938 determines that the common power is cut off (S411). At this time, the management apparatus 930 may notify the administrator that power has been cut off.
  • the information processing unit 923 After the power is restored (S420), in the control device 920, the information processing unit 923 generates an alive signal (S423) as before the power supply is cut off (S423), and the control unit 920 transmits the alive signal to the management device 930. Transmit (S424).
  • the determination unit 938 determines that the common power supply to the control device 920 and the housing 10 has been recovered. In response to the recovery of power supply, the determination unit 938 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction for prohibiting unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 (S425). The determination unit 938 transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 920 via the communication unit 37 (S426).
  • the lock control unit 922 of the control device 920 receives the unlock prohibition instruction and prohibits the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 (S427). Thereby, even if the user holds the ID card over the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70 is not unlocked and the casing 10 cannot be opened.
  • the information processing unit 923 notifies the error by controlling the guide unit 90 (S428).
  • the display unit 91 displays a guidance image indicating that the quality of the article 2 stored in the housing 10 is not guaranteed because the power supply is cut off.
  • the voice output unit 92 may output voice guidance or a warning sound indicating that the quality of the article 2 is not guaranteed.
  • the management device 930 transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 920 after receiving the alive signal after the restoration of power supply.
  • the prohibition instruction may be repeatedly transmitted.
  • the control device 920 can receive the unlock prohibition instruction as soon as power is restored, and prohibit the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70.
  • the management device 930 transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 920
  • the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the control device 920 may voluntarily prohibit the unlocking after the power supply is restored.
  • FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a state confirmation process performed by the management apparatus 930 of the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment.
  • the determination unit 938 determines whether an alive signal is received within a predetermined period (S430). As long as the alive signal is received within the predetermined period (Yes in S430), the management device 930 determines that the power supply to the housing 10 and the control device 920 is normal, and performs normal operations (comparison, verification, and verification). Billing).
  • the determination unit 938 determines that the common power is cut off (S432). Thereafter, the determination unit 938 waits until the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal again (No in S434). When the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal (Yes in S434), the determination unit 938 performs error notification and transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction (S436).
  • the article management system 901 is an article management system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in the openable / closable casing 10 that receives power supply, and is common to the casing 10.
  • Power receiving unit 24 that receives the received power
  • a transmission unit for example, information processing unit 923
  • transmits a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the common power and a common power based on the received power reception signal.
  • a determination unit 938 for determining whether or not to block.
  • the article management system 901 since it is possible to determine the interruption of power supply, when the quality of the article 2 is not guaranteed, unlocking is prohibited, or reporting to the user or the administrator, etc. Measures can be taken. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, a highly reliable article management system 901 can be provided.
  • the information processing unit 923 periodically transmits an alive signal while the power receiving unit 24 receives the common power, and the determination unit 938 receives the alive signal for a predetermined period. It is determined that the common power is cut off.
  • the power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside as common power
  • the article management system 1 further includes a power feeding unit 25 that supplies the power received by the power receiving unit 24 to the housing 10.
  • the supply state of power to the housing 10 can be determined by detecting the power reception state to the control device 920.
  • the article management system 901 further includes a lock mechanism 70 that restricts opening and closing of the housing 10 and a lock control unit 922 that controls the lock mechanism 70, and the lock control unit 922 is shared by the determination unit 938. When it is determined that the power of the lock mechanism 70 is cut off, the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 is prohibited.
  • the lock mechanism 70 has an electronic lock 71 that unlocks when a predetermined voltage is applied and maintains a locked state when no voltage is applied.
  • the electronic lock 71 maintains a locked state when a predetermined voltage is not supplied, so that when the power supply to the housing 10 is interrupted, the voltage to the electronic lock 71 is not applied.
  • the locked state is maintained. Therefore, when the power supply to the housing 10 is interrupted, the housing 10 cannot be opened and closed, so that the article 2 can be protected.
  • FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 1001 according to this modification.
  • the article management system 1001 according to this modification further includes a temperature sensor 1010 and a point provided with a control device 1020 and a management device 1030 instead of the control device 920 and the management device 930. Is different.
  • the temperature sensor 1010 is an example of a temperature measurement unit that measures the temperature inside the housing 10.
  • the temperature sensor 1010 outputs temperature information indicating the measured temperature to the control device 1020.
  • the temperature sensor 1010 measures the temperature inside the housing 10 at a substantially constant time interval, and outputs the measurement result (temperature information) to the control device 1020.
  • the timing at which the temperature information is output is synchronized with the timing at which the control device 1020 outputs the alive signal.
  • the time interval for outputting the temperature information and the time interval for outputting the alive signal are substantially the same.
  • the casing 10 and the control device 1020 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
  • the control device 1020 includes a control unit 1021 instead of the control unit 921 as compared with the control device 920 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the control unit 1021 includes a lock control unit 1022 and an information processing unit 923.
  • the lock control unit 1022 (i) the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time when the common power is estimated to be cut off is a predetermined value.
  • the lock mechanism 70 is prohibited from being unlocked when it is outside the range of (ii), and (ii) when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time is maintained within a predetermined range, Unlocking is not prohibited.
  • the determination unit 1038 of the management device 1030 determines whether or not the temperature is within a predetermined range. For this reason, the lock control unit 1022 prohibits the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 when the unlocking prohibition command transmitted from the management device 1030 is received.
  • the management device 1030 includes a determination unit 1038 instead of the determination unit 938 as compared to the management device 930 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the determination unit 1038 performs not only the reception determination of the alive signal but also the temperature determination. Specifically, the determination unit 1038 determines whether or not the temperature inside the housing 10 indicated by the temperature information transmitted via the control device 1020 is maintained within a predetermined range.
  • the predetermined range is, for example, a range in which the quality of the article 2 stored in the housing 10 can be maintained. For example, when the article 2 is a lunch box, the predetermined range is a range of 5 ° C. or more and 20 ° C. or less.
  • the determination unit 1038 does not generate an unlocking prohibition instruction when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 is maintained within a predetermined range after the estimated time when the power is estimated to be cut off.
  • the quality of the article 2 is maintained. For example, even if the cooling and heat retaining functions of the temperature adjusting unit 14 are lost due to a power failure or the like, the period may be sufficiently short and the quality of the article 2 may not be affected. In this case, the determination unit 1038 can cause the article 2 to be taken out from the housing 10 as usual without generating an unlocking prohibition instruction.
  • the determination unit 1038 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 is outside a predetermined range after the estimated time when the power is estimated to be cut off. For example, the determination unit 1038 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction when the temperature has once deviated from a predetermined range even after the estimated time.
  • the quality of the article 2 cannot be guaranteed if the temperature deviates from the predetermined range.
  • the opening and closing of 10 can be prohibited. For this reason, the quality control accuracy of the article 2 can be further increased.
  • FIG. 56 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system 1001 according to this modification.
  • the temperature sensor 1010, the control device 1020, and the management device 1030 related to the determination of the power state and the temperature state are illustrated among the plurality of constituent elements constituting the article management system 1001.
  • the temperature sensor 1010 measures the temperature inside the housing 10 (S400), and transmits temperature information indicating the measured temperature to the control device 1020 (S401).
  • the timing at which the temperature sensor 1010 transmits temperature information is synchronized with the timing at which the control device 1020 transmits an alive signal.
  • the control device 1020 includes the temperature information in the alive signal generated in step S402 and transmits the temperature information to the management device 1030 (S403).
  • the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal, and the determination unit 1038 determines the temperature based on the temperature information included in the alive signal (S405). Specifically, the determination unit 1038 determines whether or not the temperature indicated by the temperature information, that is, the temperature inside the housing 10 is within a predetermined range.
  • the temperature measurement, the generation of the alive signal, and the temperature determination are repeated until the power supply is interrupted (S410).
  • the determination unit 1038 cannot receive the alive signal within a predetermined period, and therefore determines that the power is interrupted (S411).
  • the temperature sensor 1010 measures the temperature (S421) and transmits the temperature information to the control device 1020 (S422) as before the power supply is cut off.
  • the control device 1020 generates an alive signal (S423) and transmits it to the management device 1030 (S424).
  • the determination unit 1038 determines that the common power supply to the control device 1020 and the housing 10 has been recovered.
  • the determination unit 1038 performs temperature determination in response to the recovery of power supply, and generates an unlocking prohibition instruction if the temperature inside the housing 10 is outside the predetermined range (S425).
  • the determination unit 1038 transmits the generated unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 1020 via the communication unit 37 (S426). Subsequent processing is the same as in the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a state confirmation process performed by the management apparatus 1030 of the article management system 1001 according to this modification. Compared with the flowchart shown in FIG. 54, a difference is that a process for determining temperature (S435) is added.
  • the determination unit 1038 determines whether or not the temperature is within a predetermined range (S435). When the temperature is not within the predetermined range (No in S435), the determination unit 1038 performs error notification and transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction (S436).
  • the determination unit 1038 shifts to a standby state for receiving an alive signal without generating an unlocking prohibition instruction (returns to S430). That is, when the temperature is within the predetermined range, the unlocking prohibition instruction is not transmitted to the control device 1020, and thus the control device 1020 returns to the same state (normal state) as before the power supply is shut off. Therefore, when the card reader 60 reads the person information, the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked according to the collation result.
  • the article management system 1001 includes a temperature sensor 1010 that measures the temperature inside the housing 10, and the lock control unit 1022 determines that the common power is cut off by the determination unit 1038. In the case where it is, the following processing is performed. That is, the lock control unit 1022 (i) unlocks the lock mechanism 70 when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time when the common power is estimated to be cut off is outside the predetermined range. (Ii) When the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time is maintained within a predetermined range, the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 is not prohibited.
  • the temperature in the housing 10 is maintained within a predetermined range, the quality of the article 2 is not deteriorated, so that the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 may not be prohibited. Therefore, when there is no problem in the quality of the article 2, even if the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like, the article 2 can be taken out as usual after the power is restored.
  • the management apparatus 1030 showed about the example which performs temperature management
  • the control apparatus 1020 may perform temperature management.
  • the communication unit 26 does not have to transmit the temperature information to the management device 1030. Therefore, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced, and the power consumption can be reduced.
  • the article management system according to the present modification includes the temperature sensor 1010, but includes a sensor that detects a state other than the temperature of the housing 10 instead of or in addition to the temperature sensor 1010. Also good.
  • the article management system according to this modification may include a humidity sensor.
  • an air flow or water flow sensor may be provided.
  • the alive signal is periodically transmitted from the control device 920 to the management device 930.
  • the control device 920 does not regularly transmit the alive signal. Instead of periodic transmission of the alive signal, the control device 920 transmits a reboot signal after the power is restored.
  • FIG. 58 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system according to this modification. Note that the configuration of the article management system according to the present modification is the same as that of the fourth embodiment.
  • the processing relating to the power state is not particularly performed until the power supply is cut off.
  • the control device 920 After power supply is cut off and power is restored (S420), the control device 920 generates a reboot signal (S450) and transmits the reboot signal to the management device 930 via the communication unit 26 (S451). .
  • the reboot signal is an example of a power reception signal indicating that power supply has been restored.
  • the reboot signal is a signal indicating that the power supply is restored and the control device 920 is restarted (rebooted) after the power supply is cut off and the operation of the control device 920 is stopped.
  • the information processing unit 923 transmits a reboot signal only when the reception of the common power is stopped and then restarted.
  • the determination unit 938 determines that the common power to the control device 920 and the housing 10 is cut off (S452).
  • the determination unit 938 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction (S425) and transmits it to the control device 920 (S426). Subsequent processing is the same as in the fourth embodiment.
  • the information processing unit 923 transmits a reboot signal only when power reception by the power reception unit 24 is stopped and then restarted, and the determination unit 938. Determines that the common power is cut off when the reboot signal is received.
  • the article management system may include an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
  • the control device 920 or 1020 may transmit that the power supply from the uninterruptible power supply has been received to the management device 930 or 1030 instead of the reboot signal.
  • the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked when a predetermined voltage is applied.
  • a lock mechanism is provided that is not unlocked but is unlocked when a control signal for unlocking is received together.
  • FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170 of the article management system 1101 according to the present embodiment.
  • the article management system 1101 according to the present embodiment is a system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in the case 10 that can be opened and closed, as in the first embodiment.
  • the article management system 1101 includes a wiring 1110, a control device 1120, a lock mechanism 1170, and an open / close sensor 80.
  • the article management system 1101 further includes a management device 30, an internal camera 40, a code reader 50, a card reader 60, and a guide unit 90.
  • FIG. 59 schematically illustrates the housing 10 so that the positional relationship between the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170 with respect to each housing 10 is clarified. Specifically, the control device 1120 is installed outside the housing 10, and the lock mechanism 1170 is installed inside the housing 10.
  • the wiring 1110 is a cable that electrically and physically connects the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170.
  • the wiring 1110 includes two power supply lines 1111 and 1112 and a control line 1113.
  • the power lines 1111 and 1112 are wires for supplying a predetermined voltage (for example, 12 V) to the electronic lock 71 of the lock mechanism 1170.
  • the power lines 1111 and 1112 connect the power supply unit 25 of the control device 1120 and the electronic lock 71.
  • a relay circuit 1173 (switch) is inserted between the power supply unit 25 and the electronic lock 71 in the power line 1112.
  • a predetermined voltage for unlocking the electronic lock 71 is applied between the power supply line 1111 and the power supply line 1112.
  • the control line 1113 is a wiring for transmitting a control signal.
  • the control line 1113 is connected to the lock control unit 1122 of the control device 1120 and the decode circuit 1174 of the lock mechanism 1170.
  • the housing 10 is not a dedicated product, and the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170 are attached to the ready-made housing 10, so that the wiring 1110 is exposed to the outside of the housing 10. For this reason, the wiring 1110 can be cut or processed by a Service-to-Self.
  • the Service-to-Self can disconnect the power lines 1111 and 1112 and apply a predetermined voltage to unlock the electronic lock 71 illegally.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 includes a relay circuit 1173 and a decode circuit 1174, and unlocks the electronic lock 71 based on a control signal transmitted from the control device 1120.
  • the control device 1120 controls the lock mechanism 1170. As shown in FIG. 59, the control device 1120 includes a lock control unit 1122.
  • the lock control unit 1122 generates a control signal (unlock signal) for unlocking the lock mechanism 1170. Specifically, the lock control unit 1122 generates an unlock signal when the collation result indicates that the person matches (that is, when the personal authentication is successful). The lock control unit 1122 outputs the generated unlock signal to the decode circuit 1174 of the lock mechanism 1170 via the control line 1113 of the wiring 1110.
  • the lock control unit 1122 generates and outputs a signal modulated based on the bit pattern 1122b including a plurality of bits as an unlock signal. For example, the lock control unit 1122 outputs a voltage signal that changes between high (H) and low (L) based on the bit pattern 1122b via the control line 1113 as an unlock signal.
  • the bit pattern 1122b is stored in the storage unit 1122a included in the lock control unit 1122.
  • the bit pattern 1122b is the same as the bit pattern 1174b stored in the storage unit 1174a of the decode circuit 1174.
  • FIG. 59 shows an 8-bit pattern represented by “11010010” as an example of the bit pattern 1174b, but is not limited thereto.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 restricts the opening and closing of the housing 10. As shown in FIG. 59, the lock mechanism 1170 includes an electronic lock 71, a relay circuit 1173, and a decode circuit 1174. Although not shown, the lock mechanism 1170 includes a female key 72.
  • the electronic lock 71 is an electronic lock that is unlocked when a predetermined voltage is applied and that maintains a locked state when no voltage is applied. is there. That is, the electronic lock 71 is a normally-off type electronic lock.
  • the electronic lock 71 is fixed to the inner surface of the main body 11 of the housing 10. When no voltage is applied, the claw portion 71a protrudes and is inserted into the hole 72a (not shown) of the female key 72 fixed to the door 12, whereby the lock mechanism 1170 is locked. When a predetermined voltage is applied, the claw portion 71a is housed in the holding housing 71b and the claw portion 71a and the female key 72 are not locked, so that the lock mechanism 1170 is unlocked.
  • the relay circuit 1173 is a circuit that switches between application and non-application of a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71.
  • the relay circuit 1173 includes a switch 1173a that is controlled to be turned on / off by the decode circuit 1174.
  • the decoding circuit 1174 decodes the control signal transmitted from the control device 1120, and causes the relay circuit 1173 to apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71 when the decoded control signal indicates the unlocking of the electronic lock 71.
  • the decode circuit 1174 includes a storage unit 1174a that stores a bit pattern 1174b.
  • the decode circuit 1174 demodulates the control signal transmitted via the control line 1113, and determines whether or not the bit pattern included in the control signal matches the bit pattern 1174b.
  • the decode circuit 1174 turns on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173. Thereby, a predetermined voltage is applied to the electronic lock 71 and the electronic lock 71 is unlocked.
  • the decode circuit 1174 When the bit pattern included in the control signal does not match the bit pattern 1174b, the decode circuit 1174 does not turn on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173. For this reason, even if any signal is added to the control line 1113 by an unauthorized process, the lock mechanism 1170 is not unlocked unless it matches the bit pattern 1174b.
  • FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an operation performed by the lock mechanism 1170 of the article management system 1101 according to this embodiment.
  • the process shown in FIG. 60 is a detailed version of the unlocking process (S30) shown in FIG. That is, it is performed when an unlock signal is received from the control device 1120.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 waits until the decode circuit 1174 receives the unlock signal (No in S510). When the unlock signal is received (Yes in S510), the decode circuit 1174 decodes the unlock signal to acquire the bit pattern included in the unlock signal. The decode circuit 1174 determines whether or not the acquired bit pattern matches the bit pattern 1174b stored in the storage unit 1174a (S512).
  • the decode circuit 1174 causes the relay circuit 1173 to apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71. Specifically, the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173 is turned on, a voltage is applied to the electronic lock 71, and the claw portion 71a is housed in the holding housing 71b, whereby the lock mechanism 1170 is unlocked (S514). ).
  • the decode circuit 1174 does not turn on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173 and maintains the off state. For this reason, the lock mechanism 1170 is not unlocked and the locked state is maintained (S516).
  • the lock mechanism 1170 may notify the person in the vicinity of the housing 10 or the control device 1120 or the management device 30 of the error.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 may notify the controller 1120 of an error via the control line 1113.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 may be connected to the guide unit 90 inside the housing 10 and cause the display unit 91 or the audio output unit 92 to output an error display or a warning sound.
  • the article management system 1101 is an article management system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in the openable / closable casing 10, and is installed in the casing 10.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 that restricts the opening and closing of the housing 10, the control device 1120 that is installed outside the housing 10 and controls the lock mechanism 1170, and the lock mechanism 1170 and the control device 1120 are electrically and physically connected. Wiring 1110 to be connected is provided.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 unlocks when a predetermined voltage is applied, and maintains the locked state when no voltage is applied, and applies and does not apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71.
  • the relay circuit 1173 to be switched and the control signal transmitted from the control device 1120 are decoded.
  • the decoded control signal indicates the unlocking of the electronic lock 71
  • the relay circuit 1173 applies a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71.
  • the wiring 1110 includes power supply lines 1111 and 1112 for supplying a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71, and a control line 1113 for transmitting a control signal.
  • control device 1120 outputs a signal modulated based on a bit pattern 1122b composed of a plurality of bits as an unlock signal.
  • the unlock signal a signal modulated based on a bit pattern composed of a plurality of bits is used as the unlock signal, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the unlock signal may be a single pulse signal.
  • FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the control device 1220 and the lock mechanism 1270 of the article management system 1201 according to this modification.
  • the article management system 1201 according to this modification includes a control device 1220 and a lock mechanism 1270 instead of the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170. Is different.
  • the control device 1220 includes a lock control unit 1222.
  • the lock control unit 1222 includes a random number generator 1228.
  • the random number generator 1228 is an example of a first random number generator that generates random numbers.
  • the random number generator 1228 generates an M-sequence random number, but is not limited thereto.
  • the random number generator 1228 generates different random numbers over time. For example, the random number generator 1228 generates different random numbers at short time intervals of 1 minute or less.
  • the lock control unit 1222 generates a bit pattern based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1228, and outputs a signal modulated based on the generated bit pattern as an unlock signal.
  • the bit pattern is composed of a plurality of bits, and the number of bits is not particularly limited.
  • the lock mechanism 1270 includes a decode circuit 1274.
  • the decoding circuit 1274 includes a random number generator 1275.
  • the random number generator 1275 is an example of a second random number generator that generates random numbers.
  • the random number generator 1275 is synchronized with the random number generator 1228 of the control device 1220. Specifically, the random number generator 1275 generates the same random number at the same timing as the random number generator 1228.
  • the decoding circuit 1274 decodes the unlock signal based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1275. Specifically, the decoding circuit 1274 generates a bit pattern based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1275. The decode circuit 1274 compares the generated bit pattern with a bit pattern obtained by demodulating the unlock signal.
  • the decode circuit 1274 When the two bit patterns match, the decode circuit 1274 turns on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173 to apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71. Thereby, the lock mechanism 1270 is unlocked. If the two bit patterns do not match, the decode circuit 1274 maintains the off state without turning on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173. Thereby, the lock mechanism 1270 is not unlocked.
  • the control device 1220 includes the random number generator 1228, generates a bit pattern based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1228, and generates the generated bit.
  • a signal modulated based on the pattern is output as an unlock signal.
  • the complexity of the unlock signal can be increased, and the security of the lock mechanism 1270 can be increased.
  • the random number generator 1228 generates different random numbers over time
  • the decoding circuit 1274 has a random number generator 1275 synchronized with the random number generator 1228, and generates random numbers generated by the random number generator 1275. Based on this, the unlock signal is decoded.
  • the random number changes over time, so even if the bit pattern of the unlock signal at a certain timing is known to the Service-to-Self, the bit pattern can be used only for a short time. For this reason, unauthorized unlocking of the lock mechanism 1270 by the Service-to-Self can be suppressed, and the security of the lock mechanism 1270 can be further enhanced.
  • FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the control device 1320 and the lock mechanism 1170 of the article management system 1301 according to this modification.
  • the article management system 1301 according to the present modification is different from the article management system 1101 according to the fifth embodiment in that a control device 1320 is provided instead of the control device 1120.
  • the wiring 1110 that connects the control device 1320 and the lock mechanism 1170 is exposed to the outside of the housing 10. ing. For this reason, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as cutting or processing by a Service-to-Self is performed.
  • the control device 1320 includes a notification unit 1321.
  • the notification unit 1321 notifies the management device 30 of an error when the opening / closing sensor 80 does not detect that the housing 10 has been opened within a predetermined period after instructing the unlocking of the electronic lock 71. For example, when the wiring 1110 is disconnected, the lock mechanism 1170 is not unlocked even if the lock control unit 1122 transmits an unlock signal. For this reason, the casing 10 is not unlocked, and the open signal is not transmitted from the open / close sensor 80 to the control device 1320. Therefore, the notification unit 1321 notifies the management device 30 of an error by outputting an unlocking signal when the housing 10 cannot be opened although the housing 10 should normally be opened. As a result, the management device 30 can notify the administrator of the abnormality of the housing 10 and the control device 1320.
  • the article management system 1301 includes, for example, the opening / closing sensor 80 that detects opening / closing of the housing 10, and the control device 1320 instructs the unlocking of the electronic lock 71 for a predetermined period.
  • the notification unit 1321 that notifies the management device 30 of an error when the opening / closing sensor 80 does not detect that the housing 10 has been opened is provided.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 may periodically transmit an alive signal to the control device 1320 as in the fourth embodiment.
  • the lock mechanism 1170 transmits an alive signal to the control device 1320 using the control line 1113.
  • the notification unit 1321 may notify the management device 30 of an error when the alive signal is not received within a predetermined period.
  • Modification Here, a modified example of the article management system will be described. This modification is different from the above embodiments in that a purchase process (payment process) is performed before opening / closing the housing 10 using a user's communication terminal.
  • a purchase process payment process
  • a user's communication terminal a user's communication terminal
  • FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 1401 according to this modification.
  • the article management system 1401 according to this modification includes a communication terminal 1410.
  • the article management system 1401 is different from the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment in that it does not include the card reader 60.
  • the code reader 50 instead of the card reader 60, the code reader 50 functions as an acquisition unit that acquires personal information.
  • the casing 10 and the control device 20 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
  • the communication terminal 1410 is a portable information terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone. Alternatively, the communication terminal 1410 may be a stationary device such as a personal computer (PC). As illustrated in FIG. 63, the communication terminal 1410 includes a display unit 1411, a control unit 1412, and a communication unit 1413.
  • the display unit 1411 is a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, and includes a plurality of pixels arranged in a matrix.
  • the display unit 1411 displays images and videos generated by the control unit 1412. Specifically, the display unit 1411 displays a purchase screen or a reservation screen for the article 2.
  • the display unit 1411 is, for example, a touch panel display, and various displayed screens can be operated by the user.
  • the control unit 1412 controls the operation of the communication terminal 1410.
  • the control unit 1412 includes, for example, a nonvolatile memory in which a program is stored, a volatile memory that is a temporary storage area for executing the program, an input / output port, and a processor that executes the program.
  • the control unit 1412 executes an operation program (application program) of the article management system 1401, for example. By executing the operation program, the control unit 1412 generates a selection screen, a settlement screen, an unlock code display screen, an error display screen, and the like of the article 2 and causes the display unit 1411 to display them. Note that the control unit 1412 may activate a web browser, and various screens displayed on the display unit 1411 may be images generated by the management device 30.
  • the communication unit 1413 transmits and receives various types of information by communicating with the communication unit 37 of the management device 30.
  • the communication unit 1413 performs wireless communication or wired communication.
  • the communication unit 1413 performs wireless communication based on a communication standard such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark), 3G, 4G, or LTE.
  • FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the operation of the communication terminal 1410 of the article management system 1401 according to this modification.
  • the user purchases the article 2 by operating the communication terminal 1410. That is, the article 2 is purchased before the housing 10 is opened. Specifically, the user activates the operation program of the article management system 1401 by operating the communication terminal 1410. Note that a web page for purchasing the article 2 by the article management system 1401 may be accessed.
  • the control unit 1412 starts an operation program based on an operation by the user.
  • the control unit 1412 generates a selection screen for the article 2 and displays it on the display unit 1411 (S600).
  • the control unit 1412 acquires information indicating the types, prices, and the like of the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10 from the management device 30, and generates a selection screen based on the acquired information. .
  • the user selects one or more desired articles 2 while viewing the selection screen.
  • the control unit 1412 performs a settlement process for the article 2 selected by the user (S602). Specifically, information indicating the type and number of selected articles 2 is transmitted to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 1413.
  • the charging unit 33 of the management device 30 determines a charging amount based on information transmitted from the communication terminal 1410 and charges the user.
  • the billing process may be performed by the communication terminal 1410 instead of the management device 30.
  • the purchase may be completed simultaneously with the selection, or the control unit 1412 may generate a purchase confirmation screen and the display unit 1411 may display the confirmation screen. If payment information such as a credit card or a bank account is not registered in advance, the control unit 1412 may generate a registration screen at this time and display the registration screen on the display unit 1411.
  • the control unit 1412 is based on information indicating the selected item 2 (information unique to the item 2) and personal information (card information) indicating the user (owner) of the communication terminal 1410.
  • an unlock code display screen 1500 including identification information such as QR code (registered trademark) 1501 is generated and displayed on the display unit 1411 (S604).
  • the identification information is information used for unlocking the lock mechanism 70 of the housing 10.
  • FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the unlock code display screen 1500 according to the present modification.
  • the user causes the code reader 50 of the housing 10 to read the QR code (registered trademark) 1501 displayed on the display unit 1411.
  • the information processing unit 23 of the control unit 21 transmits the information included in the read QR code (registered trademark) 1501 to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 26.
  • the verification unit 32 of the management device 30 performs personal authentication based on the personal information included in the QR code (registered trademark) 1501.
  • identification information such as a QR code (registered trademark) 1501 displayed on the display unit 1411 is information with limited use conditions. For example, it may disappear when the code reader 50 cannot read it within a predetermined period (within 1 minute) after being displayed on the display unit 1411, and an error display screen or the like may be displayed.
  • QR code registered trademark
  • the subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment.
  • the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked, and the user can take out the purchased article 2 from the housing 10. it can.
  • the management apparatus 30 determines whether the purchased article 2 and the article 2 taken out by the user match. Can be determined.
  • the purchase process can be performed in advance, so that the management of the article 2 can be made more strict. Further, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage to the administrator due to unauthorized processing. Further, since the card reader 60 need not be provided, the configuration can be further simplified. Moreover, since it becomes unnecessary to provide the internal camera 40, the configuration can be further simplified.
  • the communication terminal 1410 may include an output unit that outputs a QR code (registered trademark) 1501 instead of the display unit 1411.
  • the communication terminal 1410 may output a QR code (registered trademark) 1501 to an output device such as a printer.
  • the printer prints QR code (registered trademark) 1501 on paper. The user can unlock the housing 10 by holding the QR code (registered trademark) 1501 printed on paper over the code reader 50.
  • the article 2 is not limited to the lunch boxes 2a to 2c.
  • the article 2 may be anything that can be stored in the housing 10.
  • the article 2 may be fresh food such as fish, vegetables, meat, or drinking water or frozen food.
  • the article 2 may be an article that does not require the refrigeration function or the freezing function of the housing 10.
  • the article 2 is a food product such as bread, retort food, and sweets.
  • the article 2 may not be food, but may be jewelry, clothing, books or magazines, stationery, or the like.
  • the opening / closing method of the housing 10 is not particularly limited. Horizontal opening, vertical opening, sliding type, double doors, etc. may be used. Further, the opening / closing method of the housing 10 may be a pull-out type as in the case of the individual housing 710 shown in FIG.
  • the internal camera 40 may be used as the code reader 50.
  • the internal camera 40 is attached to the back side of the door 12, and when the door 12 is closed, the inside of the housing 10 is photographed, and when the door 12 is opened, the code is It may function as the reader 50.
  • a portable information terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone possessed by the user may function as at least one of the code reader 50 and the guide unit 90.
  • the mobile information terminal may also have a function as an identification card for personal authentication, for example.
  • the user installs an application program for the article management system in the portable information terminal in advance.
  • the user activates the application program by operating the portable information terminal, and selects the item 2 (lunch) to be purchased.
  • the article 2 may be selected on the web page instead of the application program.
  • Application programs, web pages, and the like are created and managed by the management device 30, for example. The selection of the article 2 is arbitrary and may not be performed.
  • the user performs personal authentication by holding the portable information terminal over the card reader 60 (S1). Thereby, since the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked (S2), the user opens the housing 10 and takes out the article 2 (S3). At this time, the user may close the housing 10 (door 12) (S5).
  • the user reads the QR code (registered trademark) (identification display 51) of the taken-out article 2 using the camera of the portable information terminal (S4).
  • a confirmation screen is displayed as to whether or not the article 2 taken out by the user is correct for purchase.
  • information about the article 2 and a transmission button for transmitting the information to the management apparatus 30 are displayed.
  • the confirmation screen includes a selection button (for example, a Yes / No button) that allows the user to select whether the purchase target is correct in place of or in addition to the transmission button. Also good.
  • the transmission button the identification information included in the identification display 51 is transmitted to the management apparatus 30.
  • guidance information such as billing information is displayed on the display of the portable information terminal.
  • an error screen is displayed on the display.
  • an RFID Radio Frequency IDentifier
  • the article management system may include an RFID reader having a communication range in a predetermined range including the housing 10 as the second detection unit, and an RFID attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
  • the RFID reader can detect that the RFID attached to the article 2 has come out of the communication range.
  • the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • an unspecified number of people may be able to use without performing authentication processing.
  • the card reader 60 may read payment information such as a credit card and register the read information in the person list 35.
  • the article management system 1 includes the control device 20 and the management device 30 has been described, but the article management system 1 may not include the management device 30.
  • the control device 20 may include each component included in the management device 30.
  • the control device 20 includes a comparison unit 31 and the like. Note that the control device 20 does not need to include the communication unit 26 and includes an output unit that outputs a signal within the control device 20.
  • the article management system can be watched and applied to the system.
  • the article management system may be applied to a family living alone.
  • the article management system is applied using a household refrigerator as the housing 10. When the article 2 is taken out from the refrigerator, it can be seen that the resident lives as usual. On the other hand, normally, when the article 2 is not taken out during the time when the article 2 is taken out, it can be determined that some kind of abnormality (physical condition, unexpected accident, etc.) has occurred in the resident.
  • the management device 30 When applied to the watching system, the management device 30 stores the takeout history of the article 2 as time series data. Based on the retrieval history, the management device 30 determines that a change has occurred in the life of the resident, and notifies the medical personnel or the manager. Thereby, for example, it can be used for early detection of a resident's change.
  • the article management system may not include the billing unit 33 and the matching unit 32.
  • An article management system for managing one or more articles housed in an openable / closable casing, wherein the lock management mechanism is installed inside the casing and restricts opening / closing of the casing;
  • a control device that is installed outside and controls the lock mechanism, and wiring that electrically and physically connects the lock mechanism and the control device.
  • the locking mechanism unlocks when a predetermined voltage is applied, and maintains an unlocked state when no voltage is applied, and applies and does not apply the predetermined voltage to the electronic lock.
  • a relay circuit to be switched, and a decoding unit that decodes a control signal transmitted from the control device and causes the relay circuit to apply the predetermined voltage to the electronic lock when the decoded control signal indicates unlocking of the electronic lock Circuit.
  • the wiring includes a power supply line for supplying the predetermined voltage to the electronic lock and a control line for transmitting the control signal.
  • control device outputs a signal modulated based on a bit pattern including a plurality of bits as the control signal.
  • the control device includes a first random number generator, generates the bit pattern based on a random number generated by the first random number generator, and outputs a signal modulated based on the generated bit pattern as the control signal.
  • the article management system according to the second aspect.
  • the first random number generator generates different random numbers over time
  • the decoding circuit includes a second random number generator synchronized with the first random number generator, and the second random number generator generates The article management system according to the third aspect, wherein the control signal is decoded based on a random number to be transmitted.
  • the article management system further includes an opening / closing sensor for detecting opening / closing of the casing, and the control device causes the casing to be opened by the opening / closing sensor within a predetermined period after instructing the unlocking of the electronic lock.
  • the article management system according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, comprising a notification unit that notifies the management device of an error when it is not detected that the opening has been made.
  • a first detection unit that detects one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing inside the casing, and a target article that is at least one of the one or more articles Article comprising: a second detection unit that detects externally; an output unit that outputs first detection information indicating a detection result by the first detection unit; and second detection information indicating a detection result by the second detection unit Management system.
  • the article management system further includes, based on the first detection information and the second detection information, a first number that is an increase / decrease number of the one or more articles before and after opening / closing of the casing,
  • the article management system according to the sixth aspect further comprising a comparison unit that performs comparison with a second number that is the number of articles detected by the second detection unit.
  • the article management system according to the seventh aspect, wherein the article management system further includes an acquisition unit that acquires person information indicating a person who opens the casing, and the output unit further outputs the person information.
  • the article management system further includes a collation unit that collates a person list indicating one or more persons registered in advance with a person indicated by the person information, and outputs a matching result indicating matching or mismatching of the persons.
  • a collation unit that collates a person list indicating one or more persons registered in advance with a person indicated by the person information, and outputs a matching result indicating matching or mismatching of the persons.
  • the article management system further includes a lock mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the housing; A lock control unit that controls the lock mechanism, wherein the lock control unit unlocks the lock mechanism when the collation result indicates that the person matches.
  • the article management system further includes at least one openable / closable individual casing disposed inside the casing and forming at least one individual storage space for individually storing at least one of the one or more articles. And one or more individual lock mechanisms for restricting the opening and closing of each of the one or more individual casings, and an individual lock control unit for controlling the one or more individual lock mechanisms. Is assigned to a predetermined person, The individual lock control unit corresponds to an individual case assigned to the predetermined person among the one or more individual lock mechanisms when the collation result indicates a match with the predetermined person.
  • the article management system according to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, wherein the individual locking mechanism is unlocked.
  • the billing unit sets the first number and the price of the highest priced item among the one or more items.
  • the article management system further includes a notification unit that notifies the person when a comparison result by the comparison unit indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number.
  • the article management system according to any one of the above.
  • the said 1st detection part is an article
  • the article management system according to the sixteenth aspect, further comprising a mirror that is disposed inside the casing and within a photographing range of the one or more cameras and reflects a blind spot of the photographing range. .
  • the first detector generates a first interior image by photographing the inside of the casing before the casing is opened or immediately after the casing is opened.
  • the second interior image is generated by photographing the inside of the housing after being closed, and the output unit outputs the first interior image and the second interior image as the first detection information.
  • the comparing unit performs any one of the sixteenth aspect to the eighteenth aspect for counting the first number by performing image processing on each of the first internal image and the second internal image.
  • the article management system according to any one of the seventh to fifteenth aspects, wherein the first detection unit includes one or more detachable sensors that are detachably attached to each of the one or more articles.
  • Each of the one or more detachable sensors has a holding part that holds at least a part of the corresponding article, and detects the detachment of the corresponding article by energizing when the holding parts come into contact with each other.
  • Each of the one or more detachable sensors is rotatably combined with one side as an axis, and one of the two or more detachable sensors has two plate portions placed on a corresponding article, and the two plate portions are The article management system according to the twentieth aspect, wherein the detachment of the corresponding article is detected by energizing when they contact each other.
  • the said 1st detection part is an article
  • the one or more articles are stacked and stored inside the casing, and the first detection unit detects a height of an article positioned at the top of the one or more stacked articles.
  • the article management system according to any one of the above aspects to the fifteenth aspect.
  • the housing In the housing, one or more individual storage spaces for individually storing the one or more articles are provided, and the first detection unit is arranged for each individual storage space.
  • the article management system according to any one of the seventh to fifteenth aspects, which includes one or more sensors that detect articles arranged in the area.
  • the second detection unit has a detection range in which the identification display attached to the target article can be read when the target article has the same attitude as the attitude stored in the housing.
  • the article management system according to 27th aspect or 28th aspect.
  • the identification display is information unique to the attached article, and the article management system further includes a notification unit that notifies the person when the second detection unit reads the same identification display a plurality of times.
  • the article management system according to any one of the twenty-seventh aspect to the twenty-ninth aspect.
  • the article management system includes a control device including the output unit and a management device including the comparison unit, and the output unit receives the first detection information and the second detection information by wireless communication or wired communication.
  • the article management system according to any one of the seventh aspect to the 33rd aspect, in which the first detection information and the second detection information are output to the comparison unit by being transmitted to the management device.
  • a detection unit that detects one or more articles stored in a predetermined position inside the case that can be opened and closed, and an output that outputs detection information indicating a detection result by the detection unit. And the output unit indicates the position of the target article when the detection unit detects that the target article, which is at least one of the one or more articles, has been moved from the stored position.
  • An article management system that outputs position information as the detection information.
  • the present disclosure can be used as a highly versatile article management system, an article management apparatus, a management apparatus, and an article management method that can manage a plurality of articles with a simple configuration.
  • the present disclosure can be used in a vending system. it can.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is an article management system (901) for managing one or more articles 2 housed in an openable cabinet (10) that receives power supply, the article management system comprising: a power reception unit (24) that receives power shared with the cabinet (10); a communication unit (26) that transmits a reception signal indicating the reception state of the shared power; and a determination unit (938) that receives the reception signal and determines whether the shared power is to be blocked on the basis of the received reception signal. As a result of the feature, it is possible to provide an article management system, an article management device, a management device, and an article management method that are versatile and reliable and can manage one or more articles with a simple constitution.

Description

物品管理システム、物品管理装置、管理装置および物品管理方法Article management system, article management apparatus, management apparatus, and article management method
 本開示は、筐体に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理システム、物品管理装置、管理装置および物品管理方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to an article management system, an article management apparatus, a management apparatus, and an article management method for managing one or more articles stored in a casing.
 従来、物品を自動で販売する自動販売機が知られている(例えば、特許文献1を参照)。特許文献1には、カードリーダが読み取った認証情報に基づいて、通常モードと無料モードとを切り替えることができる自動販売機システムが開示されている。 Conventionally, vending machines that automatically sell articles are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Patent Document 1 discloses a vending machine system capable of switching between a normal mode and a free mode based on authentication information read by a card reader.
 しかしながら、上記従来の自動販売機システムでは、物品を収納する筐体が専用品である。筐体に収納される物品も、本体筐体に適合した形状及び大きさでなくてはならない。物品を収納する構成及び物品の取り出し口の構成も複雑になる。 However, in the above-described conventional vending machine system, a housing for storing articles is a dedicated product. Articles housed in the housing must also have a shape and size suitable for the main body housing. The structure for storing the article and the structure of the article outlet are also complicated.
特開2015-162084号公報Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-162084
 そこで、本開示は、簡単な構成で1以上の物品を管理することができる汎用性及び信頼性の高い物品管理システム、物品管理装置、管理装置および物品管理方法を提供する。 Therefore, the present disclosure provides a versatile and reliable article management system, article management apparatus, management apparatus, and article management method capable of managing one or more articles with a simple configuration.
 本開示の一態様に係る物品管理システムは、電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理システムであって、前記筐体と共通の電力を受ける受電部と、前記共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する送信部と、前記受電信号を受信し、受信した前記受電信号に基づいて前記共通の電力の遮断を判定する判定部とを備える。 An article management system according to an aspect of the present disclosure is an article management system that manages one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing that receives power supply, and that receives power common to the casing And a transmission unit that transmits a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the common power, and a determination unit that receives the power reception signal and determines the interruption of the common power based on the received power reception signal.
 また、本開示の一態様に係る物品管理装置は、電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体を備え、前記筐体に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理装置であって、前記筐体と共通の電力を受ける受電部と、前記共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する送信部とを有する。 An article management apparatus according to an aspect of the present disclosure is an article management apparatus that includes an openable / closable casing that receives power supply, and that manages one or more articles stored in the casing. And a power receiving unit that receives common power and a transmission unit that transmits a power reception signal indicating a power receiving state of the common power.
 また、本開示の一態様に係る管理装置は、受電部を有する物品管理装置と接続される管理装置であって、前記物品管理装置の前記受電部が受けた電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を受信する受信部と、受信した前記受電信号に基づいて前記電力の遮断を判定する判定部とを備えている。 A management device according to an aspect of the present disclosure is a management device connected to an article management device having a power reception unit, and receives a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of power received by the power reception unit of the article management device. A receiving unit that receives the received signal; and a determination unit that determines interruption of the power based on the received power reception signal.
 本開示の一態様に係る物品管理方法は、電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理装置を用いた物品管理方法であって、前記筐体と共通の電力を受け、前記共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する。 An article management method according to an aspect of the present disclosure is an article management method using an article management apparatus that manages one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing that receives power supply, and is common to the casing. The power receiving signal indicating the power receiving state of the common power is transmitted.
 また、本開示の一態様に係る物品管理方法は、受電部を有する物品管理装置と接続される管理装置を用いた物品管理方法であって、前記物品管理装置の前記受電部が受けた電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を受信し、受信した前記受電信号に基づいて前記電力の遮断を判定する。 An article management method according to an aspect of the present disclosure is an article management method using a management apparatus connected to an article management apparatus having a power reception unit, wherein the power received by the power reception unit of the article management apparatus A power reception signal indicating a power reception state is received, and the interruption of the power is determined based on the received power reception signal.
 本開示によれば、簡単な構成で1以上の物品を管理することができる汎用性及び信頼性の高い物品管理システム、物品管理装置、管理装置および物品管理方法を提供することができる。 According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide an article management system, an article management apparatus, a management apparatus, and an article management method that can manage one or more articles with a simple configuration and have high versatility and reliability.
図1は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの概略構成を示す模式図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an article management system according to the first embodiment. 図2は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムによる管理対象の物品の一例である弁当の上面図である。FIG. 2 is a top view of a lunch box which is an example of an article to be managed by the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図3Aは、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおいて、閉じられた筐体を示す斜視図である。FIG. 3A is a perspective view showing a closed housing in the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図3Bは、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおいて、開けられた筐体を示す斜視図である。FIG. 3B is a perspective view showing the opened housing in the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図4は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムを利用するユーザの動作例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of a user who uses the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図5は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図6は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおいて、登録された人物リストの一例を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a registered person list in the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図7は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおける価格リストの一例を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a price list in the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図8は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおける庫内カメラの撮影範囲を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a shooting range of the in-compartment camera in the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図9は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおいて、ユーザが物品をコードリーダにかざす様子を示す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a state where the user holds an article over a code reader in the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図10は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムのロック機構を示す斜視図である。FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図11は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムのロック機構の解錠状態及び施錠状態を示す側面図である。FIG. 11 is a side view showing an unlocked state and a locked state of the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図12は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムのロック機構の施錠状態を示す上面図である。FIG. 12 is a top view showing a locked state of the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図13は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図14は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの制御装置の動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図15は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの制御装置が行うエラー処理を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating error processing performed by the control device of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図16は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの管理装置が行う照合処理を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a collation process performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図17は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムのコードリーダ及び制御装置が行う識別表示読み取り処理を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an identification display reading process performed by the code reader and the control device of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図18は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの管理装置が行う比較及び課金処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of comparison and charging processing performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図19は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの管理装置が行う比較及び課金処理の別の例を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating another example of comparison and billing processing performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the first embodiment. 図20は、第1の実施の形態の第1の変形例に係る物品管理システムの筐体の断面図である。FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the housing of the article management system according to the first modification of the first embodiment. 図21は、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る物品管理システムの庫内センサユニットの斜視図である。FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit of the article management system according to the second modification of the first embodiment. 図22は、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る庫内センサユニットの着脱式センサの斜視図である。FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor of the in-compartment sensor unit according to the second modification example of the first embodiment. 図23は、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る庫内センサユニットに複数の物品が取り付けられた状態を示す図である。FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a plurality of articles are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the second modification of the first embodiment. 図24は、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る着脱式センサから物品を取り外す様子を示す図である。FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a state in which an article is removed from the detachable sensor according to the second modification example of the first embodiment. 図25は、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the second modification of the first embodiment. 図26は、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る物品管理システムにおける制御装置の動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the control device in the article management system according to the second modification of the first embodiment. 図27は、第1の実施の形態の第3の変形例に係る物品管理システムの庫内センサユニットの斜視図である。FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit of the article management system according to the third modification of the first embodiment. 図28は、第1の実施の形態の第3の変形例に係る庫内センサユニットの着脱式センサの斜視図である。FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor of the in-compartment sensor unit according to the third modification of the first embodiment. 図29は、第1の実施の形態の第3の変形例に係る庫内センサユニットに複数の物品が取り付けられた状態を示す図である。FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a plurality of articles are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the third modification of the first embodiment. 図30は、第1の実施の形態の第3の変形例に係る着脱式センサから弁当を取り外す様子を示す図である。FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lunch box is removed from the detachable sensor according to the third modification of the first embodiment. 図31は、第1の実施の形態の第4の変形例に係る物品管理システムの庫内センサユニットの斜視図である。FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit of the article management system according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment. 図32は、第1の実施の形態の第4の変形例に係る庫内センサユニットに複数の物品が取り付けられた状態を示す図である。FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a plurality of articles are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the fourth modification example of the first embodiment. 図33は、第1の実施の形態の第4の変形例に係る庫内センサユニットに物品を取り付ける様子を示す図である。FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a state in which an article is attached to the in-compartment sensor unit according to the fourth modification example of the first embodiment. 図34は、第1の実施の形態の第4の変形例に係る庫内センサユニットから物品を取り外す様子を示す図である。FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a state in which an article is removed from the in-compartment sensor unit according to the fourth modification example of the first embodiment. 図35は、第1の実施の形態の第5の変形例に係る物品管理システムの重量センサと物品との位置関係を示す図である。FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the weight sensor and the article in the article management system according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment. 図36は、第1の実施の形態の第6の変形例に係る物品管理システムの個別収納ユニットの斜視図である。FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the individual storage unit of the article management system according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment. 図37は、第1の実施の形態の第6の変形例に係る物品管理システムにおいて、物品が収納された個別収納ユニットの斜視図である。FIG. 37 is a perspective view of an individual storage unit in which articles are stored in the article management system according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment. 図38は、第1の実施の形態の第6の変形例に係る物品管理システムにおいて、個別収納ユニットから物品を取り出す前後の状態を示す斜視図である。FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a state before and after taking out an article from an individual storage unit in the article management system according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment. 図39は、第1の実施の形態の第7の変形例に係る物品管理システムにおける個別収納棚を示す図である。FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an individual storage shelf in the article management system according to the seventh modification example of the first embodiment. 図40は、第1の実施の形態の第7の変形例に係る個別収納棚の一部を示す斜視図である。FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a part of an individual storage shelf according to a seventh modification of the first embodiment. 図41は、第2の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 41 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an article management system according to the second embodiment. 図42は、第2の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおける複数の個別筐体の斜視図である。FIG. 42 is a perspective view of a plurality of individual housings in the article management system according to the second embodiment. 図43は、第2の実施の形態に係る複数の個別筐体が配置された筐体を示す正面図である。FIG. 43 is a front view showing a housing in which a plurality of individual housings according to the second embodiment are arranged. 図44は、第2の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおける人物リストを示す図である。FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a person list in the article management system according to the second embodiment. 図45は、第2の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの管理装置が行う照合処理を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a collation process performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the second embodiment. 図46は、第2の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの制御装置の動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device of the article management system according to the second embodiment. 図47は、第3の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system according to the third embodiment. 図48は、第3の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおける複数の物品の筐体への収納例を示す図である。FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of storing a plurality of articles in a casing in the article management system according to the third embodiment. 図49は、第3の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムにおいて、物品と収納位置との対応関係を示す収納位置テーブルを示す図である。FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a storage position table showing the correspondence between articles and storage positions in the article management system according to the third embodiment. 図50は、第3の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the third embodiment. 図51は、第3の実施の形態の変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the modification of the third embodiment. 図52は、第4の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system according to the fourth embodiment. 図53は、第4の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 53 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the fourth embodiment. 図54は、第4の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの管理装置が行う状態確認処理の動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the state confirmation process performed by the management apparatus of the article management system according to the fourth embodiment. 図55は、第4の実施の形態の第1の変形例に係る物品管理システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 55 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an article management system according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment. 図56は、第4の実施の形態の第1の変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 56 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment. 図57は、第4の実施の形態の第1の変形例に係る物品管理システムの管理装置が行う状態確認処理の動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an operation of state confirmation processing performed by the management device of the article management system according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment. 図58は、第4の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。FIG. 58 is a sequence diagram illustrating an operation of the article management system according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment. 図59は、第5の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの制御装置とロック機構との接続関係を示す図である。FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a connection relationship between the control device and the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the fifth embodiment. 図60は、第5の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムのロック機構が行う解錠処理を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the unlocking process performed by the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the fifth embodiment. 図61は、第5の実施の形態の第1の変形例に係る物品管理システムの制御装置とロック機構との接続関係を示す図である。FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a connection relationship between the control device and the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the first modification example of the fifth embodiment. 図62は、第5の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る物品管理システムの制御装置とロック機構との接続関係を示す図である。FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a connection relationship between the control device and the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment. 図63は、実施の形態の変形例に係る物品管理システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 63 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an article management system according to a modification of the embodiment. 図64は、実施の形態の変形例に係る物品管理システムの通信端末の動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the operation of the communication terminal of the article management system according to the modification of the embodiment. 図65は、実施の形態の変形例に係る解錠コード表示画面の一例を示す図である。FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of an unlock code display screen according to a modification of the embodiment.
 以下では、実施の形態について、図面を参照しながら具体的に説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
 なお、以下で説明する実施の形態は、いずれも包括的又は具体的な例を示すものである。以下の実施の形態で示される数値、形状、材料、構成要素、構成要素の配置位置及び接続形態、ステップ、ステップの順序などは、一例であり、本開示を限定する主旨ではない。 Note that all of the embodiments described below show a comprehensive or specific example. Numerical values, shapes, materials, components, arrangement positions and connection forms of components, steps, order of steps, and the like shown in the following embodiments are merely examples, and are not intended to limit the present disclosure.
 また、各図は、模式図であり、必ずしも厳密に図示されたものではない。したがって、例えば、各図において縮尺などは必ずしも一致しない。また、各図において、実質的に同一の構成については同一の符号を付しており、重複する説明は省略又は簡略化する。 Each figure is a schematic diagram and is not necessarily shown strictly. Therefore, for example, the scales and the like do not necessarily match in each drawing. Moreover, in each figure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the substantially same structure, The overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted or simplified.
 (第1の実施の形態)
 [概要]
 まず、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の概要について、図1を用いて説明する。図1は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の概略構成を示す模式図である。
(First embodiment)
[Overview]
First, the outline | summary of the article | item management system 1 which concerns on 1st Embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a schematic configuration of an article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
 本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1は、開閉可能な筐体10に収納される複数の物品2を管理するシステムである。なお、物品管理システム1が管理する物品2の個数は、1つのみでもよい。筐体10には、管理装置30と通信可能な制御装置20が取り付けられている。本実施の形態では、筐体10は、専用の筐体ではない。市販の一般的な筐体10に、制御装置20などのハードウェア構成を後付けで取り付けることにより、物品管理システム1が構成される。 The article management system 1 according to the present embodiment is a system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in an openable / closable casing 10. Note that the number of articles 2 managed by the article management system 1 may be only one. A control device 20 that can communicate with the management device 30 is attached to the housing 10. In the present embodiment, the housing 10 is not a dedicated housing. The article management system 1 is configured by attaching a hardware configuration such as the control device 20 to a commercially available general casing 10 as a retrofit.
 なお、本明細書を通じて、筐体10と制御装置20とをあわせて(他の実施の形態、および、その変形例を含めて)、物品管理装置と称する。 Throughout this specification, the casing 10 and the control device 20 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
 本実施の形態では、物品管理システム1は、物品2の保管、及び、筐体10から取り出された物品2の対価の課金を行う。つまり、物品管理システム1は、筐体10にいわゆる自動販売機の機能を有させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the article management system 1 performs storage of the article 2 and charges for the price of the article 2 taken out from the housing 10. That is, the article management system 1 can make the housing 10 have a so-called vending machine function.
 筐体10は、例えば、職場(オフィスビル)、学校、病院などの複数の人物が集まる場所に設置される。任意の人物又は予め定められた人物は、筐体10を開けることができ、筐体10に収納された物品2を取り出すことができる。制御装置20及び管理装置30が、筐体10から取り出された物品2と、取り出した人物とを特定し、特定した人物に対して特定した物品2の対価を課金する。このようにして、物品管理システム1は、筐体10に収納された物品2の保管及び販売を行うことができる。 The housing 10 is installed in a place where a plurality of persons gather, such as a workplace (office building), a school, and a hospital. Any person or a predetermined person can open the housing 10 and take out the article 2 stored in the housing 10. The control device 20 and the management device 30 specify the article 2 taken out from the housing 10 and the person who has taken out, and charge the price of the specified article 2 to the specified person. In this way, the article management system 1 can store and sell the article 2 stored in the housing 10.
 以下の実施の形態では、一例として、図2に示すように、物品2が弁当である例を説明する。すなわち、物品管理システム1は、オフィスなどに配置される自動弁当販売システムである。なお、図2は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1による管理対象の物品2の一例である弁当の上面図である。 In the following embodiment, an example in which the article 2 is a lunch box will be described as an example, as shown in FIG. That is, the article management system 1 is an automatic lunch box sales system arranged in an office or the like. FIG. 2 is a top view of a lunch box which is an example of an article 2 to be managed by the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
 弁当は、筐体10に収納され、温度管理が行われた環境下で保管される。弁当を買いに行く時間が惜しいユーザ、又は、市販の弁当とは異なる、特別な弁当(例えば、ベジタリアン用)が欲しいユーザなどが筐体10を開けて、自分の好きな弁当を購入することができる。決済は、予め登録された人物情報に基づいて自動的に行われる。このため、キャッシュレスで弁当の購入を行うことができる。 The lunch box is stored in the housing 10 and stored in an environment where temperature management is performed. A user who has a long time to buy a lunch box, or a user who wants a special lunch box (for example, for vegetarians) who is different from a commercially available lunch box may open the housing 10 and purchase his / her favorite lunch box. it can. Settlement is automatically performed based on pre-registered personal information. For this reason, lunch can be purchased cashlessly.
 図3A及び図3Bはそれぞれ、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の筐体10の斜視図である。図3Aは、筐体10が閉じられた様子を示している。図3Bは、筐体10が開けられた様子を示している。 3A and 3B are perspective views of the housing 10 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3A shows a state where the housing 10 is closed. FIG. 3B shows a state where the housing 10 is opened.
 図3A及び図3Bに示すように、筐体10には、複数の弁当2a~2cが収納されている。複数の弁当2a~2cはそれぞれ、物品2の一例であり、互いにその種類が異なっている。例えば、弁当2aは、主な具材として肉を含む弁当であり、弁当2bは、主な具材として魚を含む弁当である。弁当2cは、肉及び魚を含まないベジタリアン用の弁当である。弁当2a~2cは、洋風、中華及び和風などの料理のスタイルに応じた弁当でもよい。 As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the casing 10 houses a plurality of lunch boxes 2a to 2c. Each of the plurality of lunch boxes 2a to 2c is an example of the article 2, and the types thereof are different from each other. For example, the lunch box 2a is a lunch box including meat as a main ingredient, and the lunch box 2b is a lunch box including fish as a main ingredient. The lunch box 2c is a vegetarian lunch box that does not contain meat and fish. The lunch boxes 2a to 2c may be lunch boxes according to the style of dishes such as Western, Chinese and Japanese.
 ここで、物品管理システム1を利用して、ユーザが物品2を筐体10から取り出す(購入する)動作を、図4を用いて簡単に説明する。図4は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1を利用するユーザの動作例を示すフローチャートである。 Here, the operation in which the user takes out (purchases) the article 2 from the casing 10 using the article management system 1 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an operation example of a user who uses the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
 ここでは、ユーザは、物品管理システム1を利用することを許可された人物であり、物品管理システム1を正しく利用して、物品2を1つのみ取り出す場合について説明する。なお、図3A及び図3Bに示すように、筐体10の内部には、庫内カメラ40が取り付けられている。筐体10の外部には、制御装置20、コードリーダ50及びカードリーダ60が取り付けられている。 Here, a case where the user is a person who is permitted to use the article management system 1 and uses the article management system 1 correctly to take out only one article 2 will be described. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, an internal camera 40 is attached to the inside of the housing 10. A control device 20, a code reader 50, and a card reader 60 are attached to the outside of the housing 10.
 図4に示すように、ユーザは、個人認証(登録リストとの照合)のために、自身が保有するIDカード又はクレジットカードなどの自身を特定するための識別カードをカードリーダ60にかざす(S1)。ユーザの個人認証が完了した後、ロック機構70(図5及び図10参照)が解錠されるので、筐体10を開けることが可能になる(S2)。ユーザは、筐体10(扉12)を開けて、筐体10の中から物品2を取り出す(S3)。 As shown in FIG. 4, the user holds an identification card for identifying himself / herself such as an ID card or a credit card held by the user over the card reader 60 for personal authentication (matching with a registration list) (S1). ). After the personal authentication of the user is completed, the lock mechanism 70 (see FIGS. 5 and 10) is unlocked, so that the housing 10 can be opened (S2). The user opens the casing 10 (door 12) and takes out the article 2 from the casing 10 (S3).
 その後、ユーザは、取り出した物品2に付された識別表示51(図2参照)をコードリーダ50に読み込ませる(S4)。これにより、取り出された物品2の特定及び課金処理が行われる。そして、ユーザは、筐体10(扉12)を閉じることで、物品2の取り出し(購入)が完了する(S5)。なお、ユーザが筐体10を閉じるタイミングは、物品2を取り出した直後で、識別表示51をコードリーダ50に読み取られる前でもよい。 Thereafter, the user causes the code reader 50 to read the identification display 51 (see FIG. 2) attached to the taken-out article 2 (S4). As a result, the taken-out article 2 is specified and charged. And a user closes the housing | casing 10 (door 12), and the taking-out (purchase) of the articles | goods 2 is completed (S5). The timing at which the user closes the housing 10 may be immediately after the article 2 is taken out and before the identification display 51 is read by the code reader 50.
 図5は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の構成を示すブロック図である。図5に示すように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1は、筐体10と、制御装置20と、管理装置30と、庫内カメラ(第1検知部)40と、コードリーダ(第2検知部)50と、カードリーダ(取得部)60と、ロック機構70と、開閉センサ80と、案内部90とを備える。 FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 10, a control device 20, a management device 30, a warehouse camera (first detection unit) 40, and a code reader (first 2 detection unit) 50, a card reader (acquisition unit) 60, a lock mechanism 70, an open / close sensor 80, and a guide unit 90.
 なお、以下では、物品管理システム1が筐体10を備える例について説明するが、物品管理システム1は、専用の筐体10を備えなくてもよい。すなわち、汎用性の高い筐体(市販のショーケースなど)10に、制御装置20、庫内カメラ40、コードリーダ50、カードリーダ60、ロック機構70、開閉センサ80及び案内部90を取り付け、又は、筐体10の近傍に配置することで、物品管理システム1を構成できる。取り付けは、ネジ、接着シートなどの取付具を用いて行われる。つまり、筐体10として専用筐体が必要ではないので、汎用性の高い物品管理システム1として実現することができる。 In the following, an example in which the article management system 1 includes the casing 10 will be described. However, the article management system 1 may not include the dedicated casing 10. That is, the control device 20, the internal camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90 are attached to a highly versatile housing (such as a commercially available showcase) 10. By arranging in the vicinity of the housing 10, the article management system 1 can be configured. The attachment is performed using an attachment such as a screw or an adhesive sheet. That is, since a dedicated housing is not necessary as the housing 10, it can be realized as a highly versatile article management system 1.
 以下では、物品管理システム1の各構成要素の詳細について図面を用いて説明する。 Hereinafter, details of each component of the article management system 1 will be described with reference to the drawings.
 [筐体]
 筐体10は、複数の物品2を内部に収納するための開閉可能な筐体である。図5には、筐体10の内部に、第1検知部である庫内カメラ40、ロック機構70及び開閉センサ80が配置されている例が示されている。以下では、図3A及び図3Bを用いて、筐体10の詳細な構成について説明する。
[Case]
The housing 10 is an openable / closable housing for housing a plurality of articles 2 therein. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the internal camera 40, the lock mechanism 70, and the open / close sensor 80, which are first detection units, are arranged inside the housing 10. Below, the detailed structure of the housing | casing 10 is demonstrated using FIG. 3A and 3B.
 図3A及び図3Bに示すように、筐体10は、本体部11と、扉12とを備える。 As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the housing 10 includes a main body 11 and a door 12.
 本体部11は、筐体10の外郭をなす略直方体状の筐体である。本体部11は、内部に複数の物品2を収納するための略直方体状の収納空間11aを形成している。本体部11の少なくとも1つの面は開放されており、当該開放された面を覆うように扉12が取り付けられている。 The main body 11 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped casing that forms an outer casing of the casing 10. The main body 11 forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped storage space 11a for storing a plurality of articles 2 therein. At least one surface of the main body 11 is open, and a door 12 is attached so as to cover the open surface.
 なお、本体部11及び収納空間11aの形状は、略立方体形状、略円柱状又は略球体状などでもよく、特に限定されない。本体部11の大きさは、例えば、収納空間11aの容量が60リットル~100リットル程度であるが、これらに限定されない。本体部11は、例えば金属材料又は樹脂材料を成形し、組み合わせることで形成されるが、本体部11の材料も特に限定されず、木材などを用いて形成されていてもよい。 In addition, the shape of the main body 11 and the storage space 11a may be a substantially cubic shape, a substantially cylindrical shape, or a substantially spherical shape, and is not particularly limited. The size of the main body 11 is not limited to, for example, the capacity of the storage space 11a is about 60 liters to 100 liters. The main body 11 is formed, for example, by molding and combining metal materials or resin materials, but the material of the main body 11 is not particularly limited, and may be formed using wood or the like.
 本実施の形態では、本体部11の収納空間11aは、仕切部材によって複数の部分空間に区分されている。具体的には、図3A及び図3Bに示すように、収納空間11aには、2つの棚材13が配置されている。2つの棚材13は、収納空間11aを縦方向に3つ(上段、中段、下段)に区分している。棚材13は、例えば、平板又は平網を用いて形成されている。 In the present embodiment, the storage space 11a of the main body 11 is divided into a plurality of partial spaces by a partition member. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, two shelf members 13 are arranged in the storage space 11a. The two shelves 13 divide the storage space 11a into three in the vertical direction (upper, middle, and lower). The shelf member 13 is formed using, for example, a flat plate or a flat net.
 図示しないが、本体部11の互いに向かい合う2つの内側面(左内側面及び右内側面)には、同じ高さに一対の溝又は一対の突起部が設けられている。棚材13は、当該一対の溝に挿入され、又は、当該一対の突起部に載置されている。このとき、一対の溝又は一対の突起部は、互いに異なる高さに複数対設けられていてもよい。これにより、収納される物品2の大きさに応じて、棚材13の高さを変更することができる。このように、棚材13は、取り外し可能であってもよい。 Although not shown, a pair of grooves or a pair of protrusions are provided at the same height on the two inner surfaces (the left inner surface and the right inner surface) facing each other of the main body 11. The shelf member 13 is inserted into the pair of grooves or placed on the pair of protrusions. At this time, a plurality of pairs of grooves or a pair of protrusions may be provided at different heights. Thereby, according to the magnitude | size of the articles | goods 2 accommodated, the height of the shelf material 13 can be changed. Thus, the shelf member 13 may be removable.
 本実施の形態では、棚材13によって区分された部分空間毎に、異なる種類の物品2が収納されている。具体的には、図3A及び図3Bに示すように、上段には弁当2aが配置され、中段には弁当2bが配置され、下段には弁当2cが配置されている。弁当2aは、横に並べて、かつ、積み重ねて配置されている。 In the present embodiment, different types of articles 2 are stored for each partial space divided by the shelf material 13. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, a lunch box 2a is arranged in the upper stage, a lunch box 2b is arranged in the middle stage, and a lunch box 2c is arranged in the lower stage. The lunch boxes 2a are arranged side by side and stacked.
 扉12は、本体部11に開閉可能に固定されている。具体的には、扉12は、略矩形の板体であり、一辺を軸として回動可能に、本体部11の一辺に接続されている。つまり、扉12は、いわゆる横開き式の扉である。扉12が閉じられた状態では、本体部11の収納空間11aは外部と遮断されており、物品2を取り出すことはできない。扉12を開けることで、収納空間11aが外部に開放されて、物品2を取り出すことができる。 The door 12 is fixed to the main body 11 so that it can be opened and closed. Specifically, the door 12 is a substantially rectangular plate, and is connected to one side of the main body 11 so as to be rotatable about one side. That is, the door 12 is a so-called side-opening door. In a state where the door 12 is closed, the storage space 11a of the main body 11 is blocked from the outside, and the article 2 cannot be taken out. By opening the door 12, the storage space 11a is opened to the outside, and the article 2 can be taken out.
 扉12は、例えば、透明ガラス板などの透光性の部材を用いて形成されている。これにより、扉12を開けなくても、内部に収納された物品2の様子を目視により確認することができる。なお、扉12は、遮光性の部材を用いて形成されていてもよい。図示しないが、扉12の外周部には、扉12が閉じられた場合に本体部11との間の隙間を埋めるようにパッキンが設けられている。これにより、収納空間11aの密閉性(気密性)を高めることができる。 The door 12 is formed using a translucent member such as a transparent glass plate, for example. Thereby, even if it does not open the door 12, the mode of the articles | goods 2 accommodated in the inside can be confirmed visually. The door 12 may be formed using a light shielding member. Although not shown, packing is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the door 12 so as to fill a gap between the door 12 and the main body 11 when the door 12 is closed. Thereby, the sealing property (airtightness) of the storage space 11a can be improved.
 本実施の形態に係る筐体10は、電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体である。図5に示すように、筐体10は、供給される電力を利用して、収納空間11aの温度を調整する温度調整部14を有する。具体的には、温度調整部14は、収納空間11aを冷却し、かつ、所定の温度で保温することができる。なお、温度調整部14は、冷却に限らず、収納空間11aを加熱してもよい。また、温度調整部14は、収納空間11aの一部領域のみを冷却又は加熱してもよい。例えば、温度調整部14は、収納空間11aを領域毎に異なる温度で保温することができてもよい。 The casing 10 according to the present embodiment is an openable / closable casing that receives power supply. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the housing 10 includes a temperature adjustment unit 14 that adjusts the temperature of the storage space 11 a using supplied power. Specifically, the temperature adjustment unit 14 can cool the storage space 11a and keep the temperature at a predetermined temperature. In addition, the temperature adjustment part 14 may heat not only cooling but the storage space 11a. Moreover, the temperature adjustment part 14 may cool or heat only a partial area | region of the storage space 11a. For example, the temperature adjustment unit 14 may be capable of keeping the storage space 11a at a different temperature for each region.
 温度調整部14は、例えば、コンプレッサ(圧縮機)又はペルチェ素子などで実現される。コンプレッサ又はペルチェ素子は、外部(具体的には、制御装置20)から供給される電力によって駆動する。 The temperature adjusting unit 14 is realized by, for example, a compressor (compressor) or a Peltier element. The compressor or the Peltier element is driven by electric power supplied from the outside (specifically, the control device 20).
 図3A及び図3Bに示すように、筐体10は、外部からの電力を受電するための電源コード15を備える。電源コード15は、例えば、商用電源などに接続可能なプラグを有している。本実施の形態では、電源コード15は、制御装置20に接続されている。すなわち、筐体10には、制御装置20を介して外部から電力が供給されている。 3A and 3B, the housing 10 includes a power cord 15 for receiving power from the outside. The power cord 15 has, for example, a plug that can be connected to a commercial power source. In the present embodiment, the power cord 15 is connected to the control device 20. That is, power is supplied to the housing 10 from the outside via the control device 20.
 [制御装置]
 制御装置20は、庫内カメラ40、コードリーダ50、カードリーダ60、ロック機構70、開閉センサ80及び案内部90を制御する。具体的には、制御装置20は、庫内カメラ40、コードリーダ50、カードリーダ60、ロック機構70、開閉センサ80及び案内部90の各々への電力供給、並びに、各々との間で制御信号又は情報の送受信などを行う。また、制御装置20は、管理装置30と通信することで、情報の送受信を行う。
[Control device]
The control device 20 controls the internal camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90. Specifically, the control device 20 supplies power to each of the in-compartment camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90, and controls signals between them. Or send and receive information. The control device 20 transmits and receives information by communicating with the management device 30.
 制御装置20は、例えば、シングルボードコンピュータなどで実現される。具体的には、制御装置20は、プログラムが格納された不揮発性メモリ、プログラムを実行するための一時的な記憶領域である揮発性メモリ、入出力ポート、プログラムを実行するプロセッサなどを有する。制御装置20(シングルボードコンピュータ)は、筐体に収納されており、図3A及び図3Bに示すように、筐体10の外壁面に取り付けられる。 The control device 20 is realized by, for example, a single board computer. Specifically, the control device 20 includes a nonvolatile memory in which a program is stored, a volatile memory that is a temporary storage area for executing the program, an input / output port, a processor that executes the program, and the like. The control device 20 (single board computer) is housed in a housing and is attached to the outer wall surface of the housing 10 as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B.
 図5に示すように、制御装置20は、制御部21と、受電部24と、給電部25と、通信部26とを備える。制御部21は、ロック機構70を制御する錠制御部22と、各種情報の入出力及び処理を行う情報処理部23とを備える。 As shown in FIG. 5, the control device 20 includes a control unit 21, a power receiving unit 24, a power feeding unit 25, and a communication unit 26. The control unit 21 includes a lock control unit 22 that controls the lock mechanism 70 and an information processing unit 23 that inputs and outputs various types of information.
 錠制御部22は、ロック機構70を制御する。具体的には、錠制御部22は、管理装置30の照合部32による照合結果が人物の一致を示す場合に、ロック機構70を解錠する。本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1では、管理装置30が管理する人物リスト35に予め登録された人物のみに対して、筐体10から物品2の取り出し(すなわち、購入)を許可している。このため、錠制御部22は、物品2を取り出そうとするユーザが人物リスト35に登録された人間であると照合部32によって確認された場合のみ、ロック機構70を解錠する。これにより、当該ユーザに物品2の取り出しを許可することができる。また、錠制御部22は、開閉センサ80によって扉12が閉められたことが検知された場合に、ロック機構70を施錠する。具体的な解錠処理及び施錠処理については、後で説明する。 The lock control unit 22 controls the lock mechanism 70. Specifically, the lock control unit 22 unlocks the lock mechanism 70 when the collation result by the collation unit 32 of the management device 30 indicates that the person matches. In the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment, only the person registered in advance in the person list 35 managed by the management apparatus 30 is allowed to take out (that is, purchase) the article 2 from the housing 10. . For this reason, the lock control unit 22 unlocks the lock mechanism 70 only when the collation unit 32 confirms that the user who wants to take out the article 2 is a person registered in the person list 35. Thereby, the user can be permitted to take out the article 2. The lock control unit 22 locks the lock mechanism 70 when the opening / closing sensor 80 detects that the door 12 is closed. Specific unlocking processing and locking processing will be described later.
 情報処理部23は、庫内カメラ40、コードリーダ50、カードリーダ60、ロック機構70、開閉センサ80及び案内部90の各々の制御、及び、各々との間で制御信号又は情報の送受信を行う。例えば、情報処理部23は、庫内カメラ40から第1検知情報を取得する。情報処理部23は、コードリーダ50から第2検知情報を取得する。情報処理部23は、カードリーダ60から人物情報を取得する。情報処理部23は、開閉センサ80から筐体10の開閉情報を取得する。情報処理部23は、案内部90に、案内情報又はエラー情報を出力する。また、情報処理部23は、各処理部から取得した情報を、通信部26を介して管理装置30に送信する。情報処理部23が行う具体的な処理は、物品管理システム1の動作の説明とともに後で詳細に説明する。 The information processing unit 23 controls each of the internal camera 40, the code reader 50, the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70, the open / close sensor 80, and the guide unit 90, and transmits / receives a control signal or information to / from each of them. . For example, the information processing unit 23 acquires first detection information from the internal camera 40. The information processing unit 23 acquires second detection information from the code reader 50. The information processing unit 23 acquires person information from the card reader 60. The information processing unit 23 acquires the opening / closing information of the housing 10 from the opening / closing sensor 80. The information processing unit 23 outputs guide information or error information to the guide unit 90. Further, the information processing unit 23 transmits information acquired from each processing unit to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 26. Specific processing performed by the information processing unit 23 will be described later in detail together with the description of the operation of the article management system 1.
 受電部24は、外部からの電力を受け、制御部21に供給する。具体的には、図3A及び図3Bに示すように、受電部24は、電源コード及びプラグで構成され、家庭用コンセントなどに接続されて電力を受ける。 The power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside and supplies it to the control unit 21. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the power receiving unit 24 includes a power cord and a plug, and is connected to a household outlet and receives power.
 給電部25は、受電部24が受けた電力を筐体10に供給する。具体的には、給電部25は、プラグの差込口で構成され、筐体10が備える電源コード15が差し入れられる。つまり、筐体10には、制御装置20を介して電力が供給されている。外部電源装置、制御装置20及び筐体10がシリアルに接続されている。 The power feeding unit 25 supplies the power received by the power receiving unit 24 to the housing 10. Specifically, the power supply unit 25 is configured by a plug insertion port, and the power cord 15 provided in the housing 10 is inserted. That is, power is supplied to the housing 10 via the control device 20. The external power supply device, the control device 20 and the housing 10 are connected in series.
 このように、本実施の形態では、受電部24は、筐体10と共通の電力を受ける。具体的には、受電部24は、外部から電力を、筐体10と共通の電力として受ける。 Thus, in the present embodiment, the power receiving unit 24 receives power common to the housing 10. Specifically, the power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside as power common to the housing 10.
 通信部26は、管理装置30の通信部37と通信を行うことで、各種情報又は命令などの送受信(入出力)を行う。通信部26は、無線通信又は有線通信を行う。通信部26は、例えば、Wi-Fi(登録商標)又は、3G、4G若しくはLTE(Long Term Evolution)などの通信規格に基づく無線通信を行う。 The communication unit 26 communicates with the communication unit 37 of the management device 30 to perform transmission / reception (input / output) of various information or commands. The communication unit 26 performs wireless communication or wired communication. The communication unit 26 performs wireless communication based on a communication standard such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark), 3G, 4G, or LTE (Long Termination Evolution).
 本実施の形態では、通信部26は、庫内カメラ40による検知結果を示す第1検知情報、及び、コードリーダ50による検知結果を示す第2検知情報を出力する出力部の一例である。具体的には、通信部26は、無線通信又は有線通信により、第1検知情報及び第2検知情報を管理装置30に送信して、第1検知情報及び第2検知情報が管理装置30の比較部31に送信される。例えば、通信部26は、庫内カメラ40による撮影によって得られた第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像を第1検知情報として出力する。通信部26は、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像を同時に送信してもよく、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像をそれぞれ、取得される度に送信してもよい。 In the present embodiment, the communication unit 26 is an example of an output unit that outputs first detection information indicating a detection result by the internal camera 40 and second detection information indicating a detection result by the code reader 50. Specifically, the communication unit 26 transmits the first detection information and the second detection information to the management device 30 by wireless communication or wired communication, and the first detection information and the second detection information are compared with the management device 30. Is transmitted to the unit 31. For example, the communication unit 26 outputs, as first detection information, a first internal image and a second internal image obtained by photographing with the internal camera 40. The communication unit 26 may transmit the first image inside the image and the second image inside the image at the same time, or may transmit each time the first image inside the image and the second image inside the image are acquired.
 また、通信部26は、カードリーダ60によって取得された人物情報を出力する。具体的には、通信部26は、無線通信又は有線通信により、人物情報を管理装置30に送信することで、人物情報を管理装置30の照合部32に送信する。 Further, the communication unit 26 outputs the person information acquired by the card reader 60. Specifically, the communication unit 26 transmits the person information to the management device 30 by wireless communication or wired communication, thereby transmitting the person information to the matching unit 32 of the management device 30.
 [管理装置]
 管理装置30は、制御装置20から送信される情報に基づいて、物品2の管理を行う。具体的には、管理装置30は、筐体10を開けた人物の特定及び照合(個人認証)、筐体10から取り出された物品2の特定、並びに、物品2の対価の課金のうち、少なくともいずれかなどを行う。
[Management device]
The management device 30 manages the article 2 based on information transmitted from the control device 20. Specifically, the management device 30 specifies at least the identification and verification (personal authentication) of the person who opened the casing 10, the identification of the article 2 taken out from the casing 10, and the charge for the consideration of the article 2. Do one or the like.
 管理装置30は、例えば、サーバ装置である。管理装置30は、例えば、1台のコンピュータ、又は、LAN(Local Area Network)若しくはWAN(Wide Area Network)などのネットワークを介して接続された複数台のコンピュータから構成される。 The management device 30 is, for example, a server device. The management apparatus 30 includes, for example, one computer or a plurality of computers connected via a network such as a LAN (Local Area Network) or a WAN (Wide Area Network).
 図5に示すように、管理装置30は、比較部31と、照合部32と、課金部33と、記憶部34と、通信部37とを備える。記憶部34には、人物リスト35及び価格リスト36が記憶されている。 As shown in FIG. 5, the management device 30 includes a comparison unit 31, a verification unit 32, a billing unit 33, a storage unit 34, and a communication unit 37. The storage unit 34 stores a person list 35 and a price list 36.
 比較部31は、第1検知情報及び第2検知情報に基づいた比較を行う。つまり、比較部31は、筐体10の内外での物品2の検知結果の比較を行う。具体的には、比較部31は、第1検知情報と第2検知情報とに基づいて、筐体10の開閉の前後における複数の物品2の増減数である第1個数と、筐体10の外部で第2検知部50によって検知された物品2の個数である第2個数との比較を行う。比較部31は、第1個数と第2個数とを比較し、比較結果を、照合部32及び課金部33に出力する。ここで、第1個数は、例えば、筐体10から減った物品2の個数を正の数として示し、物品2が増えた場合、負の数として示す。 The comparison unit 31 performs comparison based on the first detection information and the second detection information. That is, the comparison unit 31 compares the detection results of the article 2 inside and outside the housing 10. Specifically, the comparison unit 31 determines the first number that is the increase / decrease number of the plurality of articles 2 before and after the opening and closing of the housing 10 based on the first detection information and the second detection information, and the Comparison is made with a second number which is the number of articles 2 detected by the second detection unit 50 outside. The comparison unit 31 compares the first number with the second number, and outputs the comparison result to the collation unit 32 and the billing unit 33. Here, the first number indicates, for example, the number of articles 2 decreased from the housing 10 as a positive number, and indicates as a negative number when the number of articles 2 increases.
 比較結果は、第1個数と第2個数との一致又は不一致を示す情報である。第1個数と第2個数とが一致している場合には、筐体10から取り出された物品2の個数と、コードリーダ50によって検知された物品2の個数とが一致していることを意味する。すなわち、第1個数と第2個数との一致は、ユーザが正常な使用方法に則って物品2を取り出したことを意味している。 The comparison result is information indicating whether the first number and the second number match or do not match. When the first number and the second number match, it means that the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 and the number of articles 2 detected by the code reader 50 match. To do. That is, the coincidence between the first number and the second number means that the user has taken out the article 2 in accordance with a normal usage method.
 第1個数と第2個数とが一致していない場合には、筐体10から取り出された物品2の個数と、コードリーダ50によって検知された物品2の個数とが一致していないことを意味する。すなわち、第1個数と第2個数との不一致は、故意又は過失による何らかの不正な使用が行われたことを意味する。例えば、第1個数が第2個数より多い場合、ユーザが取り出した物品2をコードリーダ50で検知させなかったことが要因として考えられる。また、第2個数が第1個数より多い場合、ユーザが誤って物品2を複数回、コードリーダ50で検知させたことが要因として考えられる。また、第2個数が負の数である場合には、不正な物品2が筐体10内に追加されたことが要因として考えられる。 If the first number and the second number do not match, it means that the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 and the number of articles 2 detected by the code reader 50 do not match. To do. That is, the discrepancy between the first number and the second number means that some unauthorized use was made intentionally or accidentally. For example, when the first number is larger than the second number, it is considered that the article 2 taken out by the user is not detected by the code reader 50. Further, when the second number is larger than the first number, it is considered that the user mistakenly detected the article 2 by the code reader 50 a plurality of times. Further, when the second number is a negative number, it is considered that an unauthorized article 2 is added to the housing 10 as a factor.
 本実施の形態では、比較部31は、まず、通信部37を介して取得した第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像の各々を画像処理することで、第1個数を計数する。具体的には、比較部31は、第1庫内画像に含まれる物品2の個数から、第2庫内画像に含まれる物品2の個数を減算することで、第1個数を計数する。例えば、第1庫内画像に含まれる物品2の個数が10個であり、第2庫内画像に含まれる物品2の個数が8個である場合、第1個数は2個になる。すなわち、筐体10から2個の物品2が取り出されたことが分かる。 In the present embodiment, the comparison unit 31 first counts the first number by performing image processing on each of the first in-compartment image and the second in-compartment image acquired via the communication unit 37. Specifically, the comparison unit 31 counts the first number by subtracting the number of articles 2 included in the second interior image from the number of articles 2 included in the first interior image. For example, when the number of articles 2 included in the first image in the first store is 10 and the number of articles 2 included in the second store image is 8, the first number is 2. That is, it can be seen that two articles 2 have been removed from the housing 10.
 なお、筐体10の開閉の前後で物品2の個数が増えた場合、第1個数が負の数となる。例えば、第1庫内画像に含まれる物品2の個数が10個であり、第2庫内画像に含まれる物品2の個数が11個である場合、第1個数は-1個になる。これは、例えば、ユーザの悪意などにより物品2(例えば空の弁当など)が追加された場合などに起こりうる。この場合、エラー報知、又は、所定額の課金処理などが行われる。詳細については、後で説明する。 In addition, when the number of articles 2 increases before and after opening and closing of the casing 10, the first number becomes a negative number. For example, when the number of articles 2 included in the first image in the first store is 10, and the number of articles 2 included in the second store image is 11, the first number is -1. This may occur, for example, when an article 2 (for example, an empty lunch box) is added due to user's malicious intention or the like. In this case, error notification or charging processing for a predetermined amount is performed. Details will be described later.
 照合部32は、人物リスト35と、人物情報が示す人物とを照合し、人物の一致又は不一致を示す照合結果を出力する。照合部32は、照合結果を課金部33に出力する、又は、通信部37を介して制御装置20の錠制御部22に出力する。 The collation unit 32 collates the person list 35 with the person indicated by the person information, and outputs a collation result indicating the person's match or mismatch. The collation unit 32 outputs the collation result to the billing unit 33 or outputs it to the lock control unit 22 of the control device 20 via the communication unit 37.
 本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1では、人物リスト35に予め登録された人物のみに対して、筐体10から物品2の取り出し(すなわち、購入)を許可している。このため、照合部32は、カードリーダ60が取得した人物情報が示す人物が、人物リスト35に登録されているか否かを判定する。つまり、照合部32は、個人認証処理を行う。 In the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment, only the persons registered in advance in the person list 35 are allowed to take out (that is, purchase) the article 2 from the housing 10. Therefore, the collation unit 32 determines whether or not the person indicated by the person information acquired by the card reader 60 is registered in the person list 35. That is, the collation unit 32 performs personal authentication processing.
 課金部33は、カードリーダ60によって取得された人物情報が示す人物に、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つの対価を課金する。本実施の形態では、課金部33は、比較部31による比較結果に基づいて課金額を決定する。 The charging unit 33 charges the person indicated by the person information acquired by the card reader 60 for at least one price of the plurality of articles 2. In the present embodiment, the billing unit 33 determines the billing amount based on the comparison result by the comparison unit 31.
 課金部33は、人物情報が示す人物による正常な使用が確認された場合には、正確な課金額を算出し、算出した金額を当該人物に課金する。具体的には、課金部33は、比較部31による比較結果が第1個数と第2個数との一致を示す場合に、コードリーダ50が検知した対象物品の対価を課金する。すなわち、取り出された物品2の個数と、コードリーダ50が検知した対象物品の個数とが同じであることが比較結果により確認されているので、課金部33は、対象物品の対価を課金する。 When the normal use by the person indicated by the person information is confirmed, the charging unit 33 calculates an accurate charge amount and charges the calculated amount to the person. Specifically, the billing unit 33 charges the price of the target article detected by the code reader 50 when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a match between the first number and the second number. That is, since the comparison result confirms that the number of articles 2 taken out and the number of target articles detected by the code reader 50 are the same, the charging unit 33 charges the price of the target articles.
 課金部33は、例えば、記憶部34に記憶された価格リスト36を参照することで、対象物品の個々の価格を取得する。課金部33は、対象物品の価格と個数とを乗じ、合算することで、合計金額を課金額として算出する。課金部33は、人物リスト35を参照することで、人物情報が示す人物に対応付けられたクレジットカードによる課金額の決済処理、プリペイドカードの残高の減額処理、又は、銀行口座に対する課金額の引き落とし処理等を行う。 The charging unit 33 refers to the price list 36 stored in the storage unit 34, for example, and acquires the individual price of the target article. The billing unit 33 calculates the total amount as the billing amount by multiplying and adding the price and the number of the target articles. The billing unit 33 refers to the person list 35 to settle a billing amount by a credit card associated with the person indicated by the person information, a prepaid card balance decrement processing, or a debit of a billing amount for a bank account. Perform processing.
 なお、物品管理システム1を雇用者又は企業が導入する場合で、利用者の多くが使用人である場合などには、給与からの天引きによる決済処理が行われてもよい。すなわち、課金部33は、人物毎の課金額などを含む購入履歴データを、雇用者又は企業の人事部若しくは総務部などに提供してもよい。 In addition, when an employer or a company introduces the article management system 1 and many of the users are employees, settlement processing by deduction from salary may be performed. That is, the billing unit 33 may provide purchase history data including a billing amount for each person to the employer or the personnel or general affairs department of a company.
 また、課金部33は、人物情報が示す人物によって何らかの不正な処理が行われたことが確認された場合には、相応の範囲内における最高額の課金額を決定し、決定した課金額を当該人物に課金する。課金部33は、比較部31による比較結果が第1個数と第2個数との不一致を示す場合に、複数の物品2のうち最も価格が高い物品の価格に、第1個数と第2個数とのうち大きい方の個数を乗じた値を、対価として課金する。 In addition, when it is confirmed that some unauthorized processing has been performed by the person indicated by the person information, the charging unit 33 determines the maximum charge amount within a corresponding range, and determines the determined charge amount Charge a person. When the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number, the charging unit 33 sets the first number and the second number to the price of the highest priced item among the plurality of items 2. A value obtained by multiplying the larger one is charged as a consideration.
 例えば、不正の1つの態様として、悪意の人物(以下、悪意者と記載する)が複数の物品2を取り出したにも関わらず、取り出した物品2の少なくとも1つをコードリーダ50によって検出させなかった場合が考えられる。本実施の形態では、コードリーダ50が物品2の識別表示51を検出することにより、取り出された物品2を特定するため、悪意者の不正によって、取り出された物品2の少なくとも1つを特定することができなくなる。 For example, as one mode of fraud, even if a malicious person (hereinafter referred to as a Service-to-Self) takes out a plurality of articles 2, at least one of the taken-out articles 2 is not detected by the code reader 50. The case may be considered. In the present embodiment, since the code reader 50 detects the identification indication 51 of the article 2 to identify the removed article 2, at least one of the removed articles 2 is identified by an unauthorized person. I can't do that.
 ここで、筐体10から取り出された物品2の個数は、庫内カメラ40による検知結果に基づいて把握することができる。そこで、課金部33は、取り出された物品2が、筐体10内に収納していた複数の物品2の中で最も価格が高い物品であるとみなして課金処理を行う。具体的には、課金部33は、複数の物品2のうち最も価格が高い物品の価格に、第1個数を乗じた額を、対価として課金する。 Here, the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 can be grasped based on the detection result by the internal camera 40. Accordingly, the charging unit 33 performs the charging process by regarding the taken-out article 2 as the highest priced article among the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10. Specifically, the billing unit 33 charges as a price an amount obtained by multiplying the price of the item with the highest price among the plurality of items 2 by the first number.
 記憶部34は、人物リスト35を記憶するためのメモリである。記憶部34は、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)又は半導体メモリなどの不揮発性記憶媒体である。 The storage unit 34 is a memory for storing the person list 35. The storage unit 34 is a nonvolatile storage medium such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) or a semiconductor memory.
 人物リスト35は、予め登録された1以上の人物を示すリストである。図6は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1において、登録された人物リスト35の一例を示す図である。 The person list 35 is a list showing one or more persons registered in advance. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the registered person list 35 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
 図6に示すように、人物リスト35は、IDと、氏名と、登録されたカード情報とがそれぞれ対応付けられている。IDは、人物に固有に割り当てられた管理番号であり、例えば、社員番号などである。カード情報は、人物に対して課金を行う際の決済用のクレジットカード又はプリペイドカードの番号などである。なお、カード情報の代わりに、人物の銀行口座などを示す口座情報が人物リスト35に含まれてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 6, in the person list 35, an ID, a name, and registered card information are associated with each other. The ID is a management number uniquely assigned to a person, for example, an employee number. The card information is a credit card number or a prepaid card number for settlement when charging a person. Account information indicating a person's bank account or the like may be included in the person list 35 instead of the card information.
 価格リスト36は、筐体10に収納された複数の物品2の価格を示すリストである。図7は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1における価格リスト36の一例を示す図である。 The price list 36 is a list indicating the prices of the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the price list 36 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
 図7に示すように、価格リスト36は、種類と、価格とがそれぞれ対応付けられている。種類は、例えば、物品2の名前などである。なお、種類ではなく、複数の物品2の個々に固有の情報(シリアルナンバーなど)と価格とが対応付けられていてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 7, the price list 36 is associated with a type and a price. The type is, for example, the name of the article 2. In addition, instead of the type, unique information (such as a serial number) and a price may be associated with each of the plurality of articles 2.
 通信部37は、無線通信又は有線通信により、制御装置20との間で情報の送受信を行う。通信部37は、例えば、Wi-Fi、又は、3G、4G若しくはLTEなどの通信規格に基づく無線通信を行う。 The communication unit 37 transmits and receives information to and from the control device 20 by wireless communication or wired communication. The communication unit 37 performs wireless communication based on a communication standard such as Wi-Fi, 3G, 4G, or LTE, for example.
 本実施の形態では、通信部37は、第1検知情報、第2検知情報及び人物情報を受信する。また、通信部37は、照合結果、比較結果、課金情報及びエラー情報を送信する。 In the present embodiment, the communication unit 37 receives the first detection information, the second detection information, and the person information. In addition, the communication unit 37 transmits a verification result, a comparison result, billing information, and error information.
 [庫内カメラ(第1検知部)]
 庫内カメラ40は、開閉可能な筐体10の内部に収納される複数の物品2を、筐体10の内部で検知する第1検知部の一例である。本実施の形態では、庫内カメラ40は、筐体10の内部を撮影する1以上のカメラである。
[Internal camera (first detector)]
The in-compartment camera 40 is an example of a first detection unit that detects a plurality of articles 2 stored in the openable / closable casing 10 inside the casing 10. In the present embodiment, the internal camera 40 is one or more cameras that photograph the inside of the housing 10.
 図3A及び図3Bに示すように、庫内カメラ40は、例えば、本体部11の内側面に取り付けられており、収納空間11aを撮影する。庫内カメラ40が撮影した画像は、制御装置20に出力される。 As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the in-compartment camera 40 is attached to, for example, the inner surface of the main body 11 and photographs the storage space 11a. An image captured by the internal camera 40 is output to the control device 20.
 具体的には、庫内カメラ40は、収納空間11aの隅に設けられている。具体的には、庫内カメラ40は、本体部11の上部であって、扉12との接続部分の近傍に配置されている。庫内カメラ40は、収納空間11aの扉12側の正面から見て、奥側に向かって撮影する。 Specifically, the internal camera 40 is provided at the corner of the storage space 11a. Specifically, the in-compartment camera 40 is arranged in the upper part of the main body 11 and in the vicinity of the connection portion with the door 12. The internal camera 40 shoots from the front side of the storage space 11a as viewed from the door 12 side toward the back side.
 庫内カメラ40は、例えば、USB(Universal Serial Bus)ケーブルを介して電力供給を受ける小型カメラであり、制御装置20にUSBケーブルで接続され、制御装置20から供給される電力によって動作する。なお、庫内カメラ40は、バッテリー(電池)を有し、バッテリーから供給される電力によって動作してもよい。 The in-compartment camera 40 is a small camera that receives power supply via, for example, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable, is connected to the control device 20 with a USB cable, and operates with power supplied from the control device 20. The in-compartment camera 40 may have a battery (battery) and may be operated by electric power supplied from the battery.
 庫内カメラ40は、魚眼レンズを有してもよい。これにより、収納空間11aを広範囲に亘って撮影することができる。または、庫内カメラ40は、撮影方向を変更できるように可動式の雲台に取り付けられていてもよい。 The internal camera 40 may have a fisheye lens. Thereby, the storage space 11a can be imaged over a wide range. Alternatively, the internal camera 40 may be attached to a movable pan head so that the shooting direction can be changed.
 本実施の形態では、1台の庫内カメラ40によって収納空間11aを撮影するが、撮影範囲内に収納空間11aの全てが入るとは限らない。図8は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1における庫内カメラ40の撮影範囲41を示す図である。ここで、図8は、収納空間11aを正面から(扉12側から)見た図である。 In the present embodiment, the storage space 11a is photographed by the single in-compartment camera 40, but not all of the storage space 11a is within the photographing range. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a shooting range 41 of the in-compartment camera 40 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. Here, FIG. 8 is the figure which looked at the storage space 11a from the front (from the door 12 side).
 図8に示すように、庫内カメラ40の撮影範囲41には、収納空間11aの全てが含まれているわけではない。この場合、下段に配置された弁当2c(物品2)は、庫内カメラ40によって撮影されないので、弁当2cの検知ができなくなる。 As shown in FIG. 8, the shooting range 41 of the internal camera 40 does not include the entire storage space 11a. In this case, since the lunch box 2c (article 2) arranged in the lower stage is not photographed by the in-compartment camera 40, the lunch box 2c cannot be detected.
 そこで、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1は、図8に示すように、筐体10の内部に鏡42を備える。鏡42は、庫内カメラ40の撮影範囲41内に配置され、撮影範囲41の死角を写している。具体的には、鏡42には、撮影範囲41に位置する弁当2cを含む範囲43が映っている。このため、庫内カメラ40によって撮影された画像には、鏡42に映り込んだ弁当2cが含まれる。これにより、庫内カメラ40の台数を増やさずに、収納空間11a内の物品2を検知することができる。 Therefore, the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment includes a mirror 42 inside the housing 10 as shown in FIG. The mirror 42 is disposed within the shooting range 41 of the internal camera 40 and captures the blind spot of the shooting range 41. Specifically, the mirror 42 shows a range 43 including the lunch box 2 c located in the imaging range 41. For this reason, the lunch box 2c reflected in the mirror 42 is included in the image photographed by the internal camera 40. Thereby, the articles 2 in the storage space 11a can be detected without increasing the number of cameras 40 in the warehouse.
 本実施の形態では、庫内カメラ40が撮影した撮影画像に対して画像認識を行うことで、筐体10に収納された物品2の個数を計数する。画像認識を容易にするため、図2に示すように、複数の物品2の各々には、所定色又は所定形状のマーカー44が付されている。 In the present embodiment, the number of articles 2 housed in the housing 10 is counted by performing image recognition on the captured image taken by the internal camera 40. In order to facilitate image recognition, as shown in FIG. 2, a marker 44 having a predetermined color or a predetermined shape is attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
 マーカー44は、例えば、白若しくは黒、又は、赤、緑、青などの原色などの単色のシールなどであり、物品2の表面に貼り付けられている。マーカー44の色は、物品2の色とは異なる色である。本実施の形態では、物品2が弁当であるので、弁当の具材に用いられにくい青色などをマーカー44の色として選択できる。 The marker 44 is, for example, white or black, or a single color sticker such as a primary color such as red, green, or blue, and is attached to the surface of the article 2. The color of the marker 44 is different from the color of the article 2. In the present embodiment, since the article 2 is a lunch box, blue or the like that is difficult to be used as a lunch box ingredient can be selected as the color of the marker 44.
 これにより、撮影画像から青色部分を抜き出すことで、マーカー44のみが強調される。マーカー44の個数をカウントすることで、筐体10に収納された物品2の個数を容易に計数することができる。 Thus, only the marker 44 is emphasized by extracting the blue portion from the photographed image. By counting the number of markers 44, the number of articles 2 stored in the housing 10 can be easily counted.
 なお、マーカー44の代わりに、反射材が物品2に付されていてもよい。この場合、撮影画像では、マーカー44の部分だけ輝度が高くなる。したがって、例えば、高い閾値を用いて撮影画像の画素値を2値化することで、マーカー44を強調することができる。 Note that a reflective material may be attached to the article 2 instead of the marker 44. In this case, in the captured image, the brightness of only the marker 44 is increased. Therefore, for example, the marker 44 can be emphasized by binarizing the pixel value of the captured image using a high threshold.
 本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1では、筐体10が開けられる前の筐体10内の物品2の個数と、筐体10が閉じられた後の物品2の個数とを比較することで、筐体10から取り出された物品2の個数を特定する。このため、庫内カメラ40は、筐体10が開けられる前又は直後と、筐体10が閉じられた後との少なくとも2回の撮影を行う。 In the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of articles 2 in the casing 10 before the casing 10 is opened is compared with the number of articles 2 after the casing 10 is closed. The number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 is specified. For this reason, the in-compartment camera 40 performs at least two photographings before or immediately after the housing 10 is opened and after the housing 10 is closed.
 本実施の形態では、庫内カメラ40は、制御装置20の制御部21による制御に基づいて撮影を行う。具体的には、庫内カメラ40は、制御部21から撮影命令を受けたタイミングで撮影を行う。撮影命令は、例えば、筐体10を開ける前と、筐体10を閉じた後とに制御部21から出力される。 In the present embodiment, the in-compartment camera 40 performs imaging based on control by the control unit 21 of the control device 20. Specifically, the in-compartment camera 40 performs shooting at a timing when a shooting command is received from the control unit 21. The imaging command is output from the control unit 21 before, for example, opening the housing 10 and after closing the housing 10.
 このように、庫内カメラ40は、筐体10が開けられる前に筐体10の内部を撮影することで、第1庫内画像を生成する。つまり、第1庫内画像は、筐体10が開けられる前の筐体10の内部の状態を表す画像である。また、庫内カメラ40は、筐体10が閉じられた後に筐体10の内部を撮影することで、第2庫内画像を生成する。つまり、第2庫内画像は、筐体10が閉じられた後の筐体10の内部の状態を表す画像である。 Thus, the in-compartment camera 40 generates the first in-compartment image by photographing the inside of the housing 10 before the housing 10 is opened. That is, the first interior image is an image representing the state inside the housing 10 before the housing 10 is opened. In addition, the internal camera 40 generates a second internal image by photographing the interior of the housing 10 after the housing 10 is closed. That is, the second internal image is an image that represents the internal state of the housing 10 after the housing 10 is closed.
 なお、庫内カメラ40は、開閉センサ80による検知結果に基づいて撮影のタイミングが制御されてもよい。例えば、庫内カメラ40は、開閉センサ80による検知結果に基づいて、筐体10が開けられた直後に筐体10の内部を撮影することで、第1庫内画像を生成してもよい。具体的には、庫内カメラ40は、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が開けられたことが検知された場合に、筐体10の内部を撮影することで、第1庫内画像を生成する。第1庫内画像は、筐体10が開けられた直後の筐体10の内部の状態を表す画像である。ここで、開けられた直後とは、筐体10が開けられてから所定期間以内である。所定期間は、ユーザが筐体10を開けてから物品2を取り出すのに要する時間より短い時間であり、例えば0秒~1秒であるが、これに限らない。具体的には、庫内カメラ40は、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が開けられたことが検知されてから所定期間以内に撮影を行う。 It should be noted that the shooting timing of the internal camera 40 may be controlled based on the detection result of the open / close sensor 80. For example, the in-compartment camera 40 may generate the first in-compartment image by photographing the inside of the housing 10 immediately after the housing 10 is opened based on the detection result by the open / close sensor 80. Specifically, when the opening / closing sensor 80 detects that the housing 10 has been opened, the storage camera 40 captures the inside of the housing 10 to generate a first storage image. The first internal image is an image representing the internal state of the housing 10 immediately after the housing 10 is opened. Here, “immediately after being opened” is within a predetermined period after the housing 10 is opened. The predetermined period is shorter than the time required for the user to take out the article 2 after opening the housing 10, and is, for example, 0 second to 1 second, but is not limited thereto. Specifically, the internal camera 40 captures an image within a predetermined period after the opening / closing sensor 80 detects that the housing 10 has been opened.
 また、庫内カメラ40は、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が閉じられたことが検知された場合に、筐体10の内部を撮影することで、第2庫内画像を生成する。具体的には、庫内カメラ40は、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が閉じられたことが検知されて所定期間以内に撮影を行う。所定期間は、特に限定されないが、例えば0秒~1秒である。これにより、第2庫内画像を利用して、筐体10から取り出された物品2の個数を速やかに確定することができる。 In addition, when the open / close sensor 80 detects that the housing 10 is closed, the internal camera 40 captures the inside of the housing 10 to generate a second internal image. Specifically, the in-compartment camera 40 takes an image within a predetermined period when the opening / closing sensor 80 detects that the housing 10 is closed. The predetermined period is not particularly limited, and is, for example, 0 second to 1 second. Thereby, the number of the articles | goods 2 taken out from the housing | casing 10 can be rapidly determined using a 2nd warehouse image.
 なお、庫内カメラ40は、カードリーダ60の動作に連動して撮影のタイミングが制御されてもよい。具体的には、庫内カメラ40は、カードリーダ60が人物情報を取得した時に、筐体10の内部を撮影してもよい。人物情報を取得した時点では、ロック機構70がまだ解錠されていないので、筐体10が開けられる前の庫内の状態を確実に撮影することができる。 Note that the timing of shooting of the internal camera 40 may be controlled in conjunction with the operation of the card reader 60. Specifically, the internal camera 40 may take an image of the inside of the housing 10 when the card reader 60 acquires person information. When the personal information is acquired, the lock mechanism 70 has not been unlocked yet, so it is possible to reliably photograph the state in the cabinet before the housing 10 is opened.
 あるいは、庫内カメラ40は、常時、筐体10の内部を撮影していてもよい。庫内カメラ40、制御装置20又は管理装置30などは、筐体10の開閉の前後の所定期間の映像(動画像)を記録していてもよい。制御装置20の情報処理部23又は管理装置30の比較部31は、記録された映像を構成する複数の画像(フレーム)の中から、筐体10が開けられる前の画像を第1庫内画像として取得し、筐体10が閉じられた後の画像を第2庫内画像として取得してもよい。例えば、情報処理部23又は比較部31は、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が開けられたことが検知された場合に、所定期間(例えば1秒)前の画像を第1庫内画像として取得してもよい。また、例えば、情報処理部23又は比較部31は、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が閉じられたことが検知された場合に、所定期間(例えば1秒)後の画像を第2庫内画像として取得してもよい。 Alternatively, the internal camera 40 may always take an image of the inside of the housing 10. The internal camera 40, the control device 20, the management device 30, or the like may record video (moving images) for a predetermined period before and after opening and closing of the housing 10. The information processing unit 23 of the control device 20 or the comparison unit 31 of the management device 30 displays the image before the housing 10 is opened from the plurality of images (frames) constituting the recorded video as the first interior image. And the image after the housing 10 is closed may be acquired as the second internal image. For example, when the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 detects that the housing 10 is opened by the opening / closing sensor 80, the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 acquires an image before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) as the first interior image. May be. Further, for example, when the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 detects that the housing 10 is closed by the open / close sensor 80, the image after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is used as the second interior image. You may get it.
 [コードリーダ(第2検知部)]
 コードリーダ50は、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つである対象物品を、筐体10の外部で検知する第2検知部の一例である。具体的には、コードリーダ50は、ユーザによって筐体10から取り出された物品2である対象物品を、筐体10の外部で検知する。本実施の形態では、コードリーダ50は、複数の物品2の各々に付された識別表示51を読み取る。
[Code reader (second detector)]
The code reader 50 is an example of a second detection unit that detects a target article that is at least one of the plurality of articles 2 outside the housing 10. Specifically, the code reader 50 detects the target article, which is the article 2 taken out from the casing 10 by the user, outside the casing 10. In the present embodiment, the code reader 50 reads the identification display 51 attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
 図3A及び図3Bに示すように、コードリーダ50は、筐体10の外側面に固定されており、筐体10の外部の所定の領域を撮影するカメラである。例えば、コードリーダ50は、USBケーブルを介して電力供給を受ける小型カメラであり、制御装置20にUSBケーブルで接続され、制御装置20から供給される電力によって動作する。なお、コードリーダ50は、バッテリー(電池)を有し、バッテリーから供給される電力によって動作してもよい。 As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the code reader 50 is a camera that is fixed to the outer surface of the housing 10 and photographs a predetermined area outside the housing 10. For example, the code reader 50 is a small camera that receives power supply via a USB cable, is connected to the control device 20 with a USB cable, and operates with power supplied from the control device 20. Note that the code reader 50 may include a battery (battery) and operate with electric power supplied from the battery.
 本実施の形態では、図2に示すように、物品2には、識別表示51として、QRコード(登録商標)などの二次元コードが付されている。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the article 2 is given a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark) as an identification display 51.
 物品2に付された識別表示51は、付された物品2に固有の情報である。例えば、識別表示51は、物品2のシリアルナンバー(製造番号)をマトリクス化した二次元コードである。二次元コードは、例えば、図2に示すように、物品2の上面に貼り付けられたラベル52に印刷されている。 The identification display 51 attached to the article 2 is information unique to the attached article 2. For example, the identification display 51 is a two-dimensional code in which serial numbers (manufacturing numbers) of the article 2 are matrixed. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the two-dimensional code is printed on a label 52 attached to the upper surface of the article 2.
 なお、物品2が弁当であるので、具材の散らばり及び汁のこぼれなどを防止するため、物品2を斜めに傾ける、又は、ひっくり返すなどを行うことは好ましくない。すなわち、物品2は、筐体10に収納された姿勢を保ったまま持ち運ばれることが望ましい。これは、コードリーダ50によって識別表示51が読み取られる際も同様である。 In addition, since the article 2 is a lunch box, it is not preferable to tilt the article 2 or turn it over to prevent the ingredients from being scattered and the juice from spilling out. That is, it is desirable that the article 2 is carried while maintaining the posture stored in the housing 10. This is the same when the identification display 51 is read by the code reader 50.
 したがって、本実施の形態では、コードリーダ50は、対象物品が筐体10の内部に収納された姿勢と同じ姿勢である場合に、対象物品に付された識別表示51を読み取り可能となるような検知範囲を有する。図9は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1において、ユーザ3が物品2をコードリーダ50にかざす様子を示す図である。コードリーダ50は、図9に示すように、鉛直下向きを中心軸とする略円錐状の検知範囲53を有する。このため、ユーザ3が物品2を取り出した際、そのままの姿勢でコードリーダ50に識別表示51を読み取らせることができる。 Therefore, in the present embodiment, the code reader 50 can read the identification display 51 attached to the target article when the target article is in the same attitude as that stored in the housing 10. It has a detection range. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the user 3 holds the article 2 over the code reader 50 in the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9, the code reader 50 has a substantially conical detection range 53 having a vertically downward center axis. For this reason, when the user 3 takes out the article 2, the identification display 51 can be read by the code reader 50 in the same posture.
 なお、コードリーダ50は、例えばバーコードリーダであり、物品2に付された識別表示51は、バーコードでもよい。また、コードリーダ50は、筐体10に固定されておらず、ユーザが手で掴むなどにより自由に検知範囲53を変更させることができてもよい。 The code reader 50 is, for example, a bar code reader, and the identification display 51 attached to the article 2 may be a bar code. Further, the code reader 50 may not be fixed to the housing 10 and the detection range 53 may be freely changed by a user holding it with his / her hand.
 [カードリーダ(取得部)]
 カードリーダ60は、筐体10を開ける人物を示す人物情報を取得する取得部の一例である。本実施の形態では、カードリーダ60は、クレジットカード又はIDカードなどのカード情報を人物情報として読み取る接触型又は非接触型のカードリーダである。
[Card reader (acquisition part)]
The card reader 60 is an example of an acquisition unit that acquires person information indicating a person who opens the housing 10. In the present embodiment, the card reader 60 is a contact-type or non-contact-type card reader that reads card information such as a credit card or an ID card as person information.
 図3A及び図3Bに示すように、カードリーダ60は、筐体10の外側面に固定されている。カードリーダ60は、クレジットカード又はIDカードなどに搭載されたICチップと通信を行うことで、ICチップに記憶されたカード情報を取得する。なお、カードリーダ60は、携帯電話又はスマートフォンなどの携帯情報端末に搭載されたICチップからカード情報を読み出してもよい。例えば、カードリーダ60は、クレジットカード、IDカード又は携帯情報端末との間で近接無線通信を行うことで、カード情報を読み出す。読み出したカード情報は、制御装置20を介して管理装置30の照合部32に出力(送信)される。 3A and 3B, the card reader 60 is fixed to the outer surface of the housing 10. The card reader 60 acquires card information stored in the IC chip by communicating with the IC chip mounted on a credit card or ID card. Note that the card reader 60 may read card information from an IC chip mounted on a portable information terminal such as a mobile phone or a smartphone. For example, the card reader 60 reads card information by performing close proximity wireless communication with a credit card, an ID card, or a portable information terminal. The read card information is output (transmitted) to the verification unit 32 of the management device 30 via the control device 20.
 カード情報は、筐体10を開ける人物、すなわち、カードの所有者を示す人物情報の一例である。カード情報には、カードの所有者に固有の情報が含まれる。例えば、カード情報は、カード番号、所有者の氏名、およびカードの有効期限のうち、少なくともいずれかなどを示す情報を含んでいる。 The card information is an example of person information indicating the person who opens the housing 10, that is, the owner of the card. The card information includes information unique to the card owner. For example, the card information includes information indicating at least one of a card number, an owner's name, and an expiration date of the card.
 なお、クレジットカード又はIDカードは、磁気ストライプカードでもよい。この場合、カードリーダ60としては、磁気読み取り装置(磁気カードリーダ)を利用することができる。 The credit card or ID card may be a magnetic stripe card. In this case, a magnetic reader (magnetic card reader) can be used as the card reader 60.
 また、盗難にあったカードの使用が行われる場合に備えて、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1は、筐体10を開ける人物の生体情報を人物情報として取得する生体情報取得部を、取得部の一例として備えてもよい。物品管理システム1は、カードリーダ60の代わりに生体情報取得部を備えてもよく、カードリーダ60に加えて生体情報取得部を備えてもよい。生体情報には、指紋、網膜、虹彩、顔、声紋、および血管(静脈)などの少なくとも1つを示す情報が含まれる。生体情報取得部は、例えば、指紋センサ、静脈センサ、マイクロフォン、又は、カメラ(イメージセンサ)などである。このとき、カメラは、コードリーダ50と兼用されてもよい。 Further, in preparation for the case where a stolen card is used, the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment includes a biometric information acquisition unit that acquires biometric information of a person who opens the housing 10 as personal information. You may provide as an example of an acquisition part. The article management system 1 may include a biological information acquisition unit instead of the card reader 60, and may include a biological information acquisition unit in addition to the card reader 60. The biological information includes information indicating at least one of a fingerprint, a retina, an iris, a face, a voiceprint, and a blood vessel (vein). The biological information acquisition unit is, for example, a fingerprint sensor, a vein sensor, a microphone, or a camera (image sensor). At this time, the camera may be used also as the code reader 50.
 [ロック機構]
 ロック機構70は、筐体10の開閉を制限する。具体的には、ロック機構70は、扉12の開閉を制限する。ロック機構70は、制御装置20に接続されており、錠制御部22によって解錠及び施錠が制御される。
[Lock mechanism]
The lock mechanism 70 restricts opening and closing of the housing 10. Specifically, the lock mechanism 70 limits the opening and closing of the door 12. The lock mechanism 70 is connected to the control device 20, and unlocking and locking are controlled by the lock control unit 22.
 図10は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1のロック機構70を示す斜視図である。図10は、筐体10の扉12を開けた様子を示している。 FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the lock mechanism 70 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 shows a state where the door 12 of the housing 10 is opened.
 図10に示すように、ロック機構70は、電子錠(オス型鍵)71と、メス型鍵72とを備える。ロック機構70の電子錠71と制御装置20とは、接続ケーブル73によって接続されている。 As shown in FIG. 10, the lock mechanism 70 includes an electronic lock (male key) 71 and a female key 72. The electronic lock 71 of the lock mechanism 70 and the control device 20 are connected by a connection cable 73.
 電子錠71は、所定の電圧の印加の有無に応じて解錠及び施錠を切り替える錠である。本実施の形態では、電子錠71は、所定の電圧(例えば12V)が印加された場合に解錠し、かつ、電圧無印加の場合に施錠状態を維持する。すなわち、電子錠71は、ノーマリオフ型の電子錠である。 The electronic lock 71 is a lock that switches between unlocking and locking depending on whether or not a predetermined voltage is applied. In the present embodiment, the electronic lock 71 is unlocked when a predetermined voltage (for example, 12 V) is applied, and maintains the locked state when no voltage is applied. That is, the electronic lock 71 is a normally-off type electronic lock.
 電子錠71は、爪部71aと、保持筐体71bとを有する。爪部71aは、保持筐体71bに対して出し入れ可能に保持されている。保持筐体71bは、筐体10の本体部11の内側面に固定されている。例えば、保持筐体71bは、ネジなどの固定具を用いて本体部11の内側面に固定される。爪部71a及び保持筐体71bは、例えば、強固な(剛性を有する)金属又は樹脂材料を用いて形成されている。 The electronic lock 71 has a claw portion 71a and a holding housing 71b. The claw portion 71a is held so as to be able to be taken in and out of the holding housing 71b. The holding housing 71 b is fixed to the inner side surface of the main body 11 of the housing 10. For example, the holding housing 71b is fixed to the inner surface of the main body 11 using a fixing tool such as a screw. The claw portion 71a and the holding housing 71b are formed using, for example, a strong (rigid) metal or resin material.
 メス型鍵72は、穴72aを有する。穴72aには、電子錠71の爪部71aが挿入される。メス型鍵72は、強固な(剛性を有する)金属又は樹脂材料を用いて形成されている。 The female key 72 has a hole 72a. The claw portion 71a of the electronic lock 71 is inserted into the hole 72a. The female key 72 is formed using a strong (rigid) metal or resin material.
 接続ケーブル73は、電子錠71と制御装置20とを電気的かつ物理的に接続する配線の一例である。接続ケーブル73は、電子錠71に電力を供給するための電力ケーブルを含んでいる。 The connection cable 73 is an example of wiring that electrically and physically connects the electronic lock 71 and the control device 20. The connection cable 73 includes a power cable for supplying power to the electronic lock 71.
 図示しないが、電子錠71は、保持筐体71bに収納された駆動部を備える。駆動部は、印加された電圧を利用して爪部71aを移動させるサーボモータなどである。 Although not shown, the electronic lock 71 includes a drive unit housed in the holding housing 71b. The drive unit is a servo motor or the like that moves the claw unit 71a using an applied voltage.
 図11は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1のロック機構70の解錠状態及び施錠状態を示す側面図である。図12は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1のロック機構70の施錠状態の上面図である。 FIG. 11 is a side view showing an unlocked state and a locked state of the lock mechanism 70 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a top view of the locking mechanism 70 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment in a locked state.
 図11の左側に示すように、電子錠71では、電圧が無印加の場合に、爪部71aが保持筐体71bから突出している。突出した爪部71aがメス型鍵72の穴72aに挿入されて、爪部71aの側方(突出方向に直交する方向)への移動が規制される。 As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the electronic lock 71, when no voltage is applied, the claw portion 71a protrudes from the holding casing 71b. The protruding claw portion 71a is inserted into the hole 72a of the female key 72, and movement of the claw portion 71a in the lateral direction (direction perpendicular to the protruding direction) is restricted.
 本実施の形態では、図12に示すように、爪部71aの全周に亘ってメス型鍵72が存在するため、爪部71aは突出方向に直交する全方向への移動が規制される。これにより、爪部71aとメス型鍵72とが係止することで、ロック機構70の施錠状態が維持される。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, since the female key 72 is present over the entire circumference of the claw portion 71a, the claw portion 71a is restricted from moving in all directions orthogonal to the protruding direction. Thereby, the claw part 71a and the female key 72 are latched, and the locked state of the lock mechanism 70 is maintained.
 一方で、電圧が印加された場合、駆動部(図示せず)は、爪部71aを保持筐体71b内に収納するように移動させる。電圧の印加中は、爪部71aが保持筐体71b内に収納された状態が維持される。これにより、図11の右側に示すように、爪部71aとメス型鍵72とが係止しないので、扉12を開けることが可能になる。なお、図11では、爪部71aが保持筐体71b内に完全に収納されている例を示しているが、これに限らない。電圧が印加された場合に、爪部71aとメス型鍵72とが係止しない(接触しない)位置関係にあればよい。 On the other hand, when a voltage is applied, the drive unit (not shown) moves the claw portion 71a so as to be housed in the holding housing 71b. While the voltage is applied, the state in which the claw portion 71a is housed in the holding housing 71b is maintained. As a result, as shown on the right side of FIG. 11, the claw portion 71 a and the female key 72 are not locked, so that the door 12 can be opened. Although FIG. 11 shows an example in which the claw portion 71a is completely stored in the holding housing 71b, the present invention is not limited to this. When the voltage is applied, the claw portion 71a and the female key 72 may be in a positional relationship where they are not locked (not in contact).
 なお、図10及び図12には、メス型鍵72がリング状に構成され、爪部71aの、突出方向に対して直交する全方向に対する移動を規制する例を示しているが、これに限らない。メス型鍵72は、例えば、扉12を開ける方向への爪部71aの移動を規制する一方で、扉12を閉じる方向への爪部71aの移動を規制しなくてもよい。これにより、解錠の際に電圧を印加すれば、扉12を閉じるだけで、自動的にロック機構の施錠を行うことができる。すなわち、扉12が閉じられたことを検知した後に電圧の印加を停止しなくてもよく、扉12が開けられた時点で、電圧の印加を停止することができ、消費電力を低減することができる。 10 and 12 show an example in which the female key 72 is configured in a ring shape and restricts the movement of the claw portion 71a in all directions orthogonal to the protruding direction. Absent. For example, the female key 72 restricts the movement of the claw portion 71a in the direction of opening the door 12, but does not need to restrict the movement of the claw portion 71a in the direction of closing the door 12. Thereby, if a voltage is applied at the time of unlocking, the lock mechanism can be automatically locked only by closing the door 12. That is, it is not necessary to stop the application of voltage after detecting that the door 12 is closed. When the door 12 is opened, the application of voltage can be stopped and power consumption can be reduced. it can.
 また、電子錠(オス型鍵)71が扉12に取り付けられ、メス型鍵72が筐体10に取り付けられてもよい。また、筐体10に取り付ける場合においても、筐体10の側面に限らず、天井面又は床面に取り付けられてもよい。また、メス型鍵72は、筐体10又は扉12に設けられた凹部(例えば、後述する個別筐体710の凹部772と同様)でもよい。 Alternatively, an electronic lock (male key) 71 may be attached to the door 12 and a female key 72 may be attached to the housing 10. Moreover, when attaching to the housing | casing 10, you may attach not only to the side surface of the housing | casing 10, but to a ceiling surface or a floor surface. The female key 72 may be a recess provided in the housing 10 or the door 12 (for example, similar to a recess 772 of the individual housing 710 described later).
 また、本実施の形態では、ロック機構70が物理的なロック機構である例について示したが、ロック機構70は、電磁石を利用したロック機構でもよい。後述する個別ロック機構770も同様である。 In the present embodiment, an example in which the lock mechanism 70 is a physical lock mechanism has been described. However, the lock mechanism 70 may be a lock mechanism using an electromagnet. The same applies to the individual lock mechanism 770 described later.
 [開閉センサ]
 開閉センサ80は、筐体10の開閉を検知する。具体的には、開閉センサ80は、扉12が開けられたこと及び閉じられたことを検知する。本実施の形態では、開閉センサ80は、タクトスイッチなどの接触式の開閉センサである。
[Open / close sensor]
The opening / closing sensor 80 detects opening / closing of the housing 10. Specifically, the open / close sensor 80 detects that the door 12 is opened and closed. In the present embodiment, the open / close sensor 80 is a contact-type open / close sensor such as a tact switch.
 開閉センサ80は、例えば、本体部11又は電子錠71などに固定されている。開閉センサ80は、扉12が閉じられた場合に押下され、扉12が開けられた場合に押し上がるスイッチ部(図示せず)を有する。例えば、開閉センサ80は、スイッチ部が押下されている場合に所定の信号(閉信号)を制御装置20に送信し、スイッチ部が押下されていない場合に閉信号の送信を停止する。 The opening / closing sensor 80 is fixed to the main body 11 or the electronic lock 71, for example. The open / close sensor 80 has a switch portion (not shown) that is pressed when the door 12 is closed and is pushed up when the door 12 is opened. For example, the open / close sensor 80 transmits a predetermined signal (close signal) to the control device 20 when the switch unit is pressed, and stops transmission of the close signal when the switch unit is not pressed.
 これにより、制御装置20では、閉信号の受信の有無により、扉12の開閉を判定することができる。具体的には、制御装置20の錠制御部22は、閉信号を受信している場合に、扉12が閉じられていると判定する。錠制御部22は、閉信号を受信していない場合に、扉12が開けられていると判定する。 Thereby, the control device 20 can determine whether the door 12 is opened or closed based on whether or not the closing signal is received. Specifically, the lock control unit 22 of the control device 20 determines that the door 12 is closed when the close signal is received. When the lock signal is not received, the lock control unit 22 determines that the door 12 is opened.
 なお、開閉センサ80は、スイッチ部が押下されていない場合に所定の信号(開信号)を送信し、スイッチ部が押下されている場合に開信号の送信を停止してもよい。あるいは、開閉センサ80は、スイッチ部の押下状態に合わせて、閉信号と開信号とをそれぞれ送信してもよい。 The open / close sensor 80 may transmit a predetermined signal (open signal) when the switch unit is not pressed, and may stop transmitting the open signal when the switch unit is pressed. Alternatively, the open / close sensor 80 may transmit a close signal and an open signal in accordance with the pressed state of the switch unit.
 なお、開閉センサ80は、接触式の開閉センサでなくてもよい。例えば、開閉センサ80は、磁気センサでもよい。具体的には、本体部11には、錠制御部22に電気的に接続されたリードスイッチ又はコイルが取り付けられ、扉12には、永久磁石が取り付けられる。扉12が閉じられた場合、永久磁石がリードスイッチに近接し、リードスイッチが導通して電流が流れる。あるいは、扉12が閉じられた場合に、永久磁石がコイルに近接し、電磁誘導によりコイルに電流が流れる。これらの電流が、閉信号として錠制御部22に出力される。 The open / close sensor 80 may not be a contact type open / close sensor. For example, the open / close sensor 80 may be a magnetic sensor. Specifically, a reed switch or a coil that is electrically connected to the lock control unit 22 is attached to the main body 11, and a permanent magnet is attached to the door 12. When the door 12 is closed, the permanent magnet comes close to the reed switch, the reed switch becomes conductive, and a current flows. Alternatively, when the door 12 is closed, the permanent magnet approaches the coil, and current flows through the coil by electromagnetic induction. These currents are output to the lock control unit 22 as a closing signal.
 [案内部]
 案内部90は、筐体10を開ける人物に対象物品を案内する。例えば、案内部90は、筐体10を開ける人物に勧める物品2、又は、当該人物によって予め指定されていた(予約済みの)物品2などを案内する。
[Guidance Department]
The guide unit 90 guides the target article to the person who opens the housing 10. For example, the guide unit 90 guides the article 2 recommended for the person who opens the housing 10 or the article 2 that has been designated (reserved) in advance by the person.
 図5に示すように、案内部90は、表示部91と、音声出力部92とを備える。 As shown in FIG. 5, the guide unit 90 includes a display unit 91 and an audio output unit 92.
 表示部91は、対象物品の収納位置を案内する案内情報を表示する。例えば、表示部91は、マトリクス状に配置された複数の画素を有し、画像又は映像を表示できる液晶表示装置(LCD)又は有機ELディスプレイなどである。表示部91は、案内画像などを表示する。 The display unit 91 displays guidance information for guiding the storage position of the target article. For example, the display unit 91 is a liquid crystal display (LCD) or an organic EL display that has a plurality of pixels arranged in a matrix and can display an image or video. The display unit 91 displays a guide image and the like.
 なお、表示部91は、筐体10の所定の位置に取り付けられた複数の発光素子でもよい。複数の発光素子は、例えば筐体10の本体部11の開口の縁に沿って一列に並んで配置されている。複数の発光素子の各々の点灯及び消灯を切り替えることで、点灯した発光素子の位置に対応する、対象物品の位置を示すことができる。複数の発光素子は、例えば、LED(Light Emitting Diode)素子であるが、これに限らない。 The display unit 91 may be a plurality of light emitting elements attached to predetermined positions of the housing 10. For example, the plurality of light emitting elements are arranged in a line along the edge of the opening of the main body 11 of the housing 10. By switching between lighting and extinguishing of each of the plurality of light emitting elements, the position of the target article corresponding to the position of the lighted light emitting element can be indicated. The plurality of light emitting elements are, for example, LED (Light Emitting Diode) elements, but are not limited thereto.
 音声出力部92は、対象物品の収納位置を案内する案内情報を、音声として出力する。音声出力部92は、例えば、スピーカ素子であり、筐体10又は制御装置20に取り付けられる。 The voice output unit 92 outputs guidance information for guiding the storage position of the target article as voice. The audio output unit 92 is a speaker element, for example, and is attached to the housing 10 or the control device 20.
 本実施の形態では、案内部90は、報知部としても機能する。すなわち、案内部90は、物品管理システム1に何らかの問題が発生したことを、筐体10の周囲に居る人物に報知する。 In the present embodiment, the guide unit 90 also functions as a notification unit. That is, the guide unit 90 notifies a person around the housing 10 that some problem has occurred in the article management system 1.
 例えば、案内部90は、比較部31による比較結果が第1個数と第2個数との不一致を示す場合に、人物情報が示す人物に、問題が発生したことを報知する。具体的には、案内部90は、物品2を筐体10から取り出した人物に対して、何らかの不正が行われたことを知らせる。例えば、音声出力部92は、警告音(ブザー音)又は警告用の音声を発してもよい。あるいは、表示部91は、LED素子を点滅表示させてもよい。表示部91が画像又は文字を表示できる場合、警告メッセージなどを表示してもよい。 For example, when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number, the guide unit 90 notifies the person indicated by the person information that a problem has occurred. Specifically, the guide unit 90 notifies the person who took out the article 2 from the housing 10 that some fraud has been performed. For example, the sound output unit 92 may emit a warning sound (buzzer sound) or a warning sound. Alternatively, the display unit 91 may cause the LED element to blink. When the display unit 91 can display images or characters, a warning message or the like may be displayed.
 また、例えば、案内部90は、コードリーダ50が同一の識別表示51を複数回読み取った場合に、人物情報が示す人物に、誤りがあったことを報知する。本実施の形態では、全ての物品2には、各々に固有の識別表示51が付されている。 For example, when the code reader 50 reads the same identification display 51 a plurality of times, the guide unit 90 notifies the person indicated by the person information that there is an error. In the present embodiment, all the articles 2 are each provided with a unique identification display 51.
 例えば、複数の物品2を筐体10から取り出した場合、誤って1つの物品2の識別表示51を複数回、コードリーダ50に読み取らせてしまう虞がある。このような場合に、案内部90は、ユーザに誤りがあることを知らせることができる。 For example, when a plurality of articles 2 are taken out from the casing 10, there is a possibility that the code reader 50 may read the identification display 51 of one article 2 a plurality of times by mistake. In such a case, the guide unit 90 can inform the user that there is an error.
 [動作]
 続いて、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の動作について説明する。まず、物品管理システム1の全体の流れについて図13を用いて説明し、その後、各装置の主な動作の詳細について図14~図19を用いて説明する。
[Operation]
Subsequently, the operation of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the overall flow of the article management system 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 13, and then the details of the main operation of each apparatus will be described with reference to FIGS.
 <全体動作>
 図13は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の動作を示すシーケンス図である。具体的には、図13は、図4で示したフローチャートに従ってユーザが動作した場合の物品管理システム1の動作を示している。
<Overall operation>
FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 13 shows the operation of the article management system 1 when the user operates according to the flowchart shown in FIG.
 まず、ユーザがカードリーダ60にIDカードをかざすことで、カードリーダ60は、IDカードの接近を検知する(S10)。カードリーダ60は、近接無線通信により、IDカードからカード情報を読み出す。カードリーダ60は、読み出したカード情報を、筐体10を開けようとしている人物を示す人物情報として制御装置20に送信する(S12)。 First, when the user holds the ID card over the card reader 60, the card reader 60 detects the approach of the ID card (S10). The card reader 60 reads card information from the ID card by proximity wireless communication. The card reader 60 transmits the read card information to the control device 20 as person information indicating a person who is trying to open the housing 10 (S12).
 制御装置20は、カードリーダ60から送信された人物情報を、通信部26を介して管理装置30に送信する(S14)。管理装置30は、通信部37を介して人物情報を受信する。 The control device 20 transmits the person information transmitted from the card reader 60 to the management device 30 via the communication unit 26 (S14). The management device 30 receives person information via the communication unit 37.
 管理装置30では、照合部32が、受信した人物情報を用いて照合(個人認証)処理を行う(S16)。具体的には、照合部32は、人物リスト35と、人物情報が示す人物とを照合することで、照合結果を出力する。照合結果は、通信部37を介して制御装置20に送信される(S18)。制御装置20は、通信部26を介して照合結果を受信する。 In the management apparatus 30, the verification unit 32 performs verification (personal authentication) processing using the received personal information (S16). Specifically, the collation unit 32 collates the person list 35 with the person indicated by the person information, and outputs a collation result. The collation result is transmitted to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 (S18). The control device 20 receives the collation result via the communication unit 26.
 制御装置20では、制御部21が、照合結果に基づいて所定の命令を生成する(S20)。具体的には、制御部21の情報処理部23及び錠制御部22は、照合結果が人物の一致を示す場合に、撮影命令及び解錠命令を生成する。なお、照合結果が人物の不一致を示す場合には、情報処理部23は、案内部90に対してエラー報知を行わせる。詳細については、後で説明する。 In the control device 20, the control unit 21 generates a predetermined command based on the collation result (S20). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 and the lock control unit 22 of the control unit 21 generate a shooting command and an unlock command when the collation result indicates that the person matches. Note that when the collation result indicates that the person does not match, the information processing unit 23 causes the guide unit 90 to perform error notification. Details will be described later.
 情報処理部23は、生成した撮影命令を庫内カメラ40に出力する(S22)。庫内カメラ40は、撮影命令を受け取ることで、筐体10の内部を撮影し(S24)、撮影により得られた第1庫内画像を制御装置20に送信する(S26)。 The information processing unit 23 outputs the generated shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S22). Upon receipt of the shooting command, the in-compartment camera 40 photographs the inside of the housing 10 (S24), and transmits the first in-compartment image obtained by the photographing to the control device 20 (S26).
 さらに、制御部21の錠制御部22は、生成した解錠命令をロック機構70に出力する(S28)。本実施の形態では、錠制御部22は、解錠命令として、解錠するための所定の電圧をロック機構70に供給する。なお、解錠命令は、撮影命令と同時に出力してもよい。あるいは、撮影命令は、解錠命令が出力された後に出力されてもよい。 Furthermore, the lock control unit 22 of the control unit 21 outputs the generated unlock command to the lock mechanism 70 (S28). In the present embodiment, the lock control unit 22 supplies a predetermined voltage for unlocking to the lock mechanism 70 as an unlock command. The unlocking command may be output simultaneously with the shooting command. Alternatively, the imaging command may be output after the unlocking command is output.
 ロック機構70は、解錠命令を受けて解錠する(S30)。具体的には、供給される電圧によって駆動部が爪部71aを保持筐体71b内に収納することで、ロック機構70が解錠される。このとき、案内部90は、ロック機構70が解錠されたことを案内してもよい。例えば、表示部91は、LED素子を点灯させてもよい。または、音声出力部92は、ロック機構70が解錠されたことを示す音声案内を出力してもよい。ロック機構70が解錠されることで、ユーザは、扉12を開けることができる。 The lock mechanism 70 is unlocked in response to the unlock command (S30). Specifically, the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked by the drive unit storing the claw portion 71a in the holding housing 71b by the supplied voltage. At this time, the guide unit 90 may guide that the lock mechanism 70 has been unlocked. For example, the display unit 91 may light the LED element. Alternatively, the voice output unit 92 may output voice guidance indicating that the lock mechanism 70 has been unlocked. The user can open the door 12 by unlocking the lock mechanism 70.
 ユーザが扉12を開けることで、開閉センサ80は、扉12が開けられたことを検知する(S32)。図13には示していないが、開閉センサ80は、扉12が開けられたことを示す開信号を制御装置20に送信してもよい。そして、制御装置20では、開信号を受けることで、コードリーダ50を起動させてもよい。これにより、必要なときのみコードリーダ50を起動させ、必要でない場合には電力供給を行わないことで、消費電力を削減することができる。 When the user opens the door 12, the open / close sensor 80 detects that the door 12 has been opened (S32). Although not shown in FIG. 13, the open / close sensor 80 may transmit an open signal indicating that the door 12 has been opened to the control device 20. Then, the control device 20 may activate the code reader 50 by receiving an open signal. As a result, the power consumption can be reduced by starting the code reader 50 only when necessary and not supplying power when it is not necessary.
 コードリーダ50は、物品2の識別表示51を読み取る(S34)。コードリーダ50は、読み取った識別表示51に含まれる識別情報(物品2のシリアルナンバーなど)を制御装置20に出力する(S36)。また、開閉センサ80は、扉12が閉められたことを検知し(S38)、扉12が閉められたことを示す閉信号を制御装置20に送信する(S40)。 The code reader 50 reads the identification display 51 of the article 2 (S34). The code reader 50 outputs the identification information (such as the serial number of the article 2) included in the read identification display 51 to the control device 20 (S36). The open / close sensor 80 detects that the door 12 is closed (S38), and transmits a close signal indicating that the door 12 is closed to the control device 20 (S40).
 なお、コードリーダ50による読み取り(S34)と、開閉センサ80による閉状態の検知(S38)とは、ユーザによる動作を待って行われる。このため、識別表示51をコードリーダ50に読み取らせる動作と、扉12を閉じる動作とのいずれを先に行うかは、ユーザ次第である。 Note that the reading by the code reader 50 (S34) and the detection of the closed state by the open / close sensor 80 (S38) are performed after an operation by the user. For this reason, it is up to the user which of the operation of causing the code reader 50 to read the identification display 51 and the operation of closing the door 12 first.
 制御装置20では、閉信号を受信した後、制御部21が所定の命令を生成する(S42)。具体的には、制御部21の情報処理部23及び錠制御部22は、撮影命令と施錠命令とを生成する。 In the control device 20, after receiving the close signal, the control unit 21 generates a predetermined command (S42). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 and the lock control unit 22 of the control unit 21 generate a shooting command and a locking command.
 情報処理部23は、生成した撮影命令を庫内カメラ40に出力する(S44)。庫内カメラ40は、撮影命令を受け取ることで、筐体10の内部を撮影し(S46)、撮影により得られた第2庫内画像を制御装置20に送信する(S48)。 The information processing unit 23 outputs the generated shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S44). The internal camera 40 receives the imaging command to image the inside of the housing 10 (S46), and transmits the second internal image obtained by the imaging to the control device 20 (S48).
 さらに、錠制御部22は、生成した施錠命令をロック機構70に出力する(S50)。本実施の形態では、錠制御部22は、施錠命令として、ロック機構70への所定の電圧の供給を停止する。なお、施錠命令は、撮影命令と同時に出力してもよい。あるいは、撮影命令は、施錠命令が出力された後に出力されてもよい。 Furthermore, the lock control unit 22 outputs the generated locking command to the lock mechanism 70 (S50). In the present embodiment, the lock control unit 22 stops supplying a predetermined voltage to the lock mechanism 70 as a lock command. Note that the locking command may be output simultaneously with the shooting command. Alternatively, the imaging command may be output after the locking command is output.
 ロック機構70は、施錠命令を受けて施錠する(S52)。具体的には、電圧の供給が停止されて駆動部の動作が停止することで、爪部71aが保持筐体71bから突出する。これにより、爪部71aがメス型鍵72の穴72aに挿入されて、ロック機構70が施錠される。 The lock mechanism 70 is locked in response to the locking command (S52). Specifically, when the supply of voltage is stopped and the operation of the driving unit is stopped, the claw portion 71a protrudes from the holding housing 71b. Thereby, the claw portion 71a is inserted into the hole 72a of the female key 72, and the lock mechanism 70 is locked.
 さらに、制御装置20は、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像(すなわち、第1検知情報)、並びに、識別情報(第2検知情報)を、通信部26を介して管理装置30に送信する(S54)。通信部26は、第1庫内画像、第2庫内画像及び識別情報をまとめて送信しているが、各々が取得される度に管理装置30に送信してもよい。管理装置30では、第1庫内画像、第2庫内画像及び識別情報を、通信部37を介して受信する。 Furthermore, the control device 20 transmits the first image inside the image and the second image inside the image (that is, the first detection information) and the identification information (second detection information) to the management device 30 via the communication unit 26. (S54). The communication unit 26 transmits the first image inside the image, the second image inside the image, and the identification information together. In the management device 30, the first image in the warehouse, the second image in the cabinet, and the identification information are received via the communication unit 37.
 管理装置30では、比較部31が、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像、並びに、識別情報に基づいて比較処理を行う(S56)。具体的には、比較部31は、筐体10の開閉の前後における複数の物品2の増減数である第1個数と、コードリーダ50によって検知された物品2の個数である第2個数との比較を行う。 In the management device 30, the comparison unit 31 performs a comparison process based on the first and second image images and the identification information (S56). Specifically, the comparison unit 31 includes a first number that is an increase / decrease number of the plurality of articles 2 before and after the opening / closing of the housing 10 and a second number that is the number of articles 2 detected by the code reader 50. Make a comparison.
 次に、課金部33は、比較結果に基づいて課金処理を行う(S58)。具体的には、課金部33は、特定された物品2と、物品2の価格とに基づいて課金額を決定し、決定した課金額の決済処理又は引き落とし処理を行う。 Next, the charging unit 33 performs a charging process based on the comparison result (S58). Specifically, the billing unit 33 determines a billing amount based on the identified item 2 and the price of the item 2, and performs a settlement process or a withdrawal process for the determined billing amount.
 さらに、管理装置30では、通信部37を介して、課金情報を制御装置20に送信する(S60)。課金情報は、例えば、課金額を示す情報である。 Furthermore, the management device 30 transmits billing information to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 (S60). The billing information is information indicating a billing amount, for example.
 制御装置20では、制御部21が、課金情報に基づいて音声案内、又は、案内画像を生成する(S62)。生成した音声案内又は案内画像は、案内部90に出力され、案内部90の表示部91又は音声出力部92が音声案内又は案内画像を出力する。 In the control device 20, the control unit 21 generates voice guidance or a guidance image based on the billing information (S62). The generated voice guidance or guidance image is output to the guidance unit 90, and the display unit 91 or voice output unit 92 of the guidance unit 90 outputs the voice guidance or guidance image.
 <制御装置の動作>
 続いて、制御装置20の動作の詳細について図14を用いて説明する。図14は、本実施の形態に係る制御装置20の動作を示すフローチャートである。
<Operation of control device>
Next, details of the operation of the control device 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 20 according to the present embodiment.
 図14に示すように、まず、制御装置20では、人物情報が取得されるまで待機する(S101でNo)。カードリーダ60によって人物情報が取得されて制御装置20に出力された場合(S101でYes)、通信部26は、人物情報を管理装置30に送信する(S102、図13のS14)。図13で示したように、管理装置30では、人物情報に基づいて照合処理(S16)が行われる。 As shown in FIG. 14, first, the control device 20 waits until personal information is acquired (No in S101). When the personal information is acquired by the card reader 60 and output to the control device 20 (Yes in S101), the communication unit 26 transmits the personal information to the management device 30 (S102, S14 in FIG. 13). As shown in FIG. 13, the management device 30 performs a collation process (S16) based on the person information.
 制御装置20は、通信部26が照合成功通知を受信するまで、又は、所定期間が経過するまで待機する(S103でNo、かつ、S114でNo)。ここで、所定期間が経過した(すなわち、タイムアウトとなった)場合、又は、所定期間内に照合失敗通知を受信した場合(S114でYes)、制御装置20は、エラー処理を行う(S117)。エラー処理の詳細については、後で説明する。なお、照合成功通知は、人物が一致したことを示す照合結果である。照合失敗通知は、人物が不一致であったことを示す照合結果である。 The control device 20 waits until the communication unit 26 receives a verification success notification or until a predetermined period elapses (No in S103 and No in S114). Here, when the predetermined period has elapsed (that is, timed out), or when the collation failure notification is received within the predetermined period (Yes in S114), the control device 20 performs error processing (S117). Details of the error processing will be described later. The verification success notification is a verification result indicating that the persons match. The verification failure notification is a verification result indicating that the persons do not match.
 通信部26が照合成功通知を受信した場合(S103でYes)、制御部21は、撮影命令及び解錠命令を生成する(S104、図13のS20)。次に、制御部21の情報処理部23は、撮影命令を庫内カメラ40に送信し(S105、図13のS22)、さらに、錠制御部22は、解錠命令をロック機構70に送信する(S106、図13のS28)。なお、上述したように、撮影命令及び解錠命令の送信は、いずれが先に行われてもよく、同時に行われてもよい。ロック機構70が解錠されるので、ユーザによって筐体10の開閉、及び、物品2の取り出しが行われる。 When the communication unit 26 receives the verification success notification (Yes in S103), the control unit 21 generates a photographing command and an unlocking command (S104, S20 in FIG. 13). Next, the information processing unit 23 of the control unit 21 transmits a shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S105, S22 of FIG. 13), and further, the lock control unit 22 transmits an unlocking command to the lock mechanism 70. (S106, S28 in FIG. 13). Note that, as described above, either the imaging command or the unlocking command may be transmitted first or simultaneously. Since the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked, the user opens / closes the housing 10 and takes out the article 2.
 制御装置20は、識別情報及び閉信号が受信されるまで待機する(S107でNo、かつ、S115でNo)。識別情報及び閉信号の少なくとも一方が受信できないまま所定期間が経過した場合(S115でYes)、制御装置20は、エラー処理を行う(S117)。 The control device 20 waits until the identification information and the closing signal are received (No in S107 and No in S115). When the predetermined period has passed without receiving at least one of the identification information and the closing signal (Yes in S115), the control device 20 performs error processing (S117).
 識別情報及び閉信号が受信された場合(S107でYes)、制御部21は、撮影命令及び施錠命令を生成する(S108、図13のS42)。次に、制御部21の情報処理部23は、撮影命令を庫内カメラ40に送信し(S109、図13のS44)、錠制御部22は、施錠命令をロック機構70に送信する(S110、図13のS50)。 When the identification information and the closing signal are received (Yes in S107), the control unit 21 generates a photographing command and a locking command (S108, S42 in FIG. 13). Next, the information processing unit 23 of the control unit 21 transmits a shooting command to the internal camera 40 (S109, S44 of FIG. 13), and the lock control unit 22 transmits a locking command to the lock mechanism 70 (S110, S50 in FIG. 13).
 次に、通信部26は、第1庫内画像、第2庫内画像及び識別情報を送信する(S111、図13のS54)。なお、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像は、ステップS106及びS108の各々で送信した撮影命令に対する応答として、庫内カメラ40から送信された画像である。図示していないが、撮影命令を送信してから所定期間内に、庫内カメラ40から庫内画像を取得できなかった場合、後述するエラー処理を行う(S117)。 Next, the communication unit 26 transmits the first in-compartment image, the second in-compartment image, and the identification information (S111, S54 in FIG. 13). Note that the first and second internal images are images transmitted from the internal camera 40 as a response to the shooting command transmitted in each of steps S106 and S108. Although not shown, when an in-store image cannot be acquired from the in-store camera 40 within a predetermined period after the shooting command is transmitted, error processing described later is performed (S117).
 制御装置20では、通信部26が課金情報を受信するまで待機する(S112でNo、かつ、S116でNo)。ここで、所定期間が経過した場合、又は、所定期間内にエラー通知を受信した場合(S116でYes)、制御装置20は、エラー処理を行う(S117)。 The control device 20 waits until the communication unit 26 receives the billing information (No in S112 and No in S116). Here, when the predetermined period has elapsed or when an error notification is received within the predetermined period (Yes in S116), the control device 20 performs error processing (S117).
 通信部26が課金情報を受信した場合(S112でYes)、制御部21は、課金情報に基づいて音声案内又は案内画像などの案内情報を生成し、案内部90に出力させる(S113)。以降、制御装置20は、ステップS101に戻り、次の人物情報が取得されるのを待機する。 When the communication unit 26 receives the billing information (Yes in S112), the control unit 21 generates guidance information such as voice guidance or a guidance image based on the billing information, and causes the guidance unit 90 to output the guidance information (S113). Thereafter, the control device 20 returns to step S101 and waits for the next person information to be acquired.
 <エラー処理>
 続いて、図14のステップS117で示すエラー処理について、図15を用いて説明する。図15は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の制御装置20が行うエラー処理を示すフローチャートである。
<Error handling>
Subsequently, the error processing shown in step S117 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing error processing performed by the control device 20 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment.
 図15に示すように、まず、制御装置20は、筐体10が閉じられた状態であるか否かを判定する(S121)。具体的には、情報処理部23は、開閉センサ80から閉信号を受信しているか否かを判定する。 As shown in FIG. 15, first, the control device 20 determines whether or not the housing 10 is in a closed state (S121). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 determines whether a close signal is received from the open / close sensor 80.
 筐体10が閉じられた状態である場合(S121でYes)、錠制御部22は、施錠命令を生成し、ロック機構70に送信する(S122)。以降、錠制御部22は、ロック機構70の施錠状態を維持する。すなわち、錠制御部22は、人物情報などを取得した場合であってもロック機構70の解錠を禁止する。 When the housing 10 is in a closed state (Yes in S121), the lock control unit 22 generates a lock command and transmits it to the lock mechanism 70 (S122). Thereafter, the lock control unit 22 maintains the lock state of the lock mechanism 70. That is, the lock control unit 22 prohibits unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 even when personal information or the like is acquired.
 次に、情報処理部23は、エラーの報知を行う(S123)。具体的には、情報処理部23は、エラーが発生したことを示す案内画像又は音声案内若しくは警告音を生成し、案内部90に出力する。案内部90の表示部91又は音声出力部92が、案内画像又は音声案内若しくは警告音を出力し、筐体10を開けようとした人物に知らせる。また、情報処理部23は、通信部26を介して管理装置30にエラーの発生を通知してもよい。 Next, the information processing unit 23 reports an error (S123). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 generates a guidance image, audio guidance, or warning sound indicating that an error has occurred, and outputs it to the guidance unit 90. The display unit 91 or the voice output unit 92 of the guide unit 90 outputs a guide image, voice guide, or warning sound to notify a person who is about to open the housing 10. Further, the information processing unit 23 may notify the management device 30 of the occurrence of an error via the communication unit 26.
 これにより、一度エラーが発生した場合、以降は、筐体10を開けられなくすることができる。これにより、悪意を持ってエラーを起こした人物から筐体10内の物品2を保護することができる。また、悪意の人物がエラーを起こした場合、筐体10内の物品2に何らかの害が与えられている虞がある。例えば、本物の物品2を偽物に置き換えられている場合などが想定される。この場合に、筐体10を開けられなくすることで、善意の人物が偽物の物品を誤って購入してしまうことを避けることができる。 This makes it impossible to open the housing 10 after an error has occurred once. Thereby, the article 2 in the housing 10 can be protected from a person who has caused an error with malicious intent. Moreover, when a malicious person causes an error, there is a possibility that some harm is given to the article 2 in the housing 10. For example, the case where the real article 2 is replaced with a fake is assumed. In this case, by preventing the case 10 from being opened, it is possible to prevent a bona fide person from purchasing a fake article by mistake.
 筐体10が閉じられていない場合(S121でNo)、錠制御部22は、施錠命令を出力することなく、情報処理部23がエラーの報知を行う(S123)。筐体10が開けられた状態で施錠命令が出力された場合には、筐体10を閉じることができなくなる虞がある。本実施の形態では、筐体10が閉じられている場合にのみ施錠命令を出力することで、筐体10が閉じられた状態を維持することができる。 When the housing 10 is not closed (No in S121), the lock control unit 22 notifies the error by the information processing unit 23 without outputting a locking command (S123). If a locking command is output with the housing 10 opened, the housing 10 may not be closed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to maintain the closed state of the casing 10 by outputting the locking command only when the casing 10 is closed.
 <照合処理(個人認証処理)>
 続いて、管理装置30が行う動作のうち照合処理(個人認証処理)について、図16を用いて説明する。図16は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の管理装置30が行う照合処理を示すフローチャートである。なお、照合処理は、図13に示すステップS16の処理であり、通信部37を介して人物情報を受信した後に行われる。
<Verification processing (personal authentication processing)>
Next, a verification process (personal authentication process) among the operations performed by the management apparatus 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a collation process performed by the management device 30 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. The collation process is the process of step S16 shown in FIG. 13 and is performed after receiving personal information via the communication unit 37.
 図16に示すように、管理装置30では、照合部32が、人物リスト35と人物情報が示す人物とを照合する(S131)。人物情報が示す人物が、人物リスト35に含まれる人物に一致する場合(S132でYes)、照合部32は、人物の一致を示す照合結果を照合成功通知として生成し、出力する(S133)。照合成功通知は、通信部37を介して制御装置20に送信され、かつ、課金部33に出力される。 As shown in FIG. 16, in the management apparatus 30, the collation unit 32 collates the person list 35 with the person indicated by the person information (S131). When the person indicated by the person information matches the person included in the person list 35 (Yes in S132), the matching unit 32 generates and outputs a matching result indicating matching of the person as a matching success notification (S133). The verification success notification is transmitted to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 and is output to the billing unit 33.
 人物情報が示す人物が、人物リスト35に含まれる人物に一致しない場合(S132でNo)、照合部32は、人物の不一致を示す照合結果を照合失敗通知として生成し、出力する(S134)。照合失敗通知は、通信部37を介して制御装置20に送信される。 If the person indicated by the person information does not match the person included in the person list 35 (No in S132), the collation unit 32 generates a collation result indicating a mismatch between the persons as a collation failure notification and outputs the collation failure notification (S134). The verification failure notification is transmitted to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37.
 <識別表示読み取り処理>
 続いて、コードリーダ50による識別表示51の読み取り処理について、図17を用いて説明する。図17は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1のコードリーダ50及び制御装置20が行うコード読み取り処理を示すフローチャートである。なお、コード読み取り処理は、図13に示すステップS34の処理である。
<Identification display reading process>
Next, the reading process of the identification display 51 by the code reader 50 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a code reading process performed by the code reader 50 and the control device 20 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. The code reading process is the process of step S34 shown in FIG.
 図17に示すように、コードリーダ50は、識別表示51の読み取りが行われるまで待機する(S141でNo)。コードリーダ50が識別表示51を読み取った場合(S141でYes)、情報処理部23は、読み取られた識別表示51を取得し、以前に読み取った識別表示と同一であるか否かを判定する(S142)。なお、当該判定を行うため、情報処理部23は、記憶部を備え、以前に読み取った識別表示を記憶している。当該記憶部には、直前に読み取られた識別表示だけ記憶されていてもよく、直前から所定の回数前までに読み取られた複数の識別表示が記憶されていてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 17, the code reader 50 waits until the identification display 51 is read (No in S141). When the code reader 50 reads the identification display 51 (Yes in S141), the information processing unit 23 acquires the read identification display 51 and determines whether or not it is the same as the previously read identification display ( S142). In order to make the determination, the information processing unit 23 includes a storage unit and stores an identification display read before. Only the identification display read immediately before may be memorize | stored in the said memory | storage part, and the some identification display read before the predetermined number of times from immediately before may be memorize | stored.
 読み取った識別表示51が読み取り済みの識別表示と異なる場合(S142でNo)、情報処理部23は、識別表示51に含まれる識別情報を、通信部26を介して管理装置30に送信する(S143)。 When the read identification display 51 is different from the read identification display (No in S142), the information processing unit 23 transmits the identification information included in the identification display 51 to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 26 (S143). ).
 読み取った識別表示51が読み取り済みの識別表示と同一である場合(S142でYes)、情報処理部23は、エラーを報知する(S144)。具体的には、情報処理部23は、警告音、又は、読み取った識別表示51が読み取り済みの識別表示と同一であることを知らせる案内画像もしくは音声案内を生成し、案内部90に出力する。案内部90の表示部91又は音声出力部92が、案内画像又は音声案内を出力することで、ユーザにエラーを知らせることができる。 When the read identification display 51 is the same as the read identification display (Yes in S142), the information processing section 23 reports an error (S144). Specifically, the information processing unit 23 generates a warning sound or a guidance image or voice guidance that informs that the read identification display 51 is the same as the read identification display 51, and outputs it to the guide unit 90. The display unit 91 or the voice output unit 92 of the guide unit 90 can output a guide image or a voice guide to notify the user of an error.
 例えば、ユーザが複数の物品2を一度に取り出した場合、誤って(又は悪意を持って)、ユーザが同じ物品2の識別表示51を2回、コードリーダ50に読み取らせることが想定される。この場合に、ユーザにエラーを報知することで、正しい動作をユーザに促すことができる。 For example, when the user takes out a plurality of articles 2 at a time, it is assumed that the user erroneously (or maliciously) causes the code reader 50 to read the identification display 51 of the same article 2 twice. In this case, by notifying the user of the error, it is possible to prompt the user to perform a correct operation.
 なお、読み取った識別表示51の判定は、情報処理部23ではなく、コードリーダ50が行ってもよい。あるいは、管理装置30が当該判定を行ってもよい。 It should be noted that the determination of the read identification display 51 may be performed by the code reader 50 instead of the information processing unit 23. Alternatively, the management device 30 may make the determination.
 <比較及び課金処理>
 続いて、管理装置30が行う動作のうち比較及び課金処理について、図18を用いて説明する。図18は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の管理装置30が行う比較及び課金処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。なお、比較及び課金処理は、図13に示すステップS56及びS58であり、通信部37を介して第1検知情報(庫内画像)及び第2検知情報(識別情報)を受信した後に行われる。
<Comparison and billing>
Next, comparison and billing processing among the operations performed by the management apparatus 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of comparison and billing processing performed by the management device 30 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. Note that the comparison and billing processes are steps S56 and S58 shown in FIG. 13 and are performed after receiving the first detection information (internal image) and the second detection information (identification information) via the communication unit 37.
 図18に示すように、まず、比較部31は、第1庫内画像と第2庫内画像とに基づいて、物品2の増減数を第1個数として計数する(S151)。具体的には、比較部31は、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像の各々に画像処理を行うことで、各々の画像に含まれる物品2の個数を計数する。 As shown in FIG. 18, first, the comparison unit 31 counts the increase / decrease number of the article 2 as the first number based on the first image in the first box and the second image in the box (S151). Specifically, the comparison unit 31 counts the number of articles 2 included in each image by performing image processing on each of the first and second image images.
 例えば、比較部31は、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像の各々の2値化処理を行う。比較部31は、各画像の画素値に対して、中央値より高い値(例えば、最高値の80%)を閾値として2値化処理を行う。これにより、例えば、白色のマーカー44を画像内で強調することができる。あるいは、マーカー44が青色などの有色である場合には、比較部31は、マーカー44の色(例えば青色)のみを抜き出すことで、マーカー44を画像内で強調することができる。 For example, the comparison unit 31 performs a binarization process for each of the first and second internal images. The comparison unit 31 performs binarization processing on a pixel value of each image with a value higher than the median value (for example, 80% of the maximum value) as a threshold value. Thereby, for example, the white marker 44 can be emphasized in the image. Alternatively, when the marker 44 is colored such as blue, the comparison unit 31 can highlight the marker 44 in the image by extracting only the color of the marker 44 (for example, blue).
 比較部31は、第1庫内画像内において、強調されたマーカー44の個数を計数することで、筐体10が開けられる前の物品2の個数(第1物品数)を取得する。同様に、比較部31は、第2庫内画像内において、強調されたマーカー44の個数を計数することで、筐体10が閉じられた後の物品2の個数(第2物品数)を取得する。比較部31は、第1物品数から第2物品数を減算することで、第1個数を算出する。 The comparison unit 31 obtains the number of articles 2 (first article number) before the housing 10 is opened by counting the number of highlighted markers 44 in the first image inside the cabinet. Similarly, the comparison unit 31 obtains the number of articles 2 (second article number) after the housing 10 is closed by counting the number of highlighted markers 44 in the second internal image. To do. The comparison unit 31 calculates the first number by subtracting the second number of items from the first number of items.
 次に、比較部31は、通信部37が受信した識別情報の個数を第2個数として計数する(S152)。本実施の形態では、識別情報の個数は、コードリーダ50によって読み取られた識別表示51の個数である。識別情報の個数は、正しい手順に則って使用されている限り、ユーザが筐体10から取り出した物品2の個数に一致する。 Next, the comparison unit 31 counts the number of identification information received by the communication unit 37 as a second number (S152). In the present embodiment, the number of identification information is the number of identification displays 51 read by the code reader 50. The number of pieces of identification information matches the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10 by the user as long as it is used according to the correct procedure.
 次に、比較部31は、第1個数と第2個数とを比較する(S153)。第1個数と第2個数とが一致している場合(S153でYes)、課金部33は、識別情報に基づいて課金額を算出する(S154)。具体的には、課金部33は、記憶部34に記憶された価格リスト36を参照することで、対象物品の個々の価格を取得する。課金部33は、対象物品の価格と個数とを乗じ、合算することで、合計金額を課金額として算出する。 Next, the comparison unit 31 compares the first number with the second number (S153). If the first number and the second number match (Yes in S153), the charging unit 33 calculates a charging amount based on the identification information (S154). Specifically, the billing unit 33 refers to the price list 36 stored in the storage unit 34 to acquire individual prices of the target article. The billing unit 33 calculates the total amount as the billing amount by multiplying and adding the price and the number of the target articles.
 第1個数と第2個数とが一致していない場合(S153でNo)、課金部33は、最も高い物品2の価格に、第1個数及び第2個数の大きい方を乗ずることで、課金額を算出する(S155)。第1個数と第2個数とが不一致である場合、悪意者によって何らかの不正が行われたと考えられる。このため、課金部33は、悪意者によって損失を受け得る最高額を、課金額として算出する。 If the first number and the second number do not match (No in S153), the billing unit 33 multiplies the price of the highest article 2 by the larger of the first number and the second number, thereby charging the bill. Is calculated (S155). If the first number and the second number do not match, it is considered that some injustice has been performed by the Service-to-Self. For this reason, the billing unit 33 calculates the maximum amount that can be lost by the Service-to-Self as the billing amount.
 課金額の算出後、課金部33は、課金情報を生成して、通信部37を介して制御装置20に送信する(S156)。 After calculating the billing amount, the billing unit 33 generates billing information and transmits it to the control device 20 via the communication unit 37 (S156).
 なお、図18に示す例では、第1個数と第2個数とが不一致であり、不正の疑いがある場合に、課金部33が最高額を課金する例を示したが、これに限らない。最高額を課金する代わりに、エラー(不正)をユーザに通知してもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 18, the example in which the charging unit 33 charges the maximum amount when the first number and the second number are inconsistent and there is a suspicion of fraud is not limited to this. Instead of charging the maximum amount, an error (illegal) may be notified to the user.
 図19は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1の管理装置30が行う比較及び課金処理の別の一例を示すフローチャートである。図19では、図18と比較して、第1個数と第2個数とが不一致である場合の処理が相違し、その他の処理は同じである。 FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing another example of comparison and charging processing performed by the management apparatus 30 of the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 differs from FIG. 18 in the processing when the first number and the second number do not match, and the other processing is the same.
 図19に示すように、第1個数と第2個数とが一致していない場合(S153でNo)、比較部31は、不一致であることを示す比較結果をエラー通知として、通信部37を介して制御装置20に送信する(S155a)。エラー通知を受信した制御装置20では、図15で示したエラー処理が行われる。 As illustrated in FIG. 19, when the first number and the second number do not match (No in S153), the comparison unit 31 uses the comparison result indicating the mismatch as an error notification via the communication unit 37. To the control device 20 (S155a). The control device 20 that has received the error notification performs the error processing shown in FIG.
 なお、最高額の課金(図18のS155)とエラー通知(図19のS155a)との両方を行ってもよい。 Note that both the maximum charge (S155 in FIG. 18) and the error notification (S155a in FIG. 19) may be performed.
 [効果など]
 以上のように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1は、開閉可能な筐体10の内部に収納される複数の物品2を、筐体10の内部で検知する第1検知部(例えば、庫内カメラ40)と、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つである対象物品を、筐体10の外部で検知する第2検知部(例えば、コードリーダ50)とを備えている。また、物品管理システム1は、第1検知部による検知結果を示す第1検知情報、及び、第2検知部による検知結果を示す第2検知情報を出力する出力部(例えば、通信部26)を備える。
[Effects, etc.]
As described above, the article management system 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to detect the plurality of articles 2 housed in the openable / closable casing 10 in the casing 10 (for example, The camera 40) and a second detection unit (for example, a code reader 50) that detects a target article that is at least one of the plurality of articles 2 outside the housing 10 are provided. Further, the article management system 1 includes an output unit (for example, the communication unit 26) that outputs first detection information indicating a detection result by the first detection unit and second detection information indicating a detection result by the second detection unit. Prepare.
 これにより、筐体10に収納された複数の物品2の筐体10の内部での検知結果を示す第1検知情報と、筐体10の外部での検知結果を示す第2検知情報とを出力するので、2つの情報に基づいた比較を行うことで、物品2の筐体10の内外での状態を把握することができる。したがって、例えば、物品管理システム1によれば、物品2が筐体10から取り出されたか否か、筐体10内に何個の物品2が収納されているかなどを管理することができる。 As a result, the first detection information indicating the detection results inside the casing 10 of the plurality of articles 2 housed in the casing 10 and the second detection information indicating the detection results outside the casing 10 are output. Therefore, by performing the comparison based on the two pieces of information, the state of the article 2 inside and outside the casing 10 can be grasped. Therefore, for example, according to the article management system 1, it is possible to manage whether or not the article 2 is taken out from the casing 10, how many articles 2 are stored in the casing 10, and the like.
 このとき、例えば、第1検知部の一例である庫内カメラ40及び第2検知部の一例であるコードリーダ50を筐体10に取り付ければよく、専用の筐体10を必要としない。したがって、本実施の形態によれば、簡単な構成で複数の物品2を管理することができる汎用性の高い物品管理システム1を提供することができる。 At this time, for example, the internal camera 40, which is an example of the first detection unit, and the code reader 50, which is an example of the second detection unit, may be attached to the case 10, and the dedicated case 10 is not required. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a highly versatile article management system 1 that can manage a plurality of articles 2 with a simple configuration.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、第1検知情報と第2検知情報とに基づいて、筐体10の開閉の前後における複数の物品2の増減数である第1個数と筐体10の外部で第2検知部によって検知された物品2の個数である第2個数との比較を行う比較部31を備える。 Further, for example, the article management system 1 further includes the first number and the casing 10 which are the increase / decrease numbers of the plurality of articles 2 before and after the opening and closing of the casing 10 based on the first detection information and the second detection information. The comparison part 31 which compares with the 2nd number which is the number of the articles | goods 2 detected by the 2nd detection part outside is provided.
 これにより、第1個数と第2個数とを比較することで、物品2の取り出しが正しく行われているかを確認することができる。したがって、物品2の管理を厳重にすることができる。 Thereby, by comparing the first number and the second number, it is possible to confirm whether the article 2 is correctly taken out. Therefore, the management of the article 2 can be made strict.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、筐体10を開ける人物を示す人物情報を取得する取得部(例えば、カードリーダ60)を備え、通信部26は、さらに、人物情報を出力する。 Further, for example, the article management system 1 further includes an acquisition unit (for example, a card reader 60) that acquires person information indicating a person who opens the housing 10, and the communication unit 26 further outputs the person information.
 これにより、人物情報を取得することで、筐体10の開閉を行う人物を特定することができる。したがって、例えば、特定できた人物のみが筐体10の開閉を行うことができ、不特定の人物に筐体10を開けることができなくすることができる。このように、物品2の管理をより厳重にすることができる。 Thereby, the person who opens and closes the housing 10 can be specified by acquiring the person information. Therefore, for example, only the specified person can open and close the casing 10, and the casing 10 cannot be opened to an unspecified person. In this way, the management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、予め登録された1以上の人物を示す人物リスト35と、人物情報が示す人物とを照合し、人物の一致又は不一致を示す照合結果を出力する照合部32を備える。 In addition, for example, the article management system 1 further collates a person list 35 indicating one or more persons registered in advance with a person indicated by the person information, and outputs a collation result indicating matching or mismatching of the persons. The unit 32 is provided.
 これにより、筐体10の開閉を許可する人物を予め人物リスト35に登録しておくことで、登録された人物以外は筐体10を開けることができなくすることができる。よって、物品2の管理をより厳重にすることができる。 Thus, by registering in advance the person who is permitted to open and close the casing 10 in the person list 35, it is possible to make it impossible for anyone other than the registered persons to open the casing 10. Therefore, management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、筐体10の開閉を制限するロック機構70と、ロック機構70を制御する錠制御部22とを備え、錠制御部22は、照合結果が人物の一致を示す場合に、ロック機構70を解錠する。 In addition, for example, the article management system 1 further includes a lock mechanism 70 that restricts opening and closing of the housing 10 and a lock control unit 22 that controls the lock mechanism 70. When the match is indicated, the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked.
 これにより、筐体10の開閉を制限することができるので、物品2の管理をより厳重にすることができる。 Thereby, the opening and closing of the housing 10 can be restricted, so that the management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、人物情報が示す人物に、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つの対価を課金する課金部33を備える。 Further, for example, the article management system 1 further includes a billing unit 33 that charges at least one consideration of the plurality of articles 2 to the person indicated by the person information.
 これにより、取り出した物品2の対価を要求することができる。つまり、物品管理システム1を自動販売システムとして利用することができる。 This makes it possible to request the price of the item 2 taken out. That is, the article management system 1 can be used as an automatic sales system.
 また、例えば、課金部33は、比較部31による比較結果が第1個数と第2個数との一致を示す場合に、対象物品の対価を課金する。 Also, for example, the billing unit 33 charges the price of the target article when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a match between the first number and the second number.
 これにより、第1個数と第2個数とを比較することで、物品2の取り出し行為が正当であることを確認することができる。この確認を行った上で正当な対価を課金するので、課金の誤りの発生を抑制することができる。 Thus, by comparing the first number and the second number, it is possible to confirm that the act of taking out the article 2 is valid. Since a valid price is charged after this confirmation, the occurrence of a charging error can be suppressed.
 また、例えば、課金部33は、比較部31による比較結果が第1個数と第2個数との不一致を示す場合に、複数の物品2のうち最も価格が高い物品の価格に、第1個数と第2個数とのうち大きい方の個数を乗じた値を、対価として課金する。 Further, for example, when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number, the billing unit 33 sets the first number to the price of the highest priced item among the plurality of items 2. A value obtained by multiplying the larger number of the second number is charged as a consideration.
 これにより、第1個数と第2個数とが一致しない場合、何らかの不正が行われたことが想定される。例えば、悪意者が高い物品2と安い物品2とを筐体10から取り出したにも関わらず、安い物品2のみを取り出したと見せかけることが考えられる。この場合に、悪意者に対して、筐体10に収納された複数の物品2のうち最高額の物品2を2個取り出したとみなして課金することができるので、物品2の管理者にとって損失が生じない。また、悪意者には、取り出した物品2の実際の課金額以上の額が課金される。このため、悪意者にとって、罰金効果が発生し、抑止力にもなる。したがって、結果として、物品2の管理をより厳重にすることができる。 Thus, if the first number and the second number do not match, it is assumed that some fraud has occurred. For example, it is conceivable that the Service-to-Self pretends that only the cheap article 2 has been taken out even though the article 2 with high price and the cheap article 2 have been taken out from the housing 10. In this case, since it is possible to charge the Service-to-Self as if the two highest-priced articles 2 were taken out of the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10, there is a loss for the manager of the articles 2. Does not occur. In addition, the Service-to-Self are charged an amount that is greater than or equal to the actual charge amount of the extracted item 2. For this reason, for the Service-to-Self, a fine effect occurs and it also becomes a deterrent. Therefore, as a result, the management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、比較部31による比較結果が第1個数と第2個数との不一致を示す場合に、人物に報知する報知部(例えば、案内部90)を備えてもよい。 In addition, for example, the article management system 1 further includes a notification unit (for example, a guide unit 90) that notifies a person when the comparison result by the comparison unit 31 indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number. Also good.
 これにより、物品2を取り出した人物に知らせることができる。当該人物が善意者であり、手順を誤った場合は正しい手順で行わせることができる。また、当該人物が悪意者である場合には、筐体10の周囲に居る他の人物などにも知らせることができるので、悪意者への抑止力になる。したがって、結果として、物品2の管理をより厳重にすることができる。 This makes it possible to notify the person who has taken out the article 2. If the person is a Service-to-Other person and the procedure is incorrect, the correct procedure can be performed. In addition, when the person is a Service-to-Self, it can be notified to other persons around the case 10, so that it becomes a deterrent to the Service-to-Self. Therefore, as a result, the management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
 また、例えば、第1検知部は、筐体10の内部を撮影する1以上のカメラ(具体的には、庫内カメラ40)である。 Further, for example, the first detection unit is one or more cameras (specifically, the internal camera 40) that captures the inside of the housing 10.
 これにより、カメラを筐体10の内部を撮影できる箇所に取り付ければよいので、筐体10に収納された複数の物品2を簡単に検知することができる。 Thereby, since the camera may be attached to a location where the inside of the housing 10 can be photographed, a plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10 can be easily detected.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、筐体10の内部で、かつ、1以上の庫内カメラ40の撮影範囲41内に配置され、撮影範囲41の死角を映す鏡42を備えてもよい。 In addition, for example, the article management system 1 further includes a mirror 42 that is disposed inside the housing 10 and within the imaging range 41 of one or more in-house cameras 40 and reflects the blind spot of the imaging range 41. Good.
 これにより、カメラの死角に存在する物品2が鏡42に映るので、より多くの物品2を1台のカメラで検出することができる。例えば、カメラを駆動する雲台などを設ける場合に比べて、簡易な構成で、カメラの死角に位置する物品2を検出することができる。 Thereby, since the articles 2 existing in the blind spot of the camera are reflected in the mirror 42, more articles 2 can be detected by one camera. For example, the article 2 located at the blind spot of the camera can be detected with a simple configuration as compared with the case where a pan head or the like for driving the camera is provided.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、複数の物品2の各々に付された、所定色若しくは所定形状のマーカー44又は反射材を備えてもよい。 Further, for example, the article management system 1 may further include a marker 44 or a reflector having a predetermined color or a predetermined shape attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
 これにより、例えば、2値化処理などの画像処理によってマーカー44を強調することができるので、物品2の個数の計数を容易に行うことができる。したがって、計数の誤り(例えば、計数の漏れ又は重複)の発生を抑制することができるので、物品2の管理の精度を高めることができる。 Thereby, for example, since the marker 44 can be emphasized by image processing such as binarization processing, the number of articles 2 can be easily counted. Therefore, since the occurrence of counting errors (for example, counting omissions or duplications) can be suppressed, the accuracy of management of the article 2 can be increased.
 また、例えば、庫内カメラ40は、筐体10が開けられる前、又は、筐体10が開けられた直後に筐体10の内部を撮影することで、第1庫内画像を生成し、筐体10が閉じられた後に筐体10の内部を撮影することで、第2庫内画像を生成し、通信部26は、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像を第1検知情報として出力し、比較部31は、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像の各々を画像処理することで、第1個数を計数する。 In addition, for example, the in-compartment camera 40 generates a first in-compartment image by photographing the inside of the housing 10 before the housing 10 is opened or immediately after the housing 10 is opened. The second interior image is generated by photographing the inside of the housing 10 after the body 10 is closed, and the communication unit 26 outputs the first interior image and the second interior image as the first detection information. And the comparison part 31 counts a 1st number by image-processing each of the 1st image in a container and the 2nd image in a container.
 これにより、筐体10が開けられる前又は直後と、筐体10が閉じられた後との各々で撮影された2枚の画像を利用するので、筐体10の開閉の前後における物品2の増減数を容易に計数することができる。したがって、計数の誤りの発生を抑制することができるので、物品2の管理の精度を高めることができる。 As a result, since two images taken before and after the case 10 is opened and after the case 10 is closed are used, the number of articles 2 before and after the case 10 is opened and closed is increased or decreased. Numbers can be counted easily. Therefore, since the occurrence of counting errors can be suppressed, the accuracy of management of the article 2 can be increased.
 また、例えば、第2検知部は、複数の物品2の各々に付された識別表示51を読み取るコードリーダ50である。 For example, the second detection unit is a code reader 50 that reads the identification display 51 attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
 これにより、コードリーダ50を筐体10の外側面又はその近傍に取り付ければよいので、筐体10から取り出された物品2を簡単に検知することができる。 Thereby, since the code reader 50 may be attached to the outer surface of the housing 10 or in the vicinity thereof, the article 2 taken out from the housing 10 can be easily detected.
 また、例えば、識別表示51は、バーコード又は二次元コードである。 Also, for example, the identification display 51 is a bar code or a two-dimensional code.
 これにより、バーコードリーダ又はカメラなどを利用して、簡単に識別表示51を読み取ることができる。 Thereby, the identification display 51 can be easily read using a barcode reader or a camera.
 また、例えば、第2検知部は、対象物品が筐体10の内部に収納された姿勢と同じ姿勢である場合に、対象物品に付された識別表示51を読み取り可能となるような検知範囲53を有する。 Further, for example, when the target article is in the same posture as the posture in which the target article is housed in the housing 10, the detection range 53 is such that the identification display 51 attached to the target article can be read. Have
 これにより、収納時の姿勢を保ったまま、物品2の識別表示51をコードリーダ50に読み取らせることができる。例えば、物品2が弁当である場合に、弁当を傾けなくてもよくなるので、具材の散らばり及び汁のこぼれなどを抑制することができる。 This enables the code reader 50 to read the identification display 51 of the article 2 while maintaining the posture during storage. For example, when the article 2 is a lunch box, it is not necessary to incline the lunch box, so that scattering of ingredients and spilling of juice can be suppressed.
 また、例えば、識別表示51は、付された物品に固有の情報であり、物品管理システム1は、さらに、コードリーダ50が同一の識別表示を複数回読み取った場合に、人物に報知する報知部(例えば、案内部90)を備える。 Further, for example, the identification display 51 is information unique to the attached article, and the article management system 1 further notifies the person when the code reader 50 reads the same identification display a plurality of times. (For example, a guide unit 90).
 これにより、例えば、筐体10から複数の物品2を取り出した場合に、1つの物品2の識別表示51を誤って又は悪意を持って複数回読み込ませた場合に、当該人物に知らせることができる。したがって、善意者が誤って行った場合には、誤りを気づかせることができる。また、悪意者が悪意を持って行った場合には、筐体10の周囲に居る他の人物に不正使用を知らせることができる。よって、結果として、物品2の管理をより厳重に行うことができる。 Thus, for example, when a plurality of articles 2 are taken out from the housing 10, the person can be informed when the identification display 51 of one article 2 is erroneously or maliciously read a plurality of times. . Therefore, when a Service-to-Other person makes a mistake, it is possible to make an error notice. In addition, when the Service-to-Self performs maliciously, it is possible to notify other people around the case 10 of unauthorized use. Therefore, as a result, the article 2 can be managed more strictly.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、筐体10を開ける人物に対象物品を案内する案内部90を備える。 For example, the article management system 1 further includes a guide unit 90 that guides the target article to the person who opens the housing 10.
 これにより、ユーザに推奨される物品などを案内することができるので、ユーザの利便性を高めることができる。 This makes it possible to guide articles recommended to the user, thereby improving user convenience.
 また、例えば、案内部90は、対象物品の収納位置を案内する案内情報を表示する表示部91を有する。 For example, the guide unit 90 includes a display unit 91 that displays guide information for guiding the storage position of the target article.
 これにより、視覚的に分かりやすくなって、物品管理システム1のユーザビリティを高めることができる。また、案内情報を表示することで、聴覚異常者などでも物品管理システム1を利用することができる。よって、ユーザアクセシビリティの高い物品管理システム1を実現することができる。 This makes it easier to understand visually and improves the usability of the article management system 1. Further, by displaying the guidance information, the article management system 1 can be used even by a hearing-impaired person or the like. Therefore, the article management system 1 with high user accessibility can be realized.
 また、例えば、案内部90は、対象物品の収納位置を案内する案内情報を音声として出力する音声出力部92を有する。 Also, for example, the guide unit 90 includes a voice output unit 92 that outputs guidance information for guiding the storage position of the target article as a voice.
 これにより、案内情報を音声として出力することで、弱視者又は色覚異常者などでも物品管理システム1を利用することができる。よって、ユーザアクセシビリティの高い物品管理システム1を実現することができる。 Thus, the article management system 1 can be used even by a low vision person or a color blind person by outputting the guidance information as sound. Therefore, the article management system 1 with high user accessibility can be realized.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、通信部26を備える制御装置20と、比較部31を備える管理装置30とを備え、通信部26は、無線通信又は有線通信により、第1検知情報及び第2検知情報を管理装置30に送信することで、第1検知情報及び第2検知情報を比較部31に出力する。 Further, for example, the article management system 1 includes the control device 20 including the communication unit 26 and the management device 30 including the comparison unit 31, and the communication unit 26 transmits the first detection information and the first information by wireless communication or wired communication. By transmitting the two detection information to the management device 30, the first detection information and the second detection information are output to the comparison unit 31.
 これにより、例えば、制御装置20を筐体10に取り付け、管理装置30を筐体10とは離れた遠隔地に配置することができる。人物リスト35及び価格リスト36などを管理装置30が管理することで、悪意者による改竄などを抑制することができる。よって、物品2の管理をより厳重にすることができる。 Thereby, for example, the control device 20 can be attached to the housing 10 and the management device 30 can be arranged in a remote place away from the housing 10. The management device 30 manages the person list 35, the price list 36, and the like, so that falsification by a Service-to-Self can be suppressed. Therefore, management of the article 2 can be made more strict.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム1は、さらに、筐体10を備える。 For example, the article management system 1 further includes a housing 10.
 これにより、例えば、収納する物品2に合わせて専用の筐体10を利用することもできる。専用の筐体10を利用するため、汎用性が低くなるものの、物品2に合った厳重な管理を行うことができる。 Thus, for example, a dedicated housing 10 can be used according to the article 2 to be stored. Since the dedicated housing 10 is used, versatility is lowered, but strict management suitable for the article 2 can be performed.
 (第1の実施の形態の変形例)
 以下では、第1の実施の形態の複数の変形例について説明する。なお、以下の変形例では、第1の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点の説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Modification of the first embodiment)
Below, the some modification of 1st Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that in the following modification examples, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and description of common points will be omitted or simplified.
 [第1の変形例]
 まず、第1の実施の形態の第1の変形例について、図20を用いて説明する。図20は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの筐体10aの断面図である。図20に示す筐体10aの構成は、第1の実施の形態に係る筐体10の構成と略同じであり、2つの棚材13の代わりに、2つの棚材13a及び13bを備える点が相違する。
[First Modification]
First, a first modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the housing 10a of the article management system according to this modification. The configuration of the housing 10a illustrated in FIG. 20 is substantially the same as the configuration of the housing 10 according to the first embodiment, and includes two shelf members 13a and 13b instead of the two shelf members 13. Is different.
 棚材13a及び13bはそれぞれ、第1の実施の形態に係る棚材13と同様に、本体部11内の収納空間11aを複数の部分空間に区分するための仕切部材の一例である。棚材13a及び13bは、平板又は平網を用いて形成されている。 The shelf members 13a and 13b are examples of partition members for dividing the storage space 11a in the main body 11 into a plurality of partial spaces, like the shelf member 13 according to the first embodiment. The shelf members 13a and 13b are formed using a flat plate or a flat net.
 図20に示すように、棚材13aは、棚材13bより上段側に配置されている。なお、図20には示していないが、庫内カメラ40は、第1の実施の形態と同様に、本体部11の内壁の上隅に取り付けられている。つまり、棚材13aは、棚材13bより庫内カメラ40に近い位置に配置されている。 As shown in FIG. 20, the shelf member 13a is arranged on the upper side of the shelf member 13b. Although not shown in FIG. 20, the in-compartment camera 40 is attached to the upper corner of the inner wall of the main body unit 11 as in the first embodiment. That is, the shelf member 13a is arranged at a position closer to the in-compartment camera 40 than the shelf member 13b.
 棚材13aと棚材13bとでは、奥行き方向の長さが異なっている。具体的には、図20に示すように、棚材13aの奥行き方向の長さL1は、棚材13bの奥行き方向の長さL2より短い。このため、上段の棚材13a上に配置される弁当2aは、収納空間11aの奥側に配置され、下段の本体部11の床面上に配置される弁当2cは、収納空間11aの手前側に配置することができる。つまり、弁当2a~2cを上方から見た場合に、一部又は全部が重ならないように配置することができる。 The length in the depth direction is different between the shelf material 13a and the shelf material 13b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the length L1 of the shelf 13a in the depth direction is shorter than the length L2 of the shelf 13b in the depth direction. Therefore, the lunch box 2a disposed on the upper shelf 13a is disposed on the back side of the storage space 11a, and the lunch box 2c disposed on the floor surface of the lower body portion 11 is disposed on the front side of the storage space 11a. Can be arranged. That is, when the lunch boxes 2a to 2c are viewed from above, the lunch boxes 2a to 2c can be arranged so that part or all of them do not overlap.
 これにより、庫内カメラ40によって上方から収納空間11aを撮影した場合、撮影画像内で弁当2a~2c(複数の物品2)が重ならないようにすることができる。したがって、画像処理によって弁当2a~2c(複数の物品2)の個数を計数するのが容易になり、計数誤差などの発生を抑制することができる。 Thus, when the storage space 11a is photographed from above by the internal camera 40, the lunch boxes 2a to 2c (a plurality of articles 2) can be prevented from overlapping in the photographed image. Therefore, it is easy to count the number of lunch boxes 2a to 2c (a plurality of articles 2) by image processing, and the occurrence of counting errors and the like can be suppressed.
 [第2の変形例]
 続いて、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例について、図21~図24を用いて説明する。第1の実施の形態では、第1検知部の一例として庫内カメラ40を示したが、本変形例では、第1検知部の一例として、着脱式のセンサを用いる例を説明する。
[Second Modification]
Subsequently, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the internal camera 40 is shown as an example of the first detection unit, but in this modification, an example in which a detachable sensor is used as an example of the first detection unit will be described.
 <庫内センサユニット>
 図21は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの庫内センサユニット140の斜視図である。図22は、本変形例に係る庫内センサユニット140の着脱式センサ143の斜視図である。図23は、本変形例に係る庫内センサユニット140に複数の物品2が取り付けられた状態を示す図である。図24は、本変形例に係る着脱式センサ143から物品2を取り外す様子を示す図である。
<Inside chamber sensor unit>
FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit 140 of the article management system according to this modification. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor 143 of the in-compartment sensor unit 140 according to this modification. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a state in which a plurality of articles 2 are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 140 according to this modification. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the article 2 is detached from the detachable sensor 143 according to the present modification.
 本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、庫内カメラ40の代わりに、図21に示す庫内センサユニット140を、第1検知部の一例として備える。庫内センサユニット140は、支持板141と、複数の電極部142と、複数の着脱式センサ143と、複数の配線144とを有する。 The article management system according to the present modification includes an in-compartment sensor unit 140 shown in FIG. 21 as an example of the first detection unit instead of the in-compartment camera 40. The in-compartment sensor unit 140 includes a support plate 141, a plurality of electrode portions 142, a plurality of detachable sensors 143, and a plurality of wirings 144.
 支持板141は、複数の着脱式センサ143を支持する。図21に示すように、支持板141には、複数の電極部142が設けられており、電極部142に対応付けて着脱式センサ143が支持される。 The support plate 141 supports a plurality of detachable sensors 143. As shown in FIG. 21, the support plate 141 is provided with a plurality of electrode portions 142, and the removable sensor 143 is supported in association with the electrode portions 142.
 支持板141は、例えば、平面視形状が略矩形の平板であり、筐体10の内部に配置される。具体的には、図23に示すように、支持板141は、本体部11の奥の内側面に平行になるように、本体部11の床面に対して垂直に立てて固定される。 The support plate 141 is, for example, a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and is disposed inside the housing 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23, the support plate 141 is fixed in an upright manner with respect to the floor surface of the main body 11 so as to be parallel to the inner surface of the back of the main body 11.
 複数の電極部142は、対応する着脱式センサ143に電圧を印加するための電極である。また、電極部142は、着脱式センサ143の検知信号(通電時の電流)を検知するための検知電極としても機能する。図23に示すように、複数の電極部142はそれぞれ、配線144に接続されている。配線144は、検知信号を制御装置20に送信するための導電線であり、制御装置20に接続される。 The plurality of electrode portions 142 are electrodes for applying a voltage to the corresponding detachable sensor 143. The electrode part 142 also functions as a detection electrode for detecting a detection signal (current during energization) of the detachable sensor 143. As shown in FIG. 23, each of the plurality of electrode portions 142 is connected to the wiring 144. The wiring 144 is a conductive wire for transmitting a detection signal to the control device 20 and is connected to the control device 20.
 なお、複数の配線144は、例えば、まとめられて1つのコネクタ(図示せず)に接続されている。筐体10の内部に、制御装置20と接続されたケーブルの端部が露出しており、当該端部に配線144のコネクタが接続される。これにより、庫内センサユニット140を容易に筐体10内に取り付けることができる。すなわち、複数の着脱式センサ143の各々と制御装置20との接続を行わなくてもよい。 The plurality of wirings 144 are collectively connected to one connector (not shown), for example. The end of the cable connected to the control device 20 is exposed inside the housing 10, and the connector of the wiring 144 is connected to the end. Thereby, the in-compartment sensor unit 140 can be easily installed in the housing 10. That is, it is not necessary to connect each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 to the control device 20.
 本実施の形態では、図21に示すように、着脱式センサ143よりも多くの個数の電極部142が支持板141に設けられている。これにより、複数の電極部142の中から、物品2の大きさ、形状及び配置などに合わせて、1つの電極部142を選択し、選択した電極部142に、物品2に取り付けられた着脱式センサ143を接触させて固定することができる。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a larger number of electrode portions 142 than the detachable sensor 143 are provided on the support plate 141. Thereby, one electrode part 142 is selected from the plurality of electrode parts 142 in accordance with the size, shape, arrangement, and the like of the article 2, and the removable electrode attached to the article 2 to the selected electrode part 142. The sensor 143 can be contacted and fixed.
 例えば、複数の物品2は、図23に示すように、互いに積み重ねて配置されている。複数の着脱式センサ143はそれぞれ、複数の物品2の端部を挟持している。複数の着脱式センサ143はそれぞれ、物品2の高さに応じた位置に位置する電極部142に接触するように支持板141に固定されている。 For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the plurality of articles 2 are stacked on top of each other. Each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 sandwiches the ends of the plurality of articles 2. Each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 is fixed to the support plate 141 so as to be in contact with the electrode part 142 located at a position corresponding to the height of the article 2.
 複数の着脱式センサ143は、複数の物品2の各々に着脱自在に取り付けられるセンサである。図22及び図24に示すように、着脱式センサ143は、クリップ式のセンサである。具体的には、着脱式センサ143は、クリップ本体143aと、挟持部143bと、導電部143cと、ガイド部143dとを有する。着脱式センサ143は、挟持部143bが互いに接触した場合に通電することで、対応する物品2の脱離を検知する。 The plurality of detachable sensors 143 are sensors that are detachably attached to each of the plurality of articles 2. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, the detachable sensor 143 is a clip-type sensor. Specifically, the detachable sensor 143 includes a clip body 143a, a sandwiching part 143b, a conductive part 143c, and a guide part 143d. The detachable sensor 143 detects the detachment of the corresponding article 2 by energizing when the holding portions 143b come into contact with each other.
 クリップ本体143aは、略三角柱の側面に沿った形状を有し、一辺に設けられた挟持部143bが接触している。クリップ本体143aは、弾性を有し、力が加えられた場合に弾性変形する。具体的には、挟持部143bの間に物体が挿入された場合に、クリップ本体143aは弾性変形する。クリップ本体143aは、例えば、樹脂材料などの絶縁性材料を用いて形成されている。 The clip main body 143a has a shape substantially along the side surface of the triangular prism, and a clamping portion 143b provided on one side is in contact. The clip body 143a has elasticity and elastically deforms when a force is applied. Specifically, when an object is inserted between the holding portions 143b, the clip body 143a is elastically deformed. The clip body 143a is formed using, for example, an insulating material such as a resin material.
 挟持部143bは、対応する物品2の少なくとも一部を挟持する。挟持部143bは、金属などの導電性材料を用いて形成されている。 The clamping part 143b clamps at least a part of the corresponding article 2. The sandwiching portion 143b is formed using a conductive material such as metal.
 導電部143cは、挟持部143bと電気的に接続されている。導電部143cは、着脱式センサ143が支持板141に取り付けられた場合に、電極部142に接触する。挟持部143bが互いに接触したとき、導電部143cを介して電極部142に電流が流れる。 The conductive portion 143c is electrically connected to the sandwiching portion 143b. The conductive portion 143c contacts the electrode portion 142 when the detachable sensor 143 is attached to the support plate 141. When the holding portions 143b come into contact with each other, a current flows through the electrode portion 142 through the conductive portion 143c.
 ガイド部143dは、クリップ本体143aの一部であり、挟持部143bより先端側に位置する部分である。ガイド部143dは、挟持部143bから離れる程、互いに離れるように形成されている。これにより、物品2をガイド部143dに沿って挿入することで、容易に挟持部143bに挟持させることができる。 The guide part 143d is a part of the clip main body 143a, and is a part located on the tip side from the sandwiching part 143b. The guide parts 143d are formed so as to be separated from each other as they are separated from the holding part 143b. Thereby, the article 2 can be easily held by the holding part 143b by inserting it along the guide part 143d.
 複数の着脱式センサ143の各々は、対応する電極部142に接触するように支持板141に固定される。例えば、着脱式センサ143は、支持板141に対してネジ止めされていてもよく、あるいは、接着シートで支持板141に接着されていてもよい。あるいは、着脱式センサ143又は支持板141が磁性体であり、着脱式センサ143は、磁力によって支持板141に固定されていてもよい。 Each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 is fixed to the support plate 141 so as to contact the corresponding electrode part 142. For example, the detachable sensor 143 may be screwed to the support plate 141 or may be bonded to the support plate 141 with an adhesive sheet. Alternatively, the detachable sensor 143 or the support plate 141 may be a magnetic body, and the detachable sensor 143 may be fixed to the support plate 141 by a magnetic force.
 本変形例では、図24に示すように、挟持部143bの間に物品2が挿入された場合、クリップ本体143aが弾性変形することで、物品2を挟むように挟持部143bに付勢力がかかる。物品2が絶縁性の材料を用いて形成されている場合に、挟持部143bは互いに接触せずに絶縁されている。このため、挟持部143bを介して電流は流れない。 In the present modification, as shown in FIG. 24, when the article 2 is inserted between the sandwiching portions 143b, the clip body 143a is elastically deformed to apply an urging force to the sandwiching portion 143b so as to sandwich the article 2. . When the article 2 is formed using an insulating material, the holding portions 143b are insulated without being in contact with each other. For this reason, no current flows through the sandwiching portion 143b.
 一方で、物品2が取り出された場合には、挟持部143bが接触する。このとき、導電部143c及び電極部142を介して挟持部143bには電圧が印加されているので、挟持部143bが通電する。挟持部143bを流れる電流が、導電部143c、電極部142及び配線144を介して、検知信号として制御装置20に出力される。 On the other hand, when the article 2 is taken out, the clamping part 143b comes into contact. At this time, since a voltage is applied to the clamping part 143b via the conductive part 143c and the electrode part 142, the clamping part 143b is energized. The current flowing through the sandwiching portion 143b is output to the control device 20 as a detection signal through the conductive portion 143c, the electrode portion 142, and the wiring 144.
 <動作>
 ここで、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作について、図25及び図26を用いて説明する。
<Operation>
Here, the operation of the article management system according to this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG.
 図25は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。図25に示すように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、図13に示す第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムと比較して、庫内カメラ40の代わりに、着脱式センサ143を備える。なお、図25では、着脱式センサ143を1つのみ図示しているが、図21~図24で示したように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、複数の着脱式センサ143を備える。 FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 25, the article management system according to the present modification includes a detachable sensor 143 instead of the internal camera 40, as compared with the article management system according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. Prepare. In FIG. 25, only one detachable sensor 143 is shown. However, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the article management system according to this modification includes a plurality of detachable sensors 143.
 本変形例では、第1の実施の形態と比較して、制御装置20が撮影命令を生成しない点が相違する。図25に示すように、制御装置20では、照合結果が人物の一致を示す場合(すなわち、個人認証が成功した場合)、錠制御部22が解錠命令を生成する(S20a)。錠制御部22は、解錠命令をロック機構70に出力し(S28)、ロック機構70が解除される(S30)。 This modification is different from the first embodiment in that the control device 20 does not generate a shooting command. As shown in FIG. 25, in the control device 20, when the collation result indicates that the person matches (that is, when the personal authentication is successful), the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S20a). The lock control unit 22 outputs an unlock command to the lock mechanism 70 (S28), and the lock mechanism 70 is released (S30).
 その後、ユーザによって物品2が取り出された場合、着脱式センサ143は、物品2の取り出しを検知する(S33a)。具体的には、物品2を取り出すことで、図24で示したように、挟持部143bが互いに接触して通電する。着脱式センサ143は、電極部142及び配線144に流れる電流を検知信号として、制御装置20に出力する(S33b)。 Thereafter, when the article 2 is taken out by the user, the detachable sensor 143 detects the take-out of the article 2 (S33a). Specifically, when the article 2 is taken out, as shown in FIG. 24, the sandwiching portions 143b come into contact with each other and are energized. The detachable sensor 143 outputs the current flowing through the electrode portion 142 and the wiring 144 as a detection signal to the control device 20 (S33b).
 なお、ユーザが複数の物品2を取り出した場合、複数の着脱式センサ143が検知信号を出力する。このため、制御装置20の情報処理部23は、検知信号の数を計数することで、物品2の取り出された個数を判定することができる。情報処理部23は、判定した個数を検知情報として、識別情報とともに管理装置30に送信する(S54a)。 In addition, when the user takes out a plurality of articles 2, a plurality of detachable sensors 143 output detection signals. For this reason, the information processing unit 23 of the control device 20 can determine the number of articles 2 taken out by counting the number of detection signals. The information processing unit 23 transmits the determined number as detection information together with the identification information to the management device 30 (S54a).
 本変形例では、制御装置20及び着脱式センサ143以外の構成要素の動作は、第1の実施の形態と同じである。なお、管理装置30が行う比較処理(S56)では、画像処理を行わず、検知情報に示される個数を第1個数として比較が行われる。 In this modification, the operations of the constituent elements other than the control device 20 and the detachable sensor 143 are the same as those in the first embodiment. In the comparison process (S56) performed by the management apparatus 30, the image process is not performed, and the comparison is performed using the number indicated in the detection information as the first number.
 図26は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの制御装置20の動作を示すフローチャートである。以下では、図14に示すフローチャートとの相違点を中心に説明する。 FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 20 of the article management system according to this modification. Below, it demonstrates centering on difference with the flowchart shown in FIG.
 図26に示すように、通信部26が照合成功通知を受信した場合(S103でYes)、錠制御部22は、解錠命令を生成し(S204、図25のS20a)、生成した解錠命令を送信する(S106、図25のS28)。このとき、情報処理部23は、撮影命令を生成しない。 As shown in FIG. 26, when the communication unit 26 receives a verification success notification (Yes in S103), the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S204, S20a in FIG. 25), and the generated unlock command Is transmitted (S106, S28 in FIG. 25). At this time, the information processing unit 23 does not generate a shooting command.
 その後、制御部21は、検知信号、識別情報及び閉信号を受信するまで待機する(S207でNo、かつ、S115でNo)。検知信号、識別情報及び閉信号の少なくとも1つが受信できないまま所定期間が経過した場合(S115でYes)、制御装置20は、エラー処理を行う(S117)。 Thereafter, the control unit 21 waits until receiving the detection signal, the identification information, and the close signal (No in S207 and No in S115). When the predetermined period has passed without receiving at least one of the detection signal, the identification information, and the closing signal (Yes in S115), the control device 20 performs error processing (S117).
 検知信号、識別情報及び閉信号の全てが受信された場合(S207でYes)、錠制御部22は、施錠命令を生成する(S208)。以降の処理は、図14に示す処理と同じである。 When all of the detection signal, the identification information, and the closing signal are received (Yes in S207), the lock control unit 22 generates a locking command (S208). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing shown in FIG.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムでは、例えば、第1検知部は、複数の物品2の各々に着脱自在に取り付けられる複数の着脱式センサ143を有する。 As described above, in the article management system according to this modification, for example, the first detection unit includes a plurality of detachable sensors 143 that are detachably attached to each of the plurality of articles 2.
 このように、本変形例では、筐体10の開閉の前後で内部を撮影するのではなく、個々の着脱式センサ143からの検知信号に基づいて、複数の物品2の取り出しを検知する。これにより、複数の物品2を個々に検知することができるので、筐体10に収納された物品2の検出精度を高めることができる。したがって、物品2の管理の精度を高めることができる。 As described above, in this modification, the inside of the casing 10 is not photographed before and after opening and closing, but the removal of the plurality of articles 2 is detected based on the detection signals from the individual detachable sensors 143. Thereby, since the some articles | goods 2 can be detected separately, the detection accuracy of the articles | goods 2 accommodated in the housing | casing 10 can be improved. Therefore, the accuracy of management of the article 2 can be increased.
 また、例えば、複数の着脱式センサ143の各々は、対応する物品2の少なくとも一部を挟持する挟持部143bを有し、挟持部143bが互いに接触した場合に通電することで、対応する物品2の脱離を検知する。 In addition, for example, each of the plurality of detachable sensors 143 includes a sandwiching portion 143b that sandwiches at least a part of the corresponding article 2, and the corresponding article 2 is energized when the sandwiching sections 143b come into contact with each other. Detection of desorption.
 これにより、クリップ式の着脱式センサ143を利用することで、物品2の取り付け及び取り外しを容易に行うことができる。 Thereby, the attachment and detachment of the article 2 can be easily performed by using the clip-type detachable sensor 143.
 また、例えば、第1検知部は、さらに、複数の着脱式センサ143を支持する支持板141を有する。 Further, for example, the first detection unit further includes a support plate 141 that supports the plurality of detachable sensors 143.
 これにより、複数の着脱式センサ143をまとめて支持板141に取り付けておくことで、庫内センサユニット140の筐体10への取り付け作業を容易に行うことができる。 Thus, by attaching the plurality of detachable sensors 143 together to the support plate 141, it is possible to easily perform the work of attaching the in-compartment sensor unit 140 to the housing 10.
 [第3の変形例]
 次に、第1の実施の形態の第3の変形例について、図27~図30を用いて説明する。本変形例では、第2の変形例と同様に、着脱式のセンサを用いる例を説明する。
[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In this modification, an example using a detachable sensor will be described as in the second modification.
 図27は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの庫内センサユニット240の斜視図である。図28は、本変形例に係る庫内センサユニット240の着脱式センサ243の斜視図である。図29は、本変形例に係る庫内センサユニット240に複数の物品2が取り付けられた状態を示す図である。図30は、本変形例に係る着脱式センサ243から物品2を取り外す様子を示す図である。 FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit 240 of the article management system according to this modification. FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the detachable sensor 243 of the in-compartment sensor unit 240 according to this modification. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a state where a plurality of articles 2 are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 240 according to the present modification. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a state where the article 2 is detached from the detachable sensor 243 according to the present modification.
 本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、庫内カメラ40の代わりに、図27に示す庫内センサユニット240を、第1検知部の一例として備える。庫内センサユニット240は、支持板141と、複数の電極部142と、複数の着脱式センサ243と、複数の配線144とを有する。なお、支持板141、電極部142及び配線144は、第2の変形例と同じである。 The article management system according to this modification includes an in-compartment sensor unit 240 shown in FIG. 27 as an example of the first detection unit instead of the in-compartment camera 40. The in-compartment sensor unit 240 includes a support plate 141, a plurality of electrode portions 142, a plurality of detachable sensors 243, and a plurality of wirings 144. The support plate 141, the electrode part 142, and the wiring 144 are the same as in the second modification.
 複数の着脱式センサ243は、複数の物品2の各々に着脱自在に取り付けられるセンサである。図28及び図30に示すように、着脱式センサ243は、蝶番式のセンサである。具体的には、着脱式センサ243は、2枚の板部243a及び243bと、軸部243cとを有する。着脱式センサ243は、2枚の板部243a及び243bが互いに接触した場合に通電することで、対応する物品2の脱離を検知する。 The plurality of detachable sensors 243 are sensors that are detachably attached to each of the plurality of articles 2. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, the detachable sensor 243 is a hinge type sensor. Specifically, the detachable sensor 243 has two plate portions 243a and 243b and a shaft portion 243c. The detachable sensor 243 detects detachment of the corresponding article 2 by energizing when the two plate portions 243a and 243b come into contact with each other.
 2枚の板部243a及び243bは、一辺を軸として互いに回動自在に組み合わされている。2枚の板部243a及び243bはそれぞれ、平面視形状が略矩形の平板であり、軸部243cを回動軸として回動可能に軸部243cに固定されている。図29に示すように、2枚の板部243a及び243bの一方は、対応する物品2に載置される。2枚の板部243a及び243bの他方は、電極部142に接触させて支持板141に固定されている。 The two plate portions 243a and 243b are combined so as to be rotatable with respect to one side as an axis. Each of the two plate portions 243a and 243b is a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and is fixed to the shaft portion 243c so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 243c. As shown in FIG. 29, one of the two plate portions 243a and 243b is placed on the corresponding article 2. The other of the two plate portions 243 a and 243 b is fixed to the support plate 141 in contact with the electrode portion 142.
 板部243a及び243bは、例えば、金属などの導電性材料を用いて形成されている。板部243a及び243bは、軸部243cを介して接続されているが、接続部分では絶縁されている。つまり、板部243a及び243bは、主面同士が接触したときに通電し、電流が流れる。板部243a及び243bの大きさ及び形状は、例えば、互いに同じであるが、異なっていてもよい。 The plate portions 243a and 243b are formed using a conductive material such as metal, for example. The plate portions 243a and 243b are connected via the shaft portion 243c, but are insulated at the connection portion. That is, the plate portions 243a and 243b are energized when the main surfaces come into contact with each other, and a current flows. The sizes and shapes of the plate portions 243a and 243b are, for example, the same as each other, but may be different.
 本変形例では、図29に示すように、積み重ねられた物品2の各々に、板部243bが載置されている。この場合、板部243aと板部243bとが接触せずに通電していない。また、図29において最上段に位置する着脱式センサ243は、物品2に接触させておらず、板部243aと板部243bとが通電した状態である。 In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 29, a plate portion 243b is placed on each of the stacked articles 2. In this case, the plate portion 243a and the plate portion 243b are not in contact with each other and are not energized. In addition, the detachable sensor 243 located at the uppermost position in FIG. 29 is not in contact with the article 2 and is in a state where the plate portion 243a and the plate portion 243b are energized.
 図30に示すように、物品2を取り出した場合、物品2に載置されていた板部243bは、重力によって軸部243cを軸として回動し、板部243aと接触する。これにより、板部243aと板部243bとが通電し、電流が電極部142及び配線144を介して制御装置20に検知信号として出力される。このように、着脱式センサ243の状態が開放から通電に変わったときに、制御部21は、物品2が取り出されたと判定することができる。 As shown in FIG. 30, when the article 2 is taken out, the plate part 243b placed on the article 2 rotates around the shaft part 243c by gravity and contacts the plate part 243a. As a result, the plate portion 243a and the plate portion 243b are energized, and a current is output as a detection signal to the control device 20 via the electrode portion 142 and the wiring 144. Thus, when the state of the detachable sensor 243 changes from open to energized, the control unit 21 can determine that the article 2 has been taken out.
 なお、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作は、第2の変形例と同じであるので、説明を省略する。 Note that the operation of the article management system according to this modification is the same as that of the second modification, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムでは、例えば、複数の着脱式センサ243の各々は、一辺を軸として互いに回動自在に組み合わされ、一方が、対応する物品2に載置される2枚の板部243a及び243bを有し、2枚の板部243a及び243bが互いに接触した場合に通電することで、対応する物品2の脱離を検知する。 As described above, in the article management system according to this modification, for example, each of the plurality of detachable sensors 243 is combined with each other so as to be rotatable about one side, and one is placed on the corresponding article 2. The two plate portions 243a and 243b are connected to each other, and when the two plate portions 243a and 243b come into contact with each other, energization is detected to detect the detachment of the corresponding article 2.
 これにより、蝶番式の着脱式センサ243を利用することで、物品2の取り外しを容易に行うことができる。 Thereby, the article 2 can be easily detached by using the hinge-type detachable sensor 243.
 [第4の変形例]
 次に、第1の実施の形態の第4の変形例について、図31~図34を用いて説明する。本変形例では、第2の変形例と同様に、着脱式のセンサを用いる例を説明する。
[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In this modification, an example using a detachable sensor will be described as in the second modification.
 図31は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの庫内センサユニット340の斜視図である。図32は、本変形例に係る庫内センサユニット340に複数の物品2が取り付けられた状態を示す図である。 FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the in-compartment sensor unit 340 of the article management system according to this modification. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a state where a plurality of articles 2 are attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 340 according to the present modification.
 本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、庫内カメラ40の代わりに、図31に示す庫内センサユニット340を、第1検知部の一例として備える。庫内センサユニット340は、支持板341と、レール部342と、センサ部343と、配線344と有する。 The article management system according to this modification includes an in-compartment sensor unit 340 shown in FIG. 31 as an example of the first detection unit instead of the in-compartment camera 40. The in-compartment sensor unit 340 includes a support plate 341, a rail part 342, a sensor part 343, and a wiring 344.
 支持板341は、センサ部343を支持する。図31に示すように、支持板341には、複数のレール部342が設けられており、複数のレール部342の各々にセンサ部343が支持されている。 The support plate 341 supports the sensor unit 343. As shown in FIG. 31, the support plate 341 is provided with a plurality of rail portions 342, and the sensor portion 343 is supported on each of the plurality of rail portions 342.
 支持板341は、例えば、平面視形状が略矩形の平板であり、筐体10の内部に配置される。具体的には、図32に示すように、支持板341は、本体部11の奥の内側面に平行になるように、本体部11の床面に対して垂直に立てて固定される。 The support plate 341 is, for example, a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and is disposed inside the housing 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the support plate 341 is fixed upright with respect to the floor surface of the main body 11 so as to be parallel to the inner surface of the back of the main body 11.
 レール部342は、センサ部343が移動する際の軌道を形成する。本変形例では、レール部342は、支持板341を厚み方向に貫通する貫通孔であり、本体部11に支持板341が固定された場合に高さ方向に沿って延びる長尺のスリット状の貫通孔である。センサ部343は、レール部342の延びる方向(すなわち、高さ方向)に沿って移動可能に支持されている。 The rail part 342 forms a track when the sensor part 343 moves. In this modification, the rail portion 342 is a through-hole that penetrates the support plate 341 in the thickness direction, and is a long slit-like shape that extends along the height direction when the support plate 341 is fixed to the main body portion 11. It is a through hole. The sensor unit 343 is supported so as to be movable along the direction in which the rail unit 342 extends (that is, the height direction).
 なお、支持板341及びレール部342の代わりに、支持棒が本体部11の床面に対して垂直に立てて固定されてもよい。センサ部343は、支持棒を掴むようにして、支持棒に沿って高さ方向に移動可能に支持されてもよい。 In addition, instead of the support plate 341 and the rail portion 342, a support rod may be fixed vertically with respect to the floor surface of the main body portion 11. The sensor unit 343 may be supported so as to be movable in the height direction along the support bar so as to grasp the support bar.
 センサ部343は、レール部342に沿って移動可能であり、レール部342内での位置を検出する。具体的には、センサ部343は、本体部11の床面からセンサ部343までのレール部342に沿った距離、すなわち、高さを検出する。センサ部343は、配線344に接続されており、センサ部343の位置を示す位置情報(具体的には、高さ情報)を制御装置20に出力する。 The sensor unit 343 is movable along the rail unit 342 and detects a position in the rail unit 342. Specifically, the sensor unit 343 detects the distance along the rail unit 342 from the floor surface of the main body unit 11 to the sensor unit 343, that is, the height. The sensor unit 343 is connected to the wiring 344 and outputs position information (specifically, height information) indicating the position of the sensor unit 343 to the control device 20.
 図32に示すように、センサ部343は、ガイド部343aと、板部343bとを有する。ガイド部343aは、板部343bの先端から斜め上方に向けて延設されている。板部343bは、物品2に載置される。 32, the sensor unit 343 includes a guide unit 343a and a plate unit 343b. The guide portion 343a extends obliquely upward from the tip of the plate portion 343b. The plate portion 343b is placed on the article 2.
 図33は、本変形例に係る庫内センサユニット340に物品2を取り付ける様子を示す図である。図33に示すように、物品2を床面に沿ってスライドさせることで、ガイド部343aに物品2の端部が当接する。物品2をそのまま奥側へ押し入れることで、ガイド部343aが物品2の端部に押し上げられて、センサ部343が持ち上がる。これにより、板部343bが物品2の端部に載置され、センサ部343の高さが物品2の高さと略一致する。 FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the article 2 is attached to the in-compartment sensor unit 340 according to the present modification. As shown in FIG. 33, by sliding the article 2 along the floor surface, the end of the article 2 comes into contact with the guide portion 343a. By pushing the article 2 into the back as it is, the guide part 343a is pushed up to the end of the article 2 and the sensor part 343 is lifted. Accordingly, the plate portion 343b is placed on the end portion of the article 2, and the height of the sensor portion 343 substantially coincides with the height of the article 2.
 本変形例では、図32に示すように、複数の物品2は、筐体10の内部で積み重ねられて収納されている。庫内センサユニット340は、積み重ねられた複数の物品2のうち最上段に位置する物品2の高さを検知する。具体的には、センサ部343が最上段に位置する物品2に載置されているので、センサ部343の高さが物品2の個数に応じて変化する。すなわち、積み重ねられた物品2の個数が多い程、センサ部343の高さは高くなり、積み重ねられた物品2の個数が少ない程、センサ部343の高さは低くなる。 In this modification, as shown in FIG. 32, the plurality of articles 2 are stacked and stored inside the housing 10. The in-compartment sensor unit 340 detects the height of the article 2 located at the uppermost stage among the plurality of stacked articles 2. Specifically, since the sensor unit 343 is placed on the article 2 positioned at the uppermost stage, the height of the sensor unit 343 changes according to the number of articles 2. That is, as the number of stacked articles 2 increases, the height of the sensor unit 343 increases. As the number of stacked articles 2 decreases, the height of the sensor unit 343 decreases.
 本変形例では、情報処理部23又は比較部31は、センサ部343から出力される位置情報に基づいて、物品2が取り出される前後における高さの減少分を算出し、算出した高さの減少分と、物品2の1個分の高さとに基づいて、取り出された物品2の個数を判定することができる。 In this modification, the information processing unit 23 or the comparison unit 31 calculates a decrease in height before and after the article 2 is taken out based on the position information output from the sensor unit 343, and reduces the calculated height. The number of articles 2 taken out can be determined based on the minute and the height of one article 2.
 図34は、本変形例に係る庫内センサユニット340から物品2を取り外す様子を示す図である。例えば、図34に示すように、物品2を取り出す前の高さがh1であり、物品2を取り出すことで、高さはh2に減少する。高さの減少分は、h2-h1で表される。減少分を物品2の1個分の高さで割ることで、物品2の個数が算出される。 FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a state where the article 2 is removed from the in-compartment sensor unit 340 according to the present modification. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, the height before taking out the article 2 is h1, and by taking out the article 2, the height is reduced to h2. The decrease in height is represented by h2-h1. The number of articles 2 is calculated by dividing the decrease by the height of one article 2.
 ここで、物品2の取り出し前の高さh1が35cm、取り出し後の高さh2が25cm、物品2の1個分の高さが5cmである場合を例に挙げる。高さの減少分は、10(=35-25)cmになる。したがって、取り出された物品2の個数は、2(=10cm÷5cm)個になる。 Here, the case where the height h1 before taking out the article 2 is 35 cm, the height h2 after taking out is 25 cm, and the height of one article 2 is 5 cm is taken as an example. The decrease in height is 10 (= 35-25) cm. Therefore, the number of articles 2 taken out is 2 (= 10 cm ÷ 5 cm).
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムでは、例えば、複数の物品2は、筐体10の内部で積み重ねられて収納され、第1検知部(庫内センサユニット340)は、積み重ねられた複数の物品2のうち最上段に位置する物品2の高さを検知する。 As described above, in the article management system according to the present modification, for example, a plurality of articles 2 are stacked and stored inside the housing 10, and the first detection unit (in-house sensor unit 340) is stacked. In addition, the height of the article 2 located at the uppermost stage among the plurality of articles 2 is detected.
 これにより、高さの変化を検知することで、取り出された物品2の個数を判定することができる。このとき、第2の変形例及び第3の変形例では、最上段の物品2のみが取り出し可能であるのに対して、本変形例によれば、積み重ねられた複数の物品2のうち中段に位置する物品2又は下段に位置する物品2を抜き出すことができる。このように、積み重ねられた物品2からユーザが取り出したい物品2を自由に取り出すことができる。 Thereby, the number of articles 2 taken out can be determined by detecting a change in height. At this time, in the second modification and the third modification, only the uppermost article 2 can be taken out, but according to the present modification, the middle article among the stacked articles 2 is used. The article 2 located or the article 2 located in the lower stage can be extracted. In this way, the article 2 that the user wants to take out can be freely taken out from the stacked articles 2.
 なお、本変形例では、物品2の個数の計数を容易にするため、同じ種類の物品2、すなわち、個々の高さが同じである物品2を積み重ねているが、これに限らない。例えば、高さが異なる複数種類の物品2を積み重ねてもよい。例えば、高さがHaの物品Aと、高さがHbの物品Bとを積み重ねてもよい。 In this modification, in order to easily count the number of articles 2, the same kind of articles 2, that is, the articles 2 having the same height are stacked, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of articles 2 having different heights may be stacked. For example, an article A having a height of Ha and an article B having a height of Hb may be stacked.
 制御部21は、高さの減少分に応じて、取り出された物品2を推定することができる。例えば、高さの減少分がHaである場合、制御部21は、取り出された物品2が物品Aであると推定することができる。同様に、高さの減少分がHbである場合、制御部21は、取り出された物品2が物品Bであると推定することができる。また、高さの減少分がHa+Hbである場合には、制御部21は、物品Aと物品Bとが取り出されたと推定することができる。高さの減少分がHaの2倍である場合には、制御部21は、物品Aが2個取り出されたと推定することができる。 The control unit 21 can estimate the taken-out article 2 according to the height reduction. For example, when the decrease in height is Ha, the control unit 21 can estimate that the removed article 2 is the article A. Similarly, when the decrease in height is Hb, the control unit 21 can estimate that the removed article 2 is the article B. Moreover, when the amount of decrease in height is Ha + Hb, the control unit 21 can estimate that the article A and the article B have been taken out. When the decrease in height is twice Ha, the control unit 21 can estimate that two articles A have been taken out.
 このとき、高さHa及びHbは、その最小公倍数が筐体10の収納空間11aの高さ(床面から天井面までの高さ)以上でもよい。この場合、収納空間11a内で積み重ねられた物品Aと物品Bとの組み合わせ毎の高さは全て異なる。したがって、高さの減少分に基づいて、取り出された物品2の種類と個数とを決定することができる。 At this time, the heights Ha and Hb may be equal to or higher than the height of the storage space 11a of the housing 10 (height from the floor surface to the ceiling surface). In this case, the heights of the combinations of the articles A and B stacked in the storage space 11a are all different. Therefore, it is possible to determine the type and the number of the articles 2 taken out based on the height reduction.
 例えば、筐体10の収納空間11aの高さが30cmであり、物品Aの高さHaが5cm、物品Bの高さHbが7cmである場合を想定する。このとき、HaとHbとの最小公倍数は35cmであり、収納空間11aの高さより大きい。 For example, it is assumed that the height of the storage space 11a of the housing 10 is 30 cm, the height Ha of the article A is 5 cm, and the height Hb of the article B is 7 cm. At this time, the least common multiple of Ha and Hb is 35 cm, which is larger than the height of the storage space 11a.
 この場合、収納空間11a内に収納される物品2の組み合わせと、組み合わせに応じて積み重ねられた物品2の高さは、以下の15通りになる。 In this case, the combinations of the articles 2 stored in the storage space 11a and the heights of the articles 2 stacked according to the combinations are as follows.
 (物品Aの個数,物品Bの個数,高さ)=(0,0,0)、(1,0,5)、(1,1,12)、(1,2,19)、(1,3,26)、(2,0,10)、(2,1,17)、(2,2,24)、(3,0,15)、(3,1,22)、(3,2,29)、(4,0,20)、(4,1,27)、(5,0,25)、(6,0,30)
 このように、積み重ねられた物品2の高さは、組み合わせ毎に相違する。したがって、1つ以上の物品2が取り出されたとしても、物品2の取り出しの前後での高さを比較することで、取り出された物品2の種類と個数とを決定することができる。
(Number of articles A, number of articles B, height) = (0,0,0), (1,0,5), (1,1,12), (1,2,19), (1, 3, 26), (2, 0, 10), (2, 1, 17), (2, 2, 24), (3, 0, 15), (3, 1, 22), (3, 2, 29), (4,0,20), (4,1,27), (5,0,25), (6,0,30)
Thus, the height of the stacked articles 2 is different for each combination. Therefore, even if one or more articles 2 are taken out, the type and number of the taken-out articles 2 can be determined by comparing the heights before and after taking out the articles 2.
 一方で、HaとHbとの最小公倍数が収納空間11aの高さより小さい場合、取り出された物品2の個数と種類とが決定できないときがある。例えば、物品Aの高さHaが2cmであり、物品Bの高さHbが3cmである場合、HaとHbとの最小公倍数は6cmとなる。このため、高さの減少分が6cmであった場合、物品Aが3個取り出されたのか、物品Bが2個取り出されたのかを判別することができない。 On the other hand, when the least common multiple of Ha and Hb is smaller than the height of the storage space 11a, the number and type of the articles 2 taken out may not be determined. For example, when the height Ha of the article A is 2 cm and the height Hb of the article B is 3 cm, the least common multiple of Ha and Hb is 6 cm. For this reason, when the decrease in height is 6 cm, it is not possible to determine whether three articles A or two articles B have been taken out.
 なお、このような場合、物品2の取り出し個数を制限すればよい。例えば、案内部90が、1回の物品2の取り出し個数は2個以下であることを、ユーザに通知する。これにより、取り出された物品2の個数及び種類を決定することができる。 In such a case, the number of articles 2 taken out may be limited. For example, the guide unit 90 notifies the user that the number of articles 2 taken out at one time is two or less. Thereby, the number and kind of taken-out articles 2 can be determined.
 また、本変形例では、レール部342上でのセンサ部343の位置によって、最上段の物品2の高さを検知したが、これに限らない。第1検知部は、測距装置で実現されてもよい。例えば、測距装置は、自身から筐体10の床面までの距離を測定するように、筐体10の天井面に固定されてもよい。測距装置は、TOF(Time Of Flight)方式、又は、ステレオ方式を利用する。測距装置と筐体10の床面との間に、複数の物品2が積み重ねて配置される。 In the present modification, the height of the uppermost article 2 is detected based on the position of the sensor unit 343 on the rail unit 342. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first detection unit may be realized by a distance measuring device. For example, the distance measuring device may be fixed to the ceiling surface of the housing 10 so as to measure the distance from itself to the floor surface of the housing 10. The distance measuring device uses a TOF (Time Of Flight) method or a stereo method. A plurality of articles 2 are stacked and arranged between the distance measuring device and the floor surface of the housing 10.
 これにより、物品2の個数が多い程、測距装置から最上段の物品2までの距離が短くなる。物品2が取り出された場合には、測距装置から最上段の物品2までの距離が長くなる。したがって、最上段の物品2までの距離の増加分を、物品2の1個の高さで割ることにより、物品2の個数を算出することができる。 Thus, the greater the number of articles 2 is, the shorter the distance from the distance measuring device to the uppermost article 2 is. When the article 2 is taken out, the distance from the distance measuring device to the uppermost article 2 is increased. Therefore, the number of the articles 2 can be calculated by dividing the increase in the distance to the uppermost article 2 by the height of one article 2.
 [第5の変形例]
 次に、第1の実施の形態の第5の変形例について、図35を用いて説明する。本変形例では、庫内カメラ40の代わりに、重量センサを用いる。
[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this modification, a weight sensor is used in place of the internal camera 40.
 図35は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの重量センサ440と物品2との位置関係を示す図である。図35に示すように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、第1検知部として、重量センサ440を備える。 FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the weight sensor 440 and the article 2 in the article management system according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 35, the article management system according to this modification includes a weight sensor 440 as the first detection unit.
 重量センサ440は、複数の物品2の重量を検知する。本変形例では、重量センサ440は、筐体10の本体部11の床面上に配置されている。なお、第1の実施の形態で示したように、収納空間11aが棚材13によって区分されている場合、重量センサ440は、さらに、棚材13上に配置されていてもよい。棚材13毎に重量センサを配置する例については、第3の実施の形態において後で説明する。 The weight sensor 440 detects the weight of the plurality of articles 2. In this modification, the weight sensor 440 is disposed on the floor surface of the main body 11 of the housing 10. In addition, as shown in 1st Embodiment, when the storage space 11a is divided by the shelf material 13, the weight sensor 440 may be further arrange | positioned on the shelf material 13. FIG. An example in which a weight sensor is arranged for each shelf member 13 will be described later in the third embodiment.
 重量センサ440は、重量センサ440上に載置された複数の物品2の重量(合計重量)を検知し、制御装置20に出力する。物品2の1個当たりの重量が略等しい場合、重量センサ440によって検知された合計重量を、1個当たりの重量で割ることで、重量センサ440上に載置された物品2の個数を算出することができる。 The weight sensor 440 detects the weight (total weight) of the plurality of articles 2 placed on the weight sensor 440 and outputs it to the control device 20. When the weight per article 2 is substantially equal, the total weight detected by the weight sensor 440 is divided by the weight per piece to calculate the number of articles 2 placed on the weight sensor 440. be able to.
 このため、本変形例では、重量センサ440は、物品2の取り出しの前後の合計重量を制御装置20に出力する。例えば、第1の実施の形態と同様に、制御部21からの測定命令(撮影命令に相当する)に基づいて、合計重量を測定し、測定した合計重量を制御部21に出力してもよい。あるいは、重量センサ440は、測定した合計重量に変化が生じる度に、測定した合計重量を制御部21に出力してもよい。 For this reason, in this modification, the weight sensor 440 outputs the total weight before and after taking out the article 2 to the control device 20. For example, as in the first embodiment, the total weight may be measured based on a measurement command (corresponding to a shooting command) from the control unit 21, and the measured total weight may be output to the control unit 21. . Alternatively, the weight sensor 440 may output the measured total weight to the control unit 21 every time a change occurs in the measured total weight.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムでは、例えば、第1検知部(重量センサ440)は、複数の物品2の重量を検知する。 As described above, in the article management system according to the present modification, for example, the first detection unit (weight sensor 440) detects the weights of the plurality of articles 2.
 これにより、重量の変化を検知することで、取り出された物品2の個数を判定することができる。このとき、第4の変形例と同様に、積み重ねられた物品2からユーザが取り出したい物品2を自由に取り出すことができる。あるいは、重量センサ440上に物品2が載置されていればよいので、十分なスペースがある場合は、物品2を重ねなくてもよい。これにより、積み重ねによる物品2の損傷の発生を抑制することができる。 Thereby, the number of articles 2 taken out can be determined by detecting a change in weight. At this time, similarly to the fourth modified example, the article 2 that the user wants to take out can be freely taken out from the stacked articles 2. Alternatively, since the article 2 only needs to be placed on the weight sensor 440, the article 2 may not be stacked when there is a sufficient space. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the damage of the articles | goods 2 by stacking can be suppressed.
 なお、高さを検知する第4の変形例の場合と同様に、複数の種類の物品2の重量が異なる場合に、合計重量の変化から物品2の種類と個数とを特定することができる。 As in the case of the fourth modification for detecting the height, when the weights of the plurality of types of articles 2 are different, the type and number of the articles 2 can be specified from the change in the total weight.
 [第6の変形例]
 次に、第1の実施の形態の第6の変形例について、図36~図38を用いて説明する。本変形例では、庫内カメラ40の代わりに、接触式センサを用いる。また、第1の実施の形態及びその第1の変形例~第5の変形例では、複数の物品2が積み重ねられているが、本変形例では、接触式センサを有する個別収納ユニットに収納した上で、個別収納ユニットごと、筐体10に収納する。
[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In this modification, a contact type sensor is used instead of the internal camera 40. In the first embodiment and the first to fifth modifications, a plurality of articles 2 are stacked. In this modification, the articles are stored in an individual storage unit having a contact sensor. Above, each individual storage unit is stored in the housing 10.
 図36は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの個別収納ユニット540の斜視図である。図37は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムにおいて、物品2が収納された個別収納ユニット540の斜視図である。 FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the individual storage unit 540 of the article management system according to this modification. FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the individual storage unit 540 in which the articles 2 are stored in the article management system according to this modification.
 個別収納ユニット540は、図36に示すように、フィルム本体541と、接触式センサ543とを備える。フィルム本体541には、複数の貫通孔542が設けられている。 The individual storage unit 540 includes a film body 541 and a contact sensor 543, as shown in FIG. A plurality of through holes 542 are provided in the film body 541.
 フィルム本体541は、図37に示すように、1つの物品2を内部に収納する。フィルム本体541の形状は、例えば、両端に開口が設けられた筒状であるが、一端に開口が設けられ、他端が閉じられた袋状でもよい。開口は、物品2を入れるために設けられており、物品2が入れられた後は、閉じられてもよい。例えば、開口には、ファスナーなどが設けられていてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 37, the film main body 541 accommodates one article 2 therein. The shape of the film body 541 is, for example, a cylindrical shape having openings at both ends, but may be a bag shape having an opening at one end and the other end closed. The opening is provided to put the article 2 and may be closed after the article 2 is put. For example, a fastener or the like may be provided in the opening.
 フィルム本体541は、例えば、柔軟性の高い材料を用いて形成されている。フィルム本体541は、例えば、絶縁性の樹脂材料などから形成されている。 The film body 541 is formed using, for example, a highly flexible material. The film body 541 is made of, for example, an insulating resin material.
 貫通孔542は、フィルム本体541に1つ以上設けられている。貫通孔542は、個別収納ユニット540が筐体10に入れられた場合に、筐体10内の空気を個別収納ユニット540内に通すための通気孔である。これにより、例えば、筐体10内の冷気を利用して、個別収納ユニット540に収納された状態で物品2を冷やすことができる。 One or more through holes 542 are provided in the film main body 541. The through hole 542 is a ventilation hole for allowing air in the housing 10 to pass through the individual housing unit 540 when the individual housing unit 540 is put in the housing 10. Thereby, for example, the article 2 can be cooled in a state of being stored in the individual storage unit 540 using the cool air in the housing 10.
 接触式センサ543は、物品2の接触及び非接触を検知する。接触式センサ543は、フィルム本体541の内側面に設けられている。物品2がフィルム本体541内に収納された場合に、物品2が接触式センサ543に接触する。 Contact sensor 543 detects contact and non-contact of article 2. The contact sensor 543 is provided on the inner side surface of the film main body 541. When the article 2 is stored in the film main body 541, the article 2 comes into contact with the contact sensor 543.
 図示しないが、接触式センサ543には、配線が接続されている。筐体10の内部には、制御装置20に接続されたケーブルの端部が配置されている。接触式センサ543に接続された配線を、当該ケーブルの端部に接続(例えば、コネクタ接続)することで、接触式センサ543による検知結果を制御装置20に出力することができる。接触式センサ543は、例えば、物品2が個別収納ユニット540から取り出された場合、すなわち、物品2と接触式センサ543との接触がなくなった場合に、検知信号を制御装置20に出力する。 Although not shown, wiring is connected to the contact sensor 543. An end portion of a cable connected to the control device 20 is disposed inside the housing 10. By connecting the wiring connected to the contact sensor 543 to the end of the cable (for example, connector connection), the detection result by the contact sensor 543 can be output to the control device 20. The contact sensor 543 outputs a detection signal to the control device 20 when, for example, the article 2 is taken out from the individual storage unit 540, that is, when the contact between the article 2 and the contact sensor 543 is lost.
 図38は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムにおいて、個別収納ユニット540から物品2を取り出す前後の状態を示す斜視図である。図38に示すように、本変形例では、複数の物品2は、個別収納ユニット540に収納されたまま、積み重ねることができる。図38には、3つの個別収納ユニット540が積み重ねられた例を示している。 FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing a state before and after taking out the article 2 from the individual storage unit 540 in the article management system according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 38, in the present modification, the plurality of articles 2 can be stacked while being stored in the individual storage unit 540. FIG. 38 shows an example in which three individual storage units 540 are stacked.
 ここで、中段に位置する個別収納ユニット540から物品2を取り出す。この場合、中段の個別収納ユニット540は、フィルム本体541が柔軟性を有するので、上段の個別収納ユニット540の重力で押し潰されて変形する。 Here, the article 2 is taken out from the individual storage unit 540 located in the middle stage. In this case, since the film main body 541 has flexibility, the middle individual storage unit 540 is crushed and deformed by the gravity of the upper individual storage unit 540.
 なお、フィルム本体541は、剛性を有してもよい。この場合、物品2を取り出した後も、フィルム本体541の形状が維持される。 Note that the film body 541 may have rigidity. In this case, the shape of the film main body 541 is maintained even after the article 2 is taken out.
 [第7の変形例]
 次に、第1の実施の形態の第7の変形例について、図39及び図40を用いて説明する。第1の実施の形態では、筐体10の内部に複数の物品2がまとめて収納されているのに対して、本変形例では、複数の物品2を個別に収納するための個別収納スペースが設けられている。複数の個別収納スペースの各々には、収納される物品2を検知するセンサが設けられている。
[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. In the first embodiment, a plurality of articles 2 are stored together in the housing 10, whereas in this modification, there is an individual storage space for storing the plurality of articles 2 individually. Is provided. Each of the plurality of individual storage spaces is provided with a sensor that detects an article 2 to be stored.
 図39は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムにおける個別収納棚610の正面図である。図40は、本変形例に係る個別収納棚610の一部を示す斜視図である。なお、図39には、個別収納棚610の個別収納スペース613aに物品2が収納されている様子を示している。図40では、物品2が収納されていない個別収納スペース613aを示している。 FIG. 39 is a front view of the individual storage shelf 610 in the article management system according to this modification. FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a part of the individual storage shelf 610 according to this modification. FIG. 39 shows a state in which the article 2 is stored in the individual storage space 613a of the individual storage shelf 610. FIG. 40 shows an individual storage space 613a in which the article 2 is not stored.
 個別収納棚610は、複数の物品2を個別に収納する複数の個別収納スペース613aを形成するための収納棚である。個別収納棚610は、筐体10の内部に配置されることで、筐体10の内部には、複数の個別収納スペース613aが設けられる。 The individual storage shelf 610 is a storage shelf for forming a plurality of individual storage spaces 613a for storing a plurality of articles 2 individually. The individual storage shelf 610 is disposed inside the housing 10, and thus a plurality of individual storage spaces 613 a are provided inside the housing 10.
 図39に示すように、個別収納棚610は、枠体部611と、複数の棚部613とを有する。また、図40に示すように、棚部613の各々には、個別センサ640が配置されている。枠体部611には、複数の発光部691が設けられている。 39, the individual storage shelf 610 includes a frame body portion 611 and a plurality of shelf portions 613. In addition, as shown in FIG. 40, an individual sensor 640 is disposed on each shelf 613. A plurality of light emitting portions 691 are provided in the frame body portion 611.
 枠体部611は、個別収納棚610の本体筐体である。枠体部611は、複数の棚部613を支持する。棚部613を支持する手段は、例えば、第1の実施の形態における本体部11が棚材13を支持する手段と同じである。 The frame body portion 611 is a main body housing of the individual storage shelf 610. The frame body part 611 supports the plurality of shelf parts 613. The means for supporting the shelf portion 613 is, for example, the same as the means for supporting the shelf material 13 by the main body portion 11 in the first embodiment.
 枠体部611の形状は、例えば、上下方向に長尺の矩形の筒状である。枠体部611は、上面部、床面部、左側面部及び右側面部を有し、前後方向には開口が設けられている。なお、前後方向における「前方」は、発光部691が設けられている側であり、筐体10の内部に配置された場合における扉12側である。前後方向における「後方」は、前方の反対側であり、筐体10の内部に配置された場合における奥側である。なお、枠体部611は、上面部及び床面部を有さなくてもよい。また、枠体部611は、左側面部及び右側面部の一方を有さなくてもよい。 The shape of the frame body portion 611 is, for example, a rectangular tube that is long in the vertical direction. The frame body portion 611 has an upper surface portion, a floor surface portion, a left side surface portion, and a right side surface portion, and an opening is provided in the front-rear direction. The “front” in the front-rear direction is the side on which the light emitting unit 691 is provided, and is the door 12 side when it is arranged inside the housing 10. “Backward” in the front-rear direction is the opposite side of the front side, and is the back side when arranged inside the housing 10. The frame body portion 611 does not have to have an upper surface portion and a floor surface portion. Further, the frame body portion 611 may not have one of the left side surface portion and the right side surface portion.
 棚部613は、個別収納スペース613aを形成するための仕切り部の一例である。棚部613は、例えば、平網を用いて形成される網棚である。本変形例では、隣り合う2つの棚部613と枠体部611とによって、個別収納スペース613aが形成されている。個別収納スペース613aの大きさは、物品2の大きさに応じて変更可能でもよい。例えば、棚部613は、上下方向において段階的に、又は、任意の位置に変更可能である。 The shelf part 613 is an example of a partition part for forming the individual storage space 613a. The shelf part 613 is a net shelf formed using a flat net, for example. In this modification, an individual storage space 613a is formed by two adjacent shelf portions 613 and a frame body portion 611. The size of the individual storage space 613 a may be changeable according to the size of the article 2. For example, the shelf 613 can be changed stepwise in the vertical direction or to an arbitrary position.
 個別センサ640は、個別収納スペース613a毎に配置された第1検知部の一例である。個別センサ640は、対応する個別収納スペース613aに配置される物品2を検知する。個別センサ640は、例えば、静電容量式センサ、重量センサ又は赤外線センサなどであるが、特に限定されない。 The individual sensor 640 is an example of a first detection unit arranged for each individual storage space 613a. The individual sensor 640 detects the article 2 arranged in the corresponding individual storage space 613a. The individual sensor 640 is, for example, a capacitance type sensor, a weight sensor, or an infrared sensor, but is not particularly limited.
 複数の個別センサ640にはそれぞれ、配線(図示せず)が接続されている。複数の個別センサ640の各々に接続された複数の配線は、まとめて枠体部611などに固定されている。筐体10の内部には、制御装置20に接続されたケーブルの端部が配置されている。複数の個別センサ640の各々に接続された複数の配線をまとめて、当該ケーブルの端部に接続(例えば、コネクタ接続)することで、複数の個別センサ640による検知結果を制御装置20に出力することができる。 A wiring (not shown) is connected to each of the plurality of individual sensors 640. A plurality of wirings connected to each of the plurality of individual sensors 640 are collectively fixed to the frame body portion 611 or the like. An end portion of a cable connected to the control device 20 is disposed inside the housing 10. A plurality of wirings connected to each of the plurality of individual sensors 640 are collected and connected to an end portion of the cable (for example, connector connection), so that detection results from the plurality of individual sensors 640 are output to the control device 20. be able to.
 複数の発光部691は、案内部90が備える表示部91の一例である。複数の発光部691は、複数の個別収納スペース613aと一対一に対応付けて設けられている。本変形例では、図39及び図40に示すように、枠体部611の、対応する個別収納スペース613aの近傍に配置されている。発光部691は、対応する個別収納スペース613aに収納される物品2に応じて、点灯状態が変化する。例えば、発光部691は、LEDなどの発光素子で実現される。 The plurality of light emitting units 691 is an example of the display unit 91 provided in the guide unit 90. The plurality of light emitting units 691 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of individual storage spaces 613a. In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the frame body portion 611 is disposed in the vicinity of the corresponding individual storage space 613a. The lighting state of the light emitting units 691 changes according to the article 2 stored in the corresponding individual storage space 613a. For example, the light emitting unit 691 is realized by a light emitting element such as an LED.
 例えば、発光部691は、対応する個別収納スペース613aに物品2が収納されている場合に点灯し、物品2が収納されていない場合に消灯する。また、収納された物品2が特定の人物に向けた特別な物品である場合など、発光部691は、点滅点灯を行ってもよい。なお、発光部691は、発光色を変更可能であってもよい。 For example, the light emitting unit 691 is turned on when the article 2 is stored in the corresponding individual storage space 613a, and is turned off when the article 2 is not stored. Further, when the stored article 2 is a special article directed to a specific person, the light emitting unit 691 may perform blinking lighting. The light emitting unit 691 may be capable of changing the emission color.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムでは、例えば、筐体10の内部には、複数の物品2を個別に収納する複数の個別収納スペース613aが設けられ、第1検知部は、個別収納スペース613a毎に配置された、対応する個別収納スペース613aに配置される物品2を検知する複数の個別センサ640を有する。 As described above, in the article management system according to this modification, for example, a plurality of individual storage spaces 613a for individually storing a plurality of articles 2 are provided in the housing 10, and the first detection unit is configured as follows. It has the some individual sensor 640 which detects the articles | goods 2 arrange | positioned for every individual storage space 613a arrange | positioned in the corresponding individual storage space 613a.
 これにより、個別収納スペース613a毎に物品2の検知を行うことができるので、物品2の管理の精度を高めることができる。 Thereby, since the article 2 can be detected for each individual storage space 613a, the accuracy of management of the article 2 can be improved.
 (第2の実施の形態)
 続いて、第2の実施の形態について説明する。以下では、第1の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点の説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment will be described. Below, it demonstrates centering on difference with 1st Embodiment, and description of a common point is abbreviate | omitted or simplified.
 第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1では、筐体10を開けることが許可された人物であれば、筐体10に収納される物品2を自由に取り出すことができる。これに対して、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムは、筐体10に収納される複数の物品2の中に、特定の人物に向けた特別な物品が含まれており、特定の人物のみが当該特別な物品を取り出すことができるシステムである。つまり、本実施の形態では、1つの筐体10を、予約利用(販売)と一般利用との2通りの利用方法で利用する。 In the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment, if the person is permitted to open the casing 10, the article 2 stored in the casing 10 can be taken out freely. On the other hand, in the article management system according to the present embodiment, a special article directed to a specific person is included in the plurality of articles 2 housed in the casing 10, and only a specific person is included. Is a system that can take out the special article. In other words, in the present embodiment, one housing 10 is used in two ways of usage: reserved use (sales) and general use.
 [構成]
 まず、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの構成について説明する。
[Constitution]
First, the configuration of the article management system according to the present embodiment will be described.
 図41は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701の構成を示すブロック図である。図41に示すように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1と比較して、制御装置20及び管理装置30の代わりに制御装置720及び管理装置730を備える点と、筐体10内に1以上の個別筐体710が配置されている点とが相違する。 FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 701 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 41, the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment is different from the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment in that the control device 720 and the management device 30 are replaced with the control device 720 and the management device 30. The point provided with the management device 730 is different from the point that one or more individual casings 710 are arranged in the casing 10.
 なお、本明細書を通じて、筐体10と制御装置720とをあわせて(他の実施の形態、および、その変形例を含めて)、物品管理装置と称する。 Throughout this specification, the casing 10 and the control device 720 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
 <個別筐体>
 まず、個別筐体710について、図42及び図43を用いて説明する。図42は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701における個別筐体710の斜視図である。図43は、本実施の形態に係る複数の個別筐体710が配置された筐体10を示す正面図である。
<Individual housing>
First, the individual casing 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a perspective view of individual casing 710 in article management system 701 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a front view showing the housing 10 in which a plurality of individual housings 710 according to the present embodiment are arranged.
 個別筐体710は、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つを個別に収納する個別収納スペース713を形成する開閉式の筐体である。図42に示すように、個別筐体710には、個別筐体710の開閉を制限する個別ロック機構770が取り付けられている。また、個別筐体710の内部には、収納される物品2を検知する個別センサ640が設けられている。 The individual casing 710 is an openable casing that forms an individual storage space 713 that individually stores at least one of the plurality of articles 2. As shown in FIG. 42, an individual lock mechanism 770 that restricts opening and closing of the individual case 710 is attached to the individual case 710. In addition, an individual sensor 640 that detects the article 2 to be stored is provided inside the individual casing 710.
 本実施の形態では、複数の個別筐体710の少なくとも1つは、予め定められた人物(以下、特定人物と記載する)に割り当てられている。特定人物が割り当てられた個別筐体710は、割り当てられた特定人物の専用の筐体であり、特定人物のみが開閉可能である。例えば、個別筐体710には、特定人物が予め指定した物品2(例えば、特定人物の体質に合わせた特別な弁当など)が収納されている。個別筐体710に個別ロック機構770が設けられていることで、特定人物以外の人物が取り出すことを禁止している。 In the present embodiment, at least one of the plurality of individual casings 710 is assigned to a predetermined person (hereinafter referred to as a specific person). The individual case 710 to which the specific person is assigned is a dedicated case for the assigned specific person, and only the specific person can be opened and closed. For example, the individual casing 710 stores an article 2 (for example, a special lunch box that matches the constitution of the specific person) specified in advance by the specific person. Since the individual lock mechanism 770 is provided in the individual casing 710, it is prohibited for a person other than the specific person to take out.
 複数の個別筐体710は、図43に示すように、筐体10の内部に配置されている。図43には、第1の実施の形態の第7の変形例で示した個別収納棚610を筐体10内に収納し、個別収納棚610の下3段に3つの個別筐体710を配置した例を示している。 The plurality of individual casings 710 are arranged inside the casing 10 as shown in FIG. 43, the individual storage shelves 610 shown in the seventh modification of the first embodiment are stored in the housing 10, and three individual housings 710 are arranged in the lower three stages of the individual storage shelves 610. An example is shown.
 この場合、3つの個別筐体710の近傍に配置された発光部(個別用の発光部)691を利用して、個別筐体710が特定人物専用であることを知らせることができる。具体的には、個別用の発光部691は、通常の発光部691とは異なる点灯状態で点灯する。例えば、個別用の発光部691と通常の発光部691とは、互いに異なる発光色(赤と緑など)で発光する。 In this case, it is possible to notify that the individual casing 710 is dedicated to a specific person using the light emitting units (individual light emitting units) 691 arranged in the vicinity of the three individual casings 710. Specifically, the individual light emitting unit 691 is lit in a lighting state different from that of the normal light emitting unit 691. For example, the individual light emitting unit 691 and the normal light emitting unit 691 emit light with different emission colors (such as red and green).
 また、発光部691は、特定人物が筐体10を開けた場合に、点滅点灯する。これにより、特定人物専用の個別筐体710の場所を知らせることができる。 Also, the light emitting unit 691 blinks when a specific person opens the housing 10. Thereby, the location of the individual casing 710 dedicated to a specific person can be notified.
 図42に示すように、個別筐体710は、枠体部711と、引き出し部712とを備える。 42, the individual casing 710 includes a frame body portion 711 and a drawer portion 712.
 枠体部711は、前面が開放された略直方体状の筐体であり、引き出し部712を出し入れ可能に収納する。枠体部711の内側には、個別ロック機構770の電子錠771の爪部771aが挿入される凹部772が設けられている。枠体部711は、例えば、樹脂又は金属材料から形成された略直方体状の筐体であるが、枠体部711の材料、形状及び大きさは特に限られない。なお、枠体部711には、筐体10内の冷気を通過させるための通気孔が設けられていてもよい。 The frame body portion 711 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped housing whose front surface is open, and accommodates the drawer portion 712 in a removable manner. A concave portion 772 into which the claw portion 771 a of the electronic lock 771 of the individual lock mechanism 770 is inserted is provided inside the frame body portion 711. The frame body part 711 is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped casing formed from a resin or a metal material, but the material, shape, and size of the frame body part 711 are not particularly limited. Note that the frame body portion 711 may be provided with a vent hole for allowing the cool air in the housing 10 to pass therethrough.
 引き出し部712は、上面が開放された略直方体状の筐体である。開放された上面は、枠体部711に挿入された場合に、枠体部711の上面によって覆われる。これにより、枠体部711と引き出し部712とによって個別収納スペース713が形成される。引き出し部712の前面には、引き出し部712の引き出しを容易にするための把持部714が設けられている。把持部714は、引き出し部712の前面から突出した凸部(つまみ)であるが、引き出し部712の前面に設けられた凹部でもよい。 The drawer part 712 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped housing having an open upper surface. The opened upper surface is covered with the upper surface of the frame body part 711 when inserted into the frame body part 711. Thereby, an individual storage space 713 is formed by the frame body portion 711 and the drawer portion 712. On the front surface of the drawer portion 712, a grip portion 714 for facilitating the drawer portion 712 is provided. The grip portion 714 is a convex portion (knob) protruding from the front surface of the drawer portion 712, but may be a concave portion provided on the front surface of the drawer portion 712.
 引き出し部712の床面には、個別センサ640が設けられている。個別センサ640は、第1の実施の形態の第7の変形例で示したものと同じである。個別センサ640は、ケーブルによって制御装置720と接続されている。当該ケーブルは、例えば、引き出し部712の内部(側板又は底板など)に埋め込まれていてもよい。 An individual sensor 640 is provided on the floor surface of the drawer portion 712. The individual sensor 640 is the same as that shown in the seventh modification of the first embodiment. The individual sensor 640 is connected to the control device 720 by a cable. For example, the cable may be embedded in the drawer 712 (such as a side plate or a bottom plate).
 なお、図42では、個別筐体710の開閉方式が引き出し式である例について示したが、これに限らない。個別筐体710の開閉方式は、第1の実施の形態に係る筐体10と同様に、扉による横開き方式でもよい。あるいは、個別筐体710の開閉方式は、縦開き、スライド式、観音開きなどでもよい。 42 shows an example in which the opening / closing method of the individual casing 710 is a drawer type, but the present invention is not limited to this. As with the case 10 according to the first embodiment, the opening / closing method of the individual case 710 may be a lateral opening method using a door. Alternatively, the opening / closing method of the individual casing 710 may be a vertical opening, a sliding type, a double door opening, or the like.
 <個別ロック機構>
 個別ロック機構770は、複数の個別筐体710の各々に取り付けられており、取り付けられた個別筐体710の開閉を制限する。個別ロック機構770は、図42に示すように、電子錠771と、凹部772とを有する。
<Individual locking mechanism>
The individual lock mechanism 770 is attached to each of the plurality of individual housings 710 and restricts the opening and closing of the attached individual housings 710. The individual lock mechanism 770 includes an electronic lock 771 and a recess 772 as shown in FIG.
 電子錠771は、第1の実施の形態に係る電子錠71と同様に、爪部771a及び保持筐体771bとを備える。外部から所定の電圧が印加された場合に、爪部771aが保持筐体771bに収納され、電圧の印加が停止された場合に、爪部771aが保持筐体771bから突出する。突出した爪部771aが凹部772に挿入されることで、個別筐体710が施錠される。 The electronic lock 771 includes a claw portion 771a and a holding housing 771b, similarly to the electronic lock 71 according to the first embodiment. When a predetermined voltage is applied from the outside, the claw portion 771a is housed in the holding housing 771b, and when the voltage application is stopped, the claw portion 771a protrudes from the holding housing 771b. By inserting the protruding claw portion 771a into the recess 772, the individual casing 710 is locked.
 凹部772は、メス型鍵に相当する。なお、凹部772の代わりに、第1の実施の形態と同様に、枠体部711にメス型鍵72を取り付けてもよい。 The recess 772 corresponds to a female key. Instead of the recess 772, a female key 72 may be attached to the frame body portion 711 as in the first embodiment.
 なお、図示しないが、電子錠771は、ケーブルによって制御装置720と接続されている。当該ケーブルは、例えば、引き出し部712の内部(側板又は底板など)に埋め込まれていてもよい。 Although not shown, the electronic lock 771 is connected to the control device 720 by a cable. For example, the cable may be embedded in the drawer 712 (such as a side plate or a bottom plate).
 <制御装置>
 制御装置720は、第1の実施の形態に係る制御装置20と比較して、制御部21が、新たに個別錠制御部727を備える点が相違する。
<Control device>
The control device 720 is different from the control device 20 according to the first embodiment in that the control unit 21 newly includes an individual lock control unit 727.
 個別錠制御部727は、複数の個別ロック機構770を制御する。個別錠制御部727は、管理装置730から送信される照合結果が、予め定められた人物(特定人物)との一致を示す場合に、複数の個別ロック機構770のうち、特定人物に割り当てられた個別筐体710に対応する個別ロック機構770を解錠する。つまり、筐体10を開けようとする人物が特定人物である場合に、個別錠制御部727は、特定人物の専用の個別筐体710に取り付けられた個別ロック機構770を解錠する。 The individual lock control unit 727 controls a plurality of individual lock mechanisms 770. The individual lock control unit 727 is assigned to a specific person among the plurality of individual lock mechanisms 770 when the collation result transmitted from the management device 730 indicates a match with a predetermined person (specific person). The individual lock mechanism 770 corresponding to the individual casing 710 is unlocked. That is, when the person who intends to open the casing 10 is a specific person, the individual lock control unit 727 unlocks the individual lock mechanism 770 attached to the individual casing 710 dedicated to the specific person.
 <管理装置>
 管理装置730は、第1の実施の形態に係る管理装置30と比較して、照合部32の代わりに照合部732を備える点と、記憶部34には、人物リスト35の代わりに人物リスト735が記憶されている点とが相違する。
<Management device>
Compared with the management apparatus 30 according to the first embodiment, the management device 730 includes a collation unit 732 instead of the collation unit 32, and the storage unit 34 has a person list 735 instead of the person list 35. Is different from the stored point.
 図44は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701における人物リスト735を示す図である。図44に示すように、人物リスト735は、図6に示す人物リスト35に対して、さらに、予約情報が加えられている。 FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a person list 735 in the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 44, in the person list 735, reservation information is further added to the person list 35 shown in FIG.
 予約情報は、フラグ情報と、個別筐体情報とを含んでいる。フラグ情報は、対応する人物が特定人物であるか否かを示す情報である。図44において、マル印(○)は、対応する人物が特定人物であることを表し、バツ印(×)は、対応する人物が特定情報ではないことを示している。個別筐体情報は、特定人物に割り当てられた個別筐体710を特定するための情報であり、例えば、個別筐体710の位置を示す。 Reservation information includes flag information and individual case information. The flag information is information indicating whether or not the corresponding person is a specific person. In FIG. 44, a circle mark (O) indicates that the corresponding person is a specific person, and a cross mark (X) indicates that the corresponding person is not specific information. The individual case information is information for specifying the individual case 710 assigned to the specific person, and indicates the position of the individual case 710, for example.
 照合部732は、人物リスト735と、人物情報が示す人物とを照合する。さらに、照合部732は、人物情報が示す人物が人物リスト735に含まれる人物に一致する場合に、人物リスト735を参照することで、当該人物が特定人物であるか否かを判定する。照合部732は、人物リスト735のフラグ情報に基づいて、特定人物である場合には、個別筐体情報を読み出す。照合部732は、通信部37を介して、人物が特定人物であること、及び、特定人物に割り当てられた個別筐体情報を、照合結果として制御装置720に送信する。 The collation unit 732 collates the person list 735 with the person indicated by the person information. Furthermore, when the person indicated by the person information matches the person included in the person list 735, the collation unit 732 refers to the person list 735 to determine whether or not the person is a specific person. Based on the flag information of the person list 735, the collation unit 732 reads the individual case information when the person is a specific person. The collation unit 732 transmits, via the communication unit 37, the person is a specific person and the individual case information assigned to the specific person to the control device 720 as a collation result.
 [動作]
 続いて、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701の動作を説明する。ここでは、管理装置730による照合処理と、制御装置720の動作及び個別ロック機構770の動作とを説明する。物品管理システム701を構成する他の構成要素の動作は、図25に示した通りである。
[Operation]
Next, the operation of the article management system 701 according to this embodiment will be described. Here, the collation processing by the management device 730, the operation of the control device 720, and the operation of the individual lock mechanism 770 will be described. The operation of the other components constituting the article management system 701 is as shown in FIG.
 <照合処理(個人認証処理)>
 図45は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701の管理装置730が行う照合処理を示すフローチャートである。照合処理は、図25に示すステップS16の処理であり、通信部37を介して人物情報を受信した後に行われる。なお、図45に示すフローチャートでは、図16に示す第1の実施の形態の照合処理と同様の処理には、同じ符号を付し、説明を簡略化する。
<Verification processing (personal authentication processing)>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing collation processing performed by the management device 730 of the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment. The collation process is the process of step S <b> 16 shown in FIG. 25 and is performed after receiving the personal information via the communication unit 37. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 45, the same reference numerals are given to the same processes as those in the verification process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 16, and the description will be simplified.
 図45に示すように、管理装置730では、照合部732が、人物リスト735と人物情報が示す人物とを照合する(S131)。人物情報が示す人物が、人物リスト735に含まれる人物に一致し(S132でYes)、かつ、特定人物である場合(S332でYes)、照合部732は、人物リスト735から個別筐体情報を取得する(S333)。照合部732は、人物の一致を示す照合結果を照合成功通知として生成し、個別筐体情報と合わせて出力する(S334)。照合成功通知及び個別筐体情報は、通信部37を介して制御装置720に送信され、かつ、課金部33に出力される。 45, in the management device 730, the collation unit 732 collates the person list 735 with the person indicated by the person information (S131). If the person indicated by the person information matches the person included in the person list 735 (Yes in S132) and is a specific person (Yes in S332), the matching unit 732 obtains the individual case information from the person list 735. Obtain (S333). The collation unit 732 generates a collation result indicating a person match as a collation success notification and outputs the collation result together with the individual case information (S334). The verification success notification and the individual case information are transmitted to the control device 720 via the communication unit 37 and are output to the charging unit 33.
 人物情報が示す人物が、人物リスト735に含まれる人物に一致し(S132でYes)、かつ、特定人物ではない場合(S332でNo)、照合部732は、人物の一致を示す照合結果を照合成功通知として生成し、出力する(S133)。照合成功通知は、通信部37を介して制御装置720に送信され、かつ、課金部33に出力される。 When the person indicated by the person information matches the person included in the person list 735 (Yes in S132) and is not a specific person (No in S332), the matching unit 732 collates the matching result indicating the matching of the person. Generate and output as a success notification (S133). The verification success notification is transmitted to the control device 720 via the communication unit 37 and is output to the charging unit 33.
 人物情報が示す人物が、人物リスト735に含まれる人物に一致しない場合(S132でNo)、照合部732は、人物の不一致を示す照合結果を照合失敗通知として生成し、出力する(S134)。照合失敗通知は、通信部37を介して制御装置720に送信される。 If the person indicated by the person information does not match the person included in the person list 735 (No in S132), the collation unit 732 generates and outputs a collation result indicating a person mismatch as a collation failure notification (S134). The verification failure notification is transmitted to the control device 720 via the communication unit 37.
 <制御装置の動作>
 図46は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701の制御装置720の動作を示すフローチャートである。なお、図46に示すフローチャートでは、図26に示す第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例に係る制御装置20が行う処理と同様の処理には、同じ符号を付し、説明を簡略化する。
<Operation of control device>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 720 of the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 46, processes similar to those performed by the control device 20 according to the second modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. To do.
 図46に示すように、制御装置20では、通信部26が照合成功通知を受信した場合(S103でYes)、個別錠制御部727が、人物情報が示す人物が特定人物であるか否かを判定する(S303)。具体的には、個別錠制御部727は、照合成功通知とともに個別筐体情報を受信したか否かで判定する。 As shown in FIG. 46, in the control device 20, when the communication unit 26 receives the verification success notification (Yes in S103), the individual lock control unit 727 determines whether or not the person indicated by the person information is a specific person. Determination is made (S303). Specifically, the individual lock control unit 727 determines whether individual housing information has been received together with a verification success notification.
 個別筐体情報を受信した場合、すなわち、人物情報が示す人物が特定人物である場合(S303でYes)、個別錠制御部727は、個別解錠命令を生成する(S304)。具体的には、個別錠制御部727は、個別筐体情報が示す個別筐体710に取り付けられた個別ロック機構770を解錠するための個別解錠命令を生成する。本実施の形態では、個別錠制御部727は、個別解錠命令として、例えば、個別ロック機構770の電子錠771に印加する所定の電圧の供給を行う。 When the individual case information is received, that is, when the person indicated by the person information is a specific person (Yes in S303), the individual lock control unit 727 generates an individual unlock command (S304). Specifically, the individual lock control unit 727 generates an individual unlock command for unlocking the individual lock mechanism 770 attached to the individual case 710 indicated by the individual case information. In the present embodiment, the individual lock control unit 727 supplies a predetermined voltage to be applied to the electronic lock 771 of the individual lock mechanism 770 as an individual unlock command, for example.
 その後、錠制御部22は、解錠命令を生成し(S204)、生成した解錠命令をロック機構70に送信する(S106)。また、人物情報が示す人物が特定人物ではない場合(S303でNo)も同様に、錠制御部22は、解錠命令を生成し(S204)、生成した解錠命令をロック機構70に送信する(S106)。以降の処理は、第1の実施の形態と同じである。 Thereafter, the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S204), and transmits the generated unlock command to the lock mechanism 70 (S106). Similarly, when the person indicated by the person information is not a specific person (No in S303), similarly, the lock control unit 22 generates an unlock command (S204), and transmits the generated unlock command to the lock mechanism 70. (S106). The subsequent processing is the same as that in the first embodiment.
 なお、本実施の形態では、情報処理部23は、人物情報が示す人物が特定人物である場合に、発光部691の点灯状態を変更してもよい。例えば、情報処理部23は、人物情報が示す人物が特定人物である場合、個別筐体情報が示す個別筐体710に対応する発光部691を点滅点灯させる。これにより、筐体10を開けた特定人物に対して、特定人物に割り当てられた個別筐体710の位置を案内することができる。 In the present embodiment, the information processing unit 23 may change the lighting state of the light emitting unit 691 when the person indicated by the person information is a specific person. For example, when the person indicated by the person information is a specific person, the information processing unit 23 blinks and lights the light emitting unit 691 corresponding to the individual case 710 indicated by the individual case information. Thereby, the position of the individual casing 710 assigned to the specific person can be guided to the specific person who opened the casing 10.
 なお、発光部691の点灯状態を変化させることに代えて、又は、これに加えて、情報処理部23は、音声出力部92を制御することで、音声案内により個別筐体710の位置を知らせてもよい。例えば、情報処理部23は、「あなたのものは一番下の箱に入っています」などの音声案内を生成し、音声出力部92に出力させてもよい。 In addition to or in addition to changing the lighting state of the light emitting unit 691, the information processing unit 23 controls the audio output unit 92 to notify the position of the individual casing 710 by voice guidance. May be. For example, the information processing unit 23 may generate a voice guidance such as “Your things are in the bottom box” and have the voice output unit 92 output the voice guidance.
 [効果など]
 以上のように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム701は、例えば、筐体10の内部に配置され、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つを個別に収納する1以上の個別収納スペース713を形成する開閉式の1以上の個別筐体710と、1以上の個別筐体710の各々の開閉を制限する1以上の個別ロック機構770と、1以上の個別ロック機構770を制御する個別錠制御部727とを備えている。1以上の個別筐体710の1つは、予め定められた人物に割り当てられ、個別錠制御部727は、照合結果が予め定められた人物との一致を示す場合に、1以上の個別ロック機構770のうち、予め定められた人物に割り当てられた個別筐体710に対応する個別ロック機構770を解錠する。
[Effects, etc.]
As described above, the article management system 701 according to the present embodiment forms, for example, one or more individual storage spaces 713 that are arranged inside the housing 10 and individually store at least one of the plurality of articles 2. One or more individual casings 710 that can be opened and closed, one or more individual locking mechanisms 770 that limit the opening and closing of each of the one or more individual casings 710, and an individual lock control unit that controls the one or more individual locking mechanisms 770 727. One of the one or more individual casings 710 is assigned to a predetermined person, and the individual lock control unit 727 displays one or more individual lock mechanisms when the collation result indicates a match with the predetermined person. In 770, the individual lock mechanism 770 corresponding to the individual casing 710 assigned to a predetermined person is unlocked.
 これにより、特定人物の専用の物品2を筐体10に収納することができる。つまり、1つの筐体10を、複数人で共同利用する部分(一般利用)と個人利用する部分(予約利用)とに分けて利用することができる。 Thereby, the article 2 dedicated to a specific person can be stored in the housing 10. That is, one housing 10 can be divided and used for a part shared by a plurality of persons (general use) and a part used personally (reserved use).
 なお、本実施の形態では、個別筐体710及び個別ロック機構770によって特定人物以外の物品2の取り出しを禁止したが、これに限らない。個別筐体710には、扉などが設けられていなくてもよい。例えば、物品2に対して直接的に個別ロック機構770を取り付けることができてもよい。 In the present embodiment, the individual casing 710 and the individual lock mechanism 770 prohibit the removal of the article 2 other than the specific person, but the present invention is not limited to this. The individual housing 710 may not be provided with a door or the like. For example, the individual lock mechanism 770 may be directly attached to the article 2.
 具体的には、個別ロック機構770は、チェーンロックなどの鎖又は紐と、当該鎖又は紐の端部に取り付けられた電子錠とを備えてもよい。例えば、個別ロック機構770は、物品2に取り付けられたリング部材、又は、物品2に設けられた貫通孔などに通されて、個別筐体710又は筐体10に固定されていてもよい。 Specifically, the individual lock mechanism 770 may include a chain or string such as a chain lock and an electronic lock attached to the end of the chain or string. For example, the individual lock mechanism 770 may be fixed to the individual casing 710 or the casing 10 through a ring member attached to the article 2 or a through-hole provided in the article 2.
 (第3の実施の形態)
 続いて、第3の実施の形態について説明する。以下では、第1の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点の説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Third embodiment)
Subsequently, a third embodiment will be described. Below, it demonstrates centering on difference with 1st Embodiment, and description of a common point is abbreviate | omitted or simplified.
 第1の実施の形態では、物品管理システム1が、筐体10の外部で物品2を検知する第2検知部を備えるのに対して、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムは、第2検知部を備えない。本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムでは、物品2が収納される位置が予め定められており、取り出された物品2の収納位置に基づいて、取り出された物品2の特定を行う。 In the first embodiment, the article management system 1 includes the second detection unit that detects the article 2 outside the housing 10, whereas the article management system according to the present embodiment includes the second detection unit. Does not have a part. In the article management system according to the present embodiment, the position where the article 2 is stored is determined in advance, and the extracted article 2 is specified based on the storage position of the extracted article 2.
 [構成]
 まず、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの構成について説明する。
[Constitution]
First, the configuration of the article management system according to the present embodiment will be described.
 図47は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801の構成を示すブロック図である。図47に示すように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1と比較して、制御装置20、管理装置30及び庫内カメラ40の代わりに制御装置820、管理装置830及び複数の重量センサ841~843を備える点と、コードリーダ50を備えない点とが相違する。 FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 801 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47, the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment replaces the control device 20, the management apparatus 30, and the in-compartment camera 40 as compared with the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the control device 820, the management device 830, and the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are provided, and the code reader 50 is not provided.
 なお、本明細書を通じて、筐体10と制御装置820とをあわせて(他の実施の形態、および、その変形例を含めて)、物品管理装置と称する。 Throughout this specification, the casing 10 and the control device 820 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
 本実施の形態では、筐体10内において、複数の物品2は、予め定められた位置に収納される。複数の物品2の各々の収納位置が予め定められていてもよく、物品2の種類毎に収納位置が定められていてもよい。 In the present embodiment, a plurality of articles 2 are stored in a predetermined position in the housing 10. Each storage position of the plurality of articles 2 may be determined in advance, or a storage position may be determined for each type of the article 2.
 図48は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801における複数の物品2(弁当2a~2c)の筐体10への収納例を示す図である。図48に示すように、例えば、弁当2aは、洋風弁当であり、上段に配置される。弁当2bは、中華弁当であり、中段に配置される。弁当2cは、和風弁当であり、下段に配置される。 FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of storing a plurality of articles 2 (lunch boxes 2a to 2c) in the casing 10 in the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 48, for example, the lunch box 2a is a Western-style lunch box and is arranged in the upper stage. The lunch box 2b is a Chinese lunch box and is arranged in the middle stage. The lunch box 2c is a Japanese-style lunch box and is arranged in the lower stage.
 制御装置820は、複数の重量センサ841~843を制御する。具体的には、制御装置820は、複数の重量センサ841~843のいずれかから出力される検出信号を受信し、受信した検出信号に基づいて、取り出された物品2の位置情報を生成し、生成した位置情報を管理装置30に送信する。 The control device 820 controls the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843. Specifically, the control device 820 receives a detection signal output from any of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843, generates position information of the extracted article 2 based on the received detection signal, The generated position information is transmitted to the management apparatus 30.
 図47に示すように、制御装置820の制御部821は、情報処理部823を備える。情報処理部823は、複数の重量センサ841~843の少なくとも1つから検知信号が送信された場合に、当該検知信号を送信した重量センサを特定する。本実施の形態では、図48に模式的に示しているように、制御装置820(情報処理部823)と複数の重量センサ841~843とは、それぞれ互いに異なるケーブルを介して接続されている。このため、情報処理部823は、検知信号が伝送されたケーブルを特定することで、検知信号の送信元である重量センサ841~843を特定する。 47, the control unit 821 of the control device 820 includes an information processing unit 823. When a detection signal is transmitted from at least one of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843, the information processing unit 823 identifies the weight sensor that transmitted the detection signal. In the present embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 48, control device 820 (information processing unit 823) and a plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are connected to each other through different cables. Therefore, the information processing unit 823 specifies the weight sensors 841 to 843 that are the transmission source of the detection signal by specifying the cable through which the detection signal is transmitted.
 通信部26は、複数の重量センサ841~843による検知結果を示す検知情報を出力する出力部の一例である。通信部26は、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つである対象物品が収納された位置から移動されたことを重量センサ841~843のいずれかが検知した場合、対象物品の位置を示す位置情報を検知情報として出力する。 The communication unit 26 is an example of an output unit that outputs detection information indicating detection results from the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843. When any of the weight sensors 841 to 843 detects that the target article that is at least one of the plurality of articles 2 has been moved from the position where the communication unit 26 has moved, the communication unit 26 displays position information indicating the position of the target article. Output as detection information.
 本実施の形態では、位置情報は、複数の重量センサ841~843の各々の検知結果(すなわち、合計重量)である。本実施の形態では、複数の重量センサ841~843と物品2の位置とが対応付けられているので、位置情報は、重量センサを示すことで、物品2の位置を示すことができる。重量センサ841~843のいずれかの合計重量の変化により、取り出された物品2(対象物品)の位置が示される。あるいは、位置情報は、例えば、上段、中段又は下段など対象物品の位置を明示的に示す情報であってもよい。 In the present embodiment, the position information is the detection result (that is, the total weight) of each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843. In the present embodiment, since the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 and the position of the article 2 are associated with each other, the position information can indicate the position of the article 2 by indicating the weight sensor. A change in the total weight of any of the weight sensors 841 to 843 indicates the position of the removed article 2 (target article). Alternatively, the position information may be information that explicitly indicates the position of the target article such as an upper stage, a middle stage, or a lower stage.
 管理装置830は、第1の実施の形態に係る管理装置30と比較して、比較部31の代わりに特定部831を備える点と、記憶部34に価格リスト36の代わりに収納位置テーブル836が記憶されている点が相違する。 Compared with the management apparatus 30 according to the first embodiment, the management apparatus 830 includes a specifying unit 831 instead of the comparison unit 31, and a storage position table 836 is provided in the storage unit 34 instead of the price list 36. The point that is memorized is different.
 特定部831は、制御装置820から送信される位置情報に基づいて、筐体10から取り出された物品2を特定する。具体的には、特定部831は、筐体10から取り出された物品2の種類とその個数とを特定する。例えば、重量センサ841によって検知された合計重量が変化した場合、特定部831は、収納位置テーブル836を参照することで、取り出された物品2が、重量センサ841が設置された上段に配置された弁当2aであると特定する。さらに、特定部831は、合計重量の減少分に応じて、取り出された弁当2aの個数を特定する。特定部831による特定結果に基づいて、課金部33は、取り出した人物への課金処理を行う。 The identifying unit 831 identifies the article 2 taken out from the housing 10 based on the position information transmitted from the control device 820. Specifically, the specifying unit 831 specifies the type and the number of articles 2 taken out from the housing 10. For example, when the total weight detected by the weight sensor 841 changes, the specifying unit 831 refers to the storage position table 836 so that the taken-out article 2 is arranged in the upper stage where the weight sensor 841 is installed. The lunch box 2a is specified. Furthermore, the specifying unit 831 specifies the number of lunch boxes 2a that have been taken out according to the decrease in the total weight. Based on the identification result by the identification unit 831, the accounting unit 33 performs accounting processing for the extracted person.
 本実施の形態では、物品2の種類と収納位置との対応関係は、管理装置830によって管理されている。具体的には、管理装置830の記憶部34に、物品2と収納位置との対応関係を示す収納位置テーブル836が記憶されている。 In the present embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the type of the article 2 and the storage position is managed by the management device 830. Specifically, a storage position table 836 indicating the correspondence between the article 2 and the storage position is stored in the storage unit 34 of the management device 830.
 図49は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801において、物品2と収納位置との関係を示す収納位置テーブル836を示す図である。 FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a storage position table 836 showing the relationship between the article 2 and the storage position in the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment.
 図49に示すように、収納位置テーブル836では、物品2の種類と、収納位置とが対応付けられている。また、収納位置テーブル836は、第1の実施の形態に係る価格リスト36を兼ねている。このため、収納位置テーブル836では、物品2の種類と、価格とが対応付けられている。 49, in the storage position table 836, the type of the article 2 and the storage position are associated with each other. The storage position table 836 also serves as the price list 36 according to the first embodiment. For this reason, in the storage position table 836, the type of the article 2 and the price are associated with each other.
 複数の重量センサ841~843は、複数の物品2を筐体10の内部で検知する検知部の一例である。複数の重量センサ841~843はそれぞれ、図48に示すように、上段、中段及び下段の各々に設けられている。複数の重量センサ841~843は、各々に載せられる物品2の合計重量を検知する。具体的には、重量センサ841は、上段を形成する棚材13に載置され、上段に配置される1以上の弁当2aの合計重量を検知する。重量センサ842は、中段を形成する棚材13に載置され、中段に配置される1以上の弁当2bの合計重量を検知する。重量センサ843は、下段を形成する本体部11の床面に載置され、下段に配される1以上の弁当2cの合計重量を検知する。複数の重量センサ841~843の各々で検知される合計重量の変化によって、取り出された弁当2a~2cの特定とその個数とを判定することができる。個数の特定方法は、第1の実施の形態の第5の変形例と同様である。 The plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are an example of a detection unit that detects the plurality of articles 2 inside the housing 10. As shown in FIG. 48, the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 are provided in the upper, middle and lower stages, respectively. The plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 detect the total weight of the articles 2 placed on each. Specifically, the weight sensor 841 is placed on the shelf 13 forming the upper stage, and detects the total weight of the one or more lunch boxes 2a arranged in the upper stage. The weight sensor 842 is placed on the shelf member 13 forming the middle stage, and detects the total weight of the one or more lunch boxes 2b arranged in the middle stage. The weight sensor 843 is placed on the floor surface of the main body 11 that forms the lower stage, and detects the total weight of the one or more lunch boxes 2c arranged on the lower stage. Based on the change in the total weight detected by each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843, it is possible to determine the identification and the number of the lunch boxes 2a to 2c that have been taken out. The number specifying method is the same as that of the fifth modification of the first embodiment.
 [動作]
 続いて、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801の動作を説明する。
[Operation]
Subsequently, the operation of the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment will be described.
 図50は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801の動作を示すシーケンス図である。ここでは、図25に示す第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例との相違点を中心に説明する。なお、図50では、重量センサ841のみを図示しているが、重量センサ842及び843も同様に動作する。 FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram showing an operation of the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment. Here, it demonstrates centering on difference with the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 50, only the weight sensor 841 is shown, but the weight sensors 842 and 843 operate in the same manner.
 図50に示すように、制御装置820が送信した解錠命令によってロック機構70が解錠処理(S30)を行うまでの処理は、図25に示す第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例と同じである。 As shown in FIG. 50, the process until the lock mechanism 70 performs the unlocking process (S30) according to the unlocking command transmitted by the control device 820 is the second modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is the same.
 ロック機構70が解錠された後、ユーザによって物品2が取り出された場合、複数の重量センサ841~843の少なくとも1つは、重量の変化を検知する(S33c)。例えば、ユーザが弁当2aを取り出した場合、重量センサ841が重量の変化を検知する。 When the article 2 is taken out by the user after the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked, at least one of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 detects a change in weight (S33c). For example, when the user takes out the lunch box 2a, the weight sensor 841 detects a change in weight.
 重量の変化を検知した重量センサ841は、検知信号を出力する(S33d)。検知信号は、重量センサ841上に載置されている弁当2aの合計重量を示す情報を含んでいる。 The weight sensor 841 that has detected the change in weight outputs a detection signal (S33d). The detection signal includes information indicating the total weight of the lunch box 2a placed on the weight sensor 841.
 なお、複数の重量センサ841~843の各々は、検知した合計重量を常時(又は定期的に)制御装置820に送信してもよい。制御装置820の情報処理部823、又は、管理装置830の特定部831では、重量センサ毎に、直前に送信された合計重量と新たに送信された合計重量との差分を算出することで、合計重量の変化分を算出してもよい。 Note that each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 may transmit the detected total weight to the control device 820 constantly (or periodically). The information processing unit 823 of the control device 820 or the specifying unit 831 of the management device 830 calculates the difference between the total weight transmitted immediately before and the newly transmitted total weight for each weight sensor. A change in weight may be calculated.
 あるいは、庫内カメラ40の場合と同様に、情報処理部823からの測定命令(撮影命令に相当)に基づいて、複数の重量センサ841~843の各々は、合計重量の測定を行い、測定した合計重量を情報処理部823に送信してもよい。具体的には、複数の重量センサ841は、筐体10が開けられる前又は開けられた直後と、筐体10が閉じられた後との2回、合計重量を測定して送信してもよい。 Alternatively, as in the case of the internal camera 40, each of the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843 measures and measures the total weight based on a measurement command (corresponding to a shooting command) from the information processing unit 823. The total weight may be transmitted to the information processing unit 823. Specifically, the plurality of weight sensors 841 may measure and transmit the total weight twice before or after the housing 10 is opened and after the housing 10 is closed. .
 制御装置820は、施錠命令を生成して出力した後(S42及びS50)、通信部26が、検知信号に含まれる位置情報を管理装置830に送信する(S54b)。具体的には、通信部26は、合計重量の変化を検出した重量センサ841を示す情報と、検知結果である合計重量を示す情報とを位置情報として送信する。 After generating and outputting the locking command (S42 and S50), the control unit 820 transmits the position information included in the detection signal to the management device 830 (S54b). Specifically, the communication unit 26 transmits information indicating the weight sensor 841 that has detected a change in the total weight and information indicating the total weight as a detection result as position information.
 管理装置830では、通信部37を介して位置情報を受信し、特定部831が、位置情報に基づいて物品2の特定処理を行う(S56b)。具体的には、特定部831は、収納位置テーブル836を参照して、取り出された物品2の種類とその個数とを特定する。例えば、重量センサ841によって検知された合計重量が変化したので、特定部831は、取り出された物品2が弁当2aであることを特定する。また、特定部831は、合計重量の変化分を算出し、算出した変化分を弁当2aの価格で割ることで、取り出された弁当2aの個数を決定する。 The management device 830 receives the position information via the communication unit 37, and the specifying unit 831 performs the specifying process of the article 2 based on the position information (S56b). Specifically, the identifying unit 831 refers to the storage position table 836 to identify the type and number of articles 2 that have been taken out. For example, since the total weight detected by the weight sensor 841 has changed, the specifying unit 831 specifies that the removed article 2 is the lunch box 2a. Further, the specifying unit 831 calculates the change in the total weight, and divides the calculated change by the price of the lunch 2a, thereby determining the number of the lunch boxes 2a that have been taken out.
 その後、課金部33は、特定部831による特定結果に基づいて課金処理を行う(S58)。具体的には、課金部33は、弁当2aの価格に、取り出された弁当2aの個数を乗ずることで、課金額を算出し、照合部32によって特定された人物に課金する。 Thereafter, the charging unit 33 performs a charging process based on the identification result by the identifying unit 831 (S58). Specifically, the billing unit 33 calculates the billing amount by multiplying the price of the lunch box 2a by the number of the lunch boxes 2a taken out, and bills the person specified by the collation unit 32.
 [効果など]
 以上のように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801は、開閉可能な筐体10の内部において、予め定められた位置に収納される複数の物品2を、筐体10の内部で検知する検知部(例えば、重量センサ841~843)と、検知部による検知結果を示す検知情報を出力する出力部(例えば、通信部26)とを備えている。出力部は、複数の物品2の少なくとも1つである対象物品が収納された位置から移動されたことを検知部が検知した場合に、対象物品の位置を示す位置情報を検知情報として出力する。
[Effects, etc.]
As described above, the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment detects a plurality of articles 2 stored in a predetermined position in the casing 10 that can be opened and closed. A detection unit (for example, weight sensors 841 to 843) and an output unit (for example, communication unit 26) that outputs detection information indicating a detection result by the detection unit are provided. When the detection unit detects that the target article that is at least one of the plurality of articles 2 has been moved, the output unit outputs position information indicating the position of the target article as detection information.
 これにより、複数の物品2が予め定められた位置に収納されているので、取り出された物品2の位置を検出することで、取り出された物品2を特定することができる。したがって、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム801では、コードリーダ50などの筐体10の外部で物品2を検知する手段が必要ではないので、構成をより簡略化することができる。したがって、本実施の形態によれば、簡単な構成で複数の物品2を管理することができる汎用性の高い物品管理システム801を提供することができる。 Thereby, since the plurality of articles 2 are stored in a predetermined position, the removed article 2 can be specified by detecting the position of the removed article 2. Therefore, in the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment, a means for detecting the article 2 outside the housing 10 such as the code reader 50 is not necessary, so that the configuration can be further simplified. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a highly versatile article management system 801 that can manage a plurality of articles 2 with a simple configuration.
 [変形例]
 続いて、第3の実施の形態の変形例について説明する。第3の実施の形態では、複数の重量センサ841~843を用いて、筐体10に収納された複数の物品2を検知する。これに対して、本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、第1の実施の形態と同様に、庫内カメラ40を検知部の一例として備える。
[Modification]
Subsequently, a modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10 are detected using the plurality of weight sensors 841 to 843. On the other hand, the article management system according to the present modification includes the in-compartment camera 40 as an example of a detection unit, as in the first embodiment.
 図51は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。図51に示すように、コードリーダ50が設けられていないので、制御装置820は、撮影命令及び施錠命令の生成及び出力を行った後(S42、S44及びS50)、通信部26が、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像(すなわち、位置情報)を管理装置830に送信する(S54c)。 FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 51, since the code reader 50 is not provided, the control device 820 generates and outputs the shooting command and the locking command (S42, S44, and S50), and then the communication unit 26 performs the first operation. The internal image and the second internal image (that is, position information) are transmitted to the management device 830 (S54c).
 管理装置830では、特定部831が、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像に基づいて、取り出された物品2の種類及び個数の特定を行う(S56c)。具体的には、特定部831は、第1庫内画像及び第2庫内画像の各々に画像処理を行うことで、物品2の取り出された位置及びその個数を特定する。例えば、複数の物品2にマーカー44が付されている場合、第1庫内画像に含まれ、かつ、第2庫内画像には含まれないマーカー44の位置と個数とを特定することで、取り出された物品2の位置と個数とを特定する。特定部831は、収納位置テーブル836を参照することで、物品2の位置から、取り出された物品2の種類を特定することができる。 In the management device 830, the specifying unit 831 specifies the type and number of the extracted articles 2 based on the first and second image images (S56c). Specifically, the specifying unit 831 specifies the position and the number of the articles 2 taken out by performing image processing on each of the first and second image images. For example, when the markers 44 are attached to the plurality of articles 2, by specifying the positions and the number of the markers 44 that are included in the first internal image and are not included in the second internal image, The position and the number of the articles 2 taken out are specified. The identifying unit 831 can identify the type of the removed article 2 from the position of the article 2 by referring to the storage position table 836.
 以上のように、庫内カメラ40を検知部の一例として備える場合であっても、コードリーダ50などの筐体10の外部で物品2を検知する手段を備えずに、取り出された物品2の種類及び個数を特定することができる。 As described above, even when the in-compartment camera 40 is provided as an example of a detection unit, a means for detecting the article 2 outside the housing 10 such as the code reader 50 is not provided, and the taken-out article 2 is removed. The type and number can be specified.
 なお、本実施の形態及びその変形例に係る物品管理システム801は、重量センサ841~843又は庫内カメラ40を検知部の一例として備えたが、これに限らない。物品管理システム801は、検知部として、第1の実施の形態の第2の変形例~第4の変形例で示した庫内センサユニット140、240若しくは340を備えてもよい。あるいは、物品管理システム801は、検知部として、第1の実施の形態の第6の変形例又は第7の変形例で示した複数の接触式センサ543又は複数の個別センサ640を備えてもよい。例えば、複数の物品2と一対一に対応付けてセンサを設けることで、取り出された物品2の特定を容易に行うことができる。 In addition, although the article management system 801 according to the present embodiment and the modification thereof includes the weight sensors 841 to 843 or the internal camera 40 as an example of the detection unit, the present invention is not limited thereto. The article management system 801 may include the in- compartment sensor unit 140, 240, or 340 shown in the second to fourth modifications of the first embodiment as a detection unit. Alternatively, the article management system 801 may include the plurality of contact sensors 543 or the plurality of individual sensors 640 shown in the sixth modification example or the seventh modification example of the first embodiment as a detection unit. . For example, by providing a sensor in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of articles 2, the taken-out article 2 can be easily identified.
 (第4の実施の形態)
 続いて、第4の実施の形態について説明する。
(Fourth embodiment)
Subsequently, a fourth embodiment will be described.
 本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムでは、制御装置20及び管理装置30が、さらに、筐体10に供給される電力の状態を管理する点が相違する。以下では、第1の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点の説明を省略又は簡略化する。 The article management system according to the present embodiment is different in that the control device 20 and the management device 30 further manage the state of power supplied to the housing 10. Below, it demonstrates centering on difference with 1st Embodiment, and description of a common point is abbreviate | omitted or simplified.
 [構成]
 まず、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムの構成について説明する。
[Constitution]
First, the configuration of the article management system according to the present embodiment will be described.
 図52は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901の構成を示すブロック図である。図52に示すように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1と比較して、制御装置20及び管理装置30の代わりに、制御装置920及び管理装置930を備える点が相違する。 FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment is different from the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment in place of the control device 20 and the management device 30. And the point provided with the management apparatus 930 is different.
 制御装置920は、筐体10に供給される電力状態を管理する。なお、筐体10は、電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体である。具体的には、筐体10は、供給される電力を用いて、収納空間11aの温度を調整(例えば冷却及び保温)する温度調整部14を備える。 The control device 920 manages the power state supplied to the housing 10. The housing 10 is an openable / closable housing that receives power supply. Specifically, the housing 10 includes a temperature adjustment unit 14 that adjusts the temperature of the storage space 11a (for example, cooling and heat insulation) using supplied power.
 なお、本明細書を通じて、筐体10と制御装置920とをあわせて(他の実施の形態、および、その変形例を含めて)、物品管理装置と称する。 Throughout this specification, the casing 10 and the control device 920 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
 本実施の形態では、制御装置920は、第1の実施の形態に係る制御装置20と比較して、制御部21の代わりに制御部921を備える点が相違する。制御装置920は、第1の実施の形態と同様に、受電部24と、給電部25とを備える。受電部24は、外部からの電力を受け、制御部921に供給する。給電部25は、受電部24が受けた電力を筐体10に供給する。つまり、制御装置920と筐体10とには、共通の電力が供給されている。 In the present embodiment, the control device 920 is different from the control device 20 according to the first embodiment in that a control unit 921 is provided instead of the control unit 21. The control device 920 includes a power receiving unit 24 and a power feeding unit 25 as in the first embodiment. The power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside and supplies it to the control unit 921. The power feeding unit 25 supplies the power received by the power receiving unit 24 to the housing 10. That is, common power is supplied to the control device 920 and the housing 10.
 制御部921は、図52に示すように、情報処理部923を備える。情報処理部923は、共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する送信部の一例である。具体的には、情報処理部923は、受電部24によって電力が受電されている場合に、アライブ信号を生成する。情報処理部923は、生成したアライブ信号を、通信部26を介して管理装置930に送信する。 The control unit 921 includes an information processing unit 923 as shown in FIG. The information processing unit 923 is an example of a transmission unit that transmits a power reception signal indicating a common power reception state. Specifically, the information processing unit 923 generates an alive signal when power is received by the power receiving unit 24. The information processing unit 923 transmits the generated alive signal to the management device 930 via the communication unit 26.
 アライブ信号は、共通の電力が正しく受電されていることを示す信号である。すなわち、アライブ信号は、制御装置920と筐体10とが正常な電力を受けており、正常に動作していることを示す信号である。 The alive signal is a signal indicating that the common power is correctly received. That is, the alive signal is a signal indicating that the control device 920 and the housing 10 are receiving normal power and are operating normally.
 本実施の形態では、情報処理部923は、受電部24が共通の電力を受けている期間、定期的にアライブ信号を生成して送信する。例えば、情報処理部923は、数分以下の時間間隔でアライブ信号を送信する。アライブ信号の送信間隔は、1分以下でもよく、例えば、1秒などの短時間でもよい。時間間隔が短い程、電力の供給状態を精度良く検出することができる。 In the present embodiment, the information processing unit 923 periodically generates and transmits an alive signal while the power receiving unit 24 receives common power. For example, the information processing unit 923 transmits an alive signal at a time interval of several minutes or less. The transmission interval of the alive signal may be 1 minute or less, for example, a short time such as 1 second. The shorter the time interval, the more accurately the power supply state can be detected.
 本実施の形態では、制御部921は、錠制御部922を備える。錠制御部922は、第1の実施の形態の錠制御部22と同様に、ロック機構70を制御する。錠制御部922は、さらに、共通の電力が遮断されたと判定された場合に、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止する。ロック機構70は、ノーマリオフ型の電子錠71を備えるので、電力が遮断された状態では解錠されないが、電力の供給が回復した場合には、解錠可能になる。これに対して、本実施の形態では、錠制御部922は、電力の供給が回復した場合であっても、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止する。これにより、筐体10を開けようとする人物の照合(個人認証)が成功したとしても、ロック機構70は解錠されずに物品2を取り出すことができない。 In the present embodiment, the control unit 921 includes a lock control unit 922. The lock control unit 922 controls the lock mechanism 70 in the same manner as the lock control unit 22 of the first embodiment. The lock control unit 922 further prohibits the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 when it is determined that the common power is cut off. Since the lock mechanism 70 includes the normally-off type electronic lock 71, the lock mechanism 70 is not unlocked when the power is cut off, but can be unlocked when the power supply is restored. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock control unit 922 prohibits unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 even when the supply of power is restored. Thereby, even if collation (personal authentication) of the person who is going to open the housing | casing 10 succeeds, the lock | rock mechanism 70 cannot be taken out without being unlocked.
 これにより、筐体10への電力供給が遮断された後に、物品2が取り出されるのを防止することができる。筐体10への電力供給が停止された場合、温度調整部14による温度調整ができなくなる。このため、物品2が弁当である場合など、物品2の品質が劣化する虞がある。本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901によれば、品質が劣化した物品2が取り出されることを防止することができる。 Thereby, it is possible to prevent the article 2 from being taken out after the power supply to the housing 10 is interrupted. When power supply to the housing 10 is stopped, the temperature adjustment by the temperature adjustment unit 14 cannot be performed. For this reason, there exists a possibility that the quality of the goods 2 may deteriorate, when the goods 2 are lunch boxes. According to the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the article 2 having deteriorated quality from being taken out.
 管理装置930は、第1の実施の形態に係る管理装置30と比較して、判定部938をさらに備える点が相違する。判定部938は、受電信号を受信し、受信した受電信号に基づいて共通の電力の遮断を判定する。本実施の形態では、判定部938は、所定期間、アライブ信号を受信しなかった場合に、共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する。所定期間は、例えば、アライブ信号の送信間隔より長く、当該送信間隔の2倍より短い時間である。 The management device 930 is different from the management device 30 according to the first embodiment in that it further includes a determination unit 938. The determination unit 938 receives the power reception signal, and determines the interruption of the common power based on the received power reception signal. In the present embodiment, the determination unit 938 determines that the common power is cut off when the alive signal is not received for a predetermined period. The predetermined period is, for example, a time longer than the transmission interval of the alive signal and shorter than twice the transmission interval.
 制御装置920に正常な電力が供給されている期間では、管理装置930の通信部37が、略一定の時間間隔でアライブ信号を受信する。つまり、通信部37が略一定の時間間隔でアライブ信号を受信し続けている限り、判定部938は、制御装置920が正常な共通の電力を受電していると判定する。一方で、当該時間間隔以上の期間、通信部37がアライブ信号を受信しなかった場合、判定部938は、制御装置920が正常な電力を受電できずにアライブ信号を送信できないと判定する。 During the period when normal power is supplied to the control device 920, the communication unit 37 of the management device 930 receives the alive signal at substantially constant time intervals. That is, as long as the communication unit 37 continues to receive the alive signal at substantially constant time intervals, the determination unit 938 determines that the control device 920 is receiving normal common power. On the other hand, when the communication unit 37 does not receive the alive signal for a period longer than the time interval, the determination unit 938 determines that the control device 920 cannot receive normal power and cannot transmit the alive signal.
 [動作]
 ここで、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901の動作について、図53を用いて説明する。図53は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901の動作を示すシーケンス図である。なお、図53では、物品管理システム901を構成する複数の構成要素のうち、電力状態の判定に関わる制御装置920及び管理装置930のみを図示している。
[Operation]
Here, the operation of the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 53, only the control device 920 and the management device 930 related to the determination of the power state are illustrated among a plurality of components constituting the article management system 901.
 図53に示すように、制御装置920は、略一定の時間間隔でアライブ信号を生成し(S402)、管理装置930に送信する(S403)。管理装置930では、通信部37がアライブ信号を略一定間隔で受信するので、判定部938は、電力が正常に供給されたと判定する。 53, the control device 920 generates an alive signal at a substantially constant time interval (S402) and transmits it to the management device 930 (S403). In the management device 930, since the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal at substantially constant intervals, the determination unit 938 determines that the power has been normally supplied.
 ここで、例えば、停電、又は、故意若しくは過失による電源コードの抜けなどが発生し、制御装置920への電力供給が遮断される(S410)。これにより、制御装置920がアライブ信号を送信しなくなるので、管理装置930では、アライブ信号を受信できなくなる。所定期間以上、アライブ信号を受信しないことで、判定部938は、共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する(S411)。このとき、管理装置930は、電力が遮断されたことを管理者に通知してもよい。 Here, for example, a power failure or disconnection of the power cord due to intention or negligence occurs, and the power supply to the control device 920 is cut off (S410). As a result, the control device 920 does not transmit the alive signal, and thus the management device 930 cannot receive the alive signal. By not receiving the alive signal for a predetermined period or longer, the determination unit 938 determines that the common power is cut off (S411). At this time, the management apparatus 930 may notify the administrator that power has been cut off.
 電力が回復した(S420)後、制御装置920では、情報処理部923が、電力供給が遮断される前と同様に、アライブ信号を生成し(S423)、通信部26を介して管理装置930へ送信する(S424)。管理装置930では、通信部37がアライブ信号を受信することで、判定部938は、制御装置920及び筐体10への共通の電力の供給が回復したと判定する。判定部938は、電力供給の回復を受けて、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止するための解錠禁止指示を生成する(S425)。判定部938は、通信部37を介して、解錠禁止指示を制御装置920に送信する(S426)。 After the power is restored (S420), in the control device 920, the information processing unit 923 generates an alive signal (S423) as before the power supply is cut off (S423), and the control unit 920 transmits the alive signal to the management device 930. Transmit (S424). In the management device 930, when the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal, the determination unit 938 determines that the common power supply to the control device 920 and the housing 10 has been recovered. In response to the recovery of power supply, the determination unit 938 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction for prohibiting unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 (S425). The determination unit 938 transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 920 via the communication unit 37 (S426).
 制御装置920の錠制御部922は、解錠禁止指示を受けて、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止する(S427)。これにより、以降は、ユーザがカードリーダ60にIDカードをかざしたとしても、ロック機構70は解錠されずに筐体10を開けることができない状態が維持される。 The lock control unit 922 of the control device 920 receives the unlock prohibition instruction and prohibits the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 (S427). Thereby, even if the user holds the ID card over the card reader 60, the lock mechanism 70 is not unlocked and the casing 10 cannot be opened.
 情報処理部923は、案内部90を制御することで、エラーを報知する(S428)。例えば、表示部91は、電力供給が遮断されて筐体10に収納された物品2の品質が保証されないことを示す案内画像を表示する。あるいは、音声出力部92は、物品2の品質が保証されないことを示す音声案内、又は、警告音を出力してもよい。 The information processing unit 923 notifies the error by controlling the guide unit 90 (S428). For example, the display unit 91 displays a guidance image indicating that the quality of the article 2 stored in the housing 10 is not guaranteed because the power supply is cut off. Alternatively, the voice output unit 92 may output voice guidance or a warning sound indicating that the quality of the article 2 is not guaranteed.
 なお、本実施の形態では、管理装置930は、電力供給の回復後のアライブ信号を受信した後に、解錠禁止指示を制御装置920に送信するが、電力供給の遮断を判定した後、解錠禁止指示を繰り返し送信してもよい。これにより、制御装置920は、電力が回復するとすぐに解錠禁止指示を受信して、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the management device 930 transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 920 after receiving the alive signal after the restoration of power supply. The prohibition instruction may be repeatedly transmitted. As a result, the control device 920 can receive the unlock prohibition instruction as soon as power is restored, and prohibit the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70.
 また、管理装置930が解錠禁止指示を制御装置920に送信する例について示したが、これに限らない。例えば、制御装置920は、電力供給が回復した後、自主的に解錠を禁止してもよい。 In addition, although an example in which the management device 930 transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 920 has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the control device 920 may voluntarily prohibit the unlocking after the power supply is restored.
 <筐体の状態(電力)の確認処理>
 図54は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901の管理装置930が行う状態確認処理を示すフローチャートである。
<Case status (power) confirmation processing>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a state confirmation process performed by the management apparatus 930 of the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment.
 管理装置930では、判定部938が、所定期間内にアライブ信号を受信したか否かを判定する(S430)。所定期間内にアライブ信号を受信している限り(S430でYes)、管理装置930は、筐体10及び制御装置920への電力供給が正常であると判定し、通常の動作(比較、照合及び課金など)を行う。 In the management device 930, the determination unit 938 determines whether an alive signal is received within a predetermined period (S430). As long as the alive signal is received within the predetermined period (Yes in S430), the management device 930 determines that the power supply to the housing 10 and the control device 920 is normal, and performs normal operations (comparison, verification, and verification). Billing).
 所定期間内にアライブ信号を受信しなかった場合(S430でNo)、判定部938は、共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する(S432)。その後、判定部938は、通信部37が再びアライブ信号を受信するまで待機する(S434でNo)。通信部37がアライブ信号を受信した場合(S434でYes)、判定部938は、エラー報知を行い、解錠禁止指示を送信する(S436)。 If the alive signal is not received within the predetermined period (No in S430), the determination unit 938 determines that the common power is cut off (S432). Thereafter, the determination unit 938 waits until the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal again (No in S434). When the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal (Yes in S434), the determination unit 938 performs error notification and transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction (S436).
 なお、本実施の形態では、電力供給の遮断を判定した後、再びアライブ信号を受信するまで、解錠禁止指示を送信するのを待機している。これにより、制御装置920への電力供給が回復せずに、解錠禁止指示が制御装置920で受信できない期間に、解錠禁止指示を送信してしまうのを抑制することができる。 In this embodiment, after determining that the power supply is cut off, it waits until an unlock prohibition instruction is transmitted until an alive signal is received again. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unlocking prohibition instruction from being transmitted during a period in which the unlocking prohibition instruction cannot be received by the control device 920 without recovering the power supply to the control device 920.
 [効果など]
 以上のように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901は、電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体10に収納される複数の物品2を管理する物品管理システムであって、筐体10と共通の電力を受ける受電部24と、共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する送信部(例えば、情報処理部923)と、受電信号を受信し、受信した受電信号に基づいて共通の電力の遮断を判定する判定部938とを備える。
[Effects, etc.]
As described above, the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment is an article management system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in the openable / closable casing 10 that receives power supply, and is common to the casing 10. Power receiving unit 24 that receives the received power, a transmission unit (for example, information processing unit 923) that transmits a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the common power, and a common power based on the received power reception signal. And a determination unit 938 for determining whether or not to block.
 筐体10には電力が供給されて、物品2の品質を維持するために電力が用いられている場合がある。このような場合に、電力供給が遮断された場合、物品2の品質が劣化する虞がある。すなわち、電力の遮断が発生した後、物品2の品質を保証できなくなる場合がある。本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム901によれば、電力供給の遮断を判定することができるので、物品2の品質が保証されない場合に、解錠禁止、又は、ユーザ若しくは管理者への報告などの対策を行うことができる。したがって、本実施の形態によれば、信頼性の高い物品管理システム901を提供することができる。 There is a case where power is supplied to the casing 10 and the power is used to maintain the quality of the article 2. In such a case, when the power supply is interrupted, the quality of the article 2 may be deteriorated. In other words, the quality of the article 2 may not be guaranteed after power interruption. According to the article management system 901 according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to determine the interruption of power supply, when the quality of the article 2 is not guaranteed, unlocking is prohibited, or reporting to the user or the administrator, etc. Measures can be taken. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, a highly reliable article management system 901 can be provided.
 また、例えば、情報処理部923は、受電部24が共通の電力を受けている期間、定期的にアライブ信号を送信し、判定部938は、所定期間、アライブ信号を受信しなかった場合に、共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する。 Further, for example, the information processing unit 923 periodically transmits an alive signal while the power receiving unit 24 receives the common power, and the determination unit 938 receives the alive signal for a predetermined period. It is determined that the common power is cut off.
 これにより、アライブ信号の受信の有無によって電力供給を判定することができるので、簡易な構成で電力供給の遮断を判定することができる。 Thereby, since it is possible to determine the power supply based on whether or not the alive signal is received, it is possible to determine the interruption of the power supply with a simple configuration.
 また、例えば、受電部24は、外部から電力を、共通の電力として受け、物品管理システム1は、さらに、受電部24が受けた電力を筐体10に供給する給電部25を備える。 Further, for example, the power receiving unit 24 receives power from the outside as common power, and the article management system 1 further includes a power feeding unit 25 that supplies the power received by the power receiving unit 24 to the housing 10.
 これにより、筐体10には制御装置920を介して電力が供給される。このため、制御装置920への受電状態を検出することで、筐体10への電力の供給状態を判定することができる。 Thereby, power is supplied to the housing 10 via the control device 920. For this reason, the supply state of power to the housing 10 can be determined by detecting the power reception state to the control device 920.
 また、例えば、物品管理システム901は、さらに、筐体10の開閉を制限するロック機構70と、ロック機構70を制御する錠制御部922とを備え、錠制御部922は、判定部938によって共通の電力が遮断されたと判定された場合に、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止する。 In addition, for example, the article management system 901 further includes a lock mechanism 70 that restricts opening and closing of the housing 10 and a lock control unit 922 that controls the lock mechanism 70, and the lock control unit 922 is shared by the determination unit 938. When it is determined that the power of the lock mechanism 70 is cut off, the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 is prohibited.
 これにより、一度、電力供給が遮断したと判定された後には、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止するので、筐体10が開けられることを禁止することができる。このため、品質が保証されない物品2が取り出されてしまうのを防止することができる。 Thereby, once it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 is prohibited, so that the opening of the housing 10 can be prohibited. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the article 2 whose quality is not guaranteed from being taken out.
 また、例えば、ロック機構70は、所定の電圧が印加された場合に解錠し、かつ、電圧無印加の場合に施錠状態を維持する電子錠71を有する。 Also, for example, the lock mechanism 70 has an electronic lock 71 that unlocks when a predetermined voltage is applied and maintains a locked state when no voltage is applied.
 これにより、電子錠71は、所定の電圧が供給されない場合には施錠状態を維持するので、筐体10への電力供給が遮断された場合には、電子錠71への電圧も印加されずに、施錠状態が維持される。したがって、筐体10への電力供給が遮断された場合に、筐体10を開閉できなくなるので、物品2を保護することができる。 As a result, the electronic lock 71 maintains a locked state when a predetermined voltage is not supplied, so that when the power supply to the housing 10 is interrupted, the voltage to the electronic lock 71 is not applied. The locked state is maintained. Therefore, when the power supply to the housing 10 is interrupted, the housing 10 cannot be opened and closed, so that the article 2 can be protected.
 (第4の実施の形態の変形例)
 以下では、第4の実施の形態の複数の変形例について説明する。なお、以下の変形例では、第4の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点の説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Modification of the fourth embodiment)
Below, the some modification of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that in the following modification, differences from the fourth embodiment will be mainly described, and description of common points will be omitted or simplified.
 [第1の変形例]
 まず、第4の実施の形態の第1の変形例について、図55~図57を用いて説明する。
[First Modification]
First, a first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG.
 <構成>
 図55は、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1001の構成を示すブロック図である。図55に示すように、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1001は、さらに、温度センサ1010を備える点と、制御装置920及び管理装置930の代わりに制御装置1020及び管理装置1030を備える点とが相違する。
<Configuration>
FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 1001 according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 55, the article management system 1001 according to this modification further includes a temperature sensor 1010 and a point provided with a control device 1020 and a management device 1030 instead of the control device 920 and the management device 930. Is different.
 温度センサ1010は、筐体10内部の温度を測定する温度測定部の一例である。温度センサ1010は、測定した温度を示す温度情報を制御装置1020に出力する。例えば、温度センサ1010は、略一定の時間間隔で筐体10内部の温度を測定して、測定結果(温度情報)を制御装置1020に出力する。例えば、温度情報を出力するタイミングは、制御装置1020がアライブ信号を出力するタイミングと同期している。具体的には、温度情報を出力する時間間隔とアライブ信号を出力する時間間隔とは、略同じである。 The temperature sensor 1010 is an example of a temperature measurement unit that measures the temperature inside the housing 10. The temperature sensor 1010 outputs temperature information indicating the measured temperature to the control device 1020. For example, the temperature sensor 1010 measures the temperature inside the housing 10 at a substantially constant time interval, and outputs the measurement result (temperature information) to the control device 1020. For example, the timing at which the temperature information is output is synchronized with the timing at which the control device 1020 outputs the alive signal. Specifically, the time interval for outputting the temperature information and the time interval for outputting the alive signal are substantially the same.
 なお、本明細書を通じて、筐体10と制御装置1020とをあわせて(他の実施の形態、および、その変形例を含めて)、物品管理装置と称する。 Throughout this specification, the casing 10 and the control device 1020 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
 制御装置1020は、第4の実施の形態に係る制御装置920と比較して、制御部921の代わりに制御部1021を備える。制御部1021は、錠制御部1022と、情報処理部923とを備える。 The control device 1020 includes a control unit 1021 instead of the control unit 921 as compared with the control device 920 according to the fourth embodiment. The control unit 1021 includes a lock control unit 1022 and an information processing unit 923.
 錠制御部1022は、判定部1038によって共通の電力が遮断されたと判定された場合において、(i)共通の電力が遮断されたと推定される推定時刻以降で温度センサ1010によって測定された温度が所定の範囲外である場合に、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止し、(ii)推定時刻以降で温度センサ1010によって測定された温度が所定の範囲内を維持している場合に、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止しない。本変形例では、温度が所定の範囲内であるか否かを、管理装置1030の判定部1038が行っている。このため、錠制御部1022は、管理装置1030から送信される解錠禁止指令を受信した場合に、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止する。 When the determination unit 1038 determines that the common power is cut off, the lock control unit 1022 (i) the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time when the common power is estimated to be cut off is a predetermined value. The lock mechanism 70 is prohibited from being unlocked when it is outside the range of (ii), and (ii) when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time is maintained within a predetermined range, Unlocking is not prohibited. In this modification, the determination unit 1038 of the management device 1030 determines whether or not the temperature is within a predetermined range. For this reason, the lock control unit 1022 prohibits the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 when the unlocking prohibition command transmitted from the management device 1030 is received.
 管理装置1030は、第4の実施の形態に係る管理装置930と比較して、判定部938の代わりに判定部1038を備える。判定部1038は、アライブ信号の受信判定だけでなく、温度の判定も行う。具体的には、判定部1038は、制御装置1020を介して送信される温度情報が示す筐体10内部の温度が、所定の範囲内を維持しているか否かを判定する。所定の範囲は、例えば、筐体10に収納される物品2の品質を保つことができる範囲である。例えば、物品2が弁当である場合、所定の範囲は、5℃以上20℃以下の範囲などである。 The management device 1030 includes a determination unit 1038 instead of the determination unit 938 as compared to the management device 930 according to the fourth embodiment. The determination unit 1038 performs not only the reception determination of the alive signal but also the temperature determination. Specifically, the determination unit 1038 determines whether or not the temperature inside the housing 10 indicated by the temperature information transmitted via the control device 1020 is maintained within a predetermined range. The predetermined range is, for example, a range in which the quality of the article 2 stored in the housing 10 can be maintained. For example, when the article 2 is a lunch box, the predetermined range is a range of 5 ° C. or more and 20 ° C. or less.
 判定部1038は、電力が遮断されたと推定される推定時刻以降において、温度センサ1010によって測定された温度が所定の範囲内を維持している場合には、解錠禁止指示を生成しない。筐体10内部の温度が所定の範囲内を維持されている場合には、物品2の品質が維持されている。例えば、停電などで温度調整部14の冷却及び保温機能が失われたとしても、その期間が十分に短く、物品2の品質に影響を与えない場合が考えられる。この場合、判定部1038は、解錠禁止指示を生成せずに、筐体10からの物品2の取り出しを通常通り行わせることができる。 The determination unit 1038 does not generate an unlocking prohibition instruction when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 is maintained within a predetermined range after the estimated time when the power is estimated to be cut off. When the temperature inside the housing 10 is maintained within a predetermined range, the quality of the article 2 is maintained. For example, even if the cooling and heat retaining functions of the temperature adjusting unit 14 are lost due to a power failure or the like, the period may be sufficiently short and the quality of the article 2 may not be affected. In this case, the determination unit 1038 can cause the article 2 to be taken out from the housing 10 as usual without generating an unlocking prohibition instruction.
 一方で、判定部1038は、電力が遮断されたと推定される推定時刻以降において、温度センサ1010によって測定された温度が所定の範囲外である場合に、解錠禁止指示を生成する。例えば、判定部1038は、推定時刻以降に、一度でも温度が所定の範囲から逸脱したことがある場合に、解錠禁止指示を生成する。 On the other hand, the determination unit 1038 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 is outside a predetermined range after the estimated time when the power is estimated to be cut off. For example, the determination unit 1038 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction when the temperature has once deviated from a predetermined range even after the estimated time.
 これにより、電力の回復によって筐体10の内部の温度が所定の範囲内に戻った場合であっても、所定の範囲から逸脱したことがあれば、物品2の品質が保証できないため、筐体10の開閉を禁止することができる。このため、物品2の品質管理の精度をより高めることができる。 As a result, even if the temperature inside the housing 10 returns to within a predetermined range due to power recovery, the quality of the article 2 cannot be guaranteed if the temperature deviates from the predetermined range. The opening and closing of 10 can be prohibited. For this reason, the quality control accuracy of the article 2 can be further increased.
 <動作>
 次に、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1001の動作を説明する。
<Operation>
Next, the operation of the article management system 1001 according to this modification will be described.
 図56は、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1001の動作を示すシーケンス図である。なお、図56では、物品管理システム1001を構成する複数の構成要素のうち、電力状態及び温度状態の判定に関わる温度センサ1010、制御装置1020及び管理装置1030のみを図示している。 FIG. 56 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system 1001 according to this modification. In FIG. 56, only the temperature sensor 1010, the control device 1020, and the management device 1030 related to the determination of the power state and the temperature state are illustrated among the plurality of constituent elements constituting the article management system 1001.
 本変形例では、温度センサ1010は、筐体10の内部の温度を測定し(S400)、測定された温度を示す温度情報を制御装置1020に送信する(S401)。温度センサ1010が温度情報を送信するタイミングは、制御装置1020がアライブ信号を送信するタイミングと同期している。このため、例えば、制御装置1020は、温度情報を、ステップS402で生成したアライブ信号に含めて管理装置1030に送信する(S403)。 In this modification, the temperature sensor 1010 measures the temperature inside the housing 10 (S400), and transmits temperature information indicating the measured temperature to the control device 1020 (S401). The timing at which the temperature sensor 1010 transmits temperature information is synchronized with the timing at which the control device 1020 transmits an alive signal. For this reason, for example, the control device 1020 includes the temperature information in the alive signal generated in step S402 and transmits the temperature information to the management device 1030 (S403).
 管理装置1030では、通信部37がアライブ信号を受信し、判定部1038が、アライブ信号に含まれる温度情報に基づいて温度の判定を行う(S405)。具体的には、判定部1038は、温度情報が示す温度、すなわち、筐体10の内部の温度が所定の範囲内であるか否かを判定する。 In the management device 1030, the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal, and the determination unit 1038 determines the temperature based on the temperature information included in the alive signal (S405). Specifically, the determination unit 1038 determines whether or not the temperature indicated by the temperature information, that is, the temperature inside the housing 10 is within a predetermined range.
 電力供給の遮断が発生する(S410)まで、温度測定、アライブ信号の生成及び温度判定が繰り返される。電力供給の遮断が発生した場合、判定部1038は、アライブ信号所定期間内に受信できなくなるので、電力が遮断されたと判定する(S411)。 The temperature measurement, the generation of the alive signal, and the temperature determination are repeated until the power supply is interrupted (S410). When the power supply is interrupted, the determination unit 1038 cannot receive the alive signal within a predetermined period, and therefore determines that the power is interrupted (S411).
 電力が回復した(S420)後、筐体10では、電力供給が遮断される前と同様に、温度センサ1010が温度を測定し(S421)、温度情報を制御装置1020に送信する(S422)。制御装置1020は、アライブ信号を生成し(S423)、管理装置1030へ送信する(S424)。 After the power is restored (S420), in the case 10, the temperature sensor 1010 measures the temperature (S421) and transmits the temperature information to the control device 1020 (S422) as before the power supply is cut off. The control device 1020 generates an alive signal (S423) and transmits it to the management device 1030 (S424).
 管理装置1030では、通信部37がアライブ信号を受信することで、判定部1038は、制御装置1020及び筐体10への共通の電力の供給が回復したと判定する。判定部1038は、電力供給の回復を受けて、温度判定を行い、筐体10内部の温度が所定の範囲外であれば、解錠禁止指示を生成する(S425)。判定部1038は、通信部37を介して、生成した解錠禁止指示を制御装置1020に送信する(S426)。以降の処理は、第4の実施の形態と同様である。 In the management device 1030, when the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal, the determination unit 1038 determines that the common power supply to the control device 1020 and the housing 10 has been recovered. The determination unit 1038 performs temperature determination in response to the recovery of power supply, and generates an unlocking prohibition instruction if the temperature inside the housing 10 is outside the predetermined range (S425). The determination unit 1038 transmits the generated unlocking prohibition instruction to the control device 1020 via the communication unit 37 (S426). Subsequent processing is the same as in the fourth embodiment.
 <筐体の状態(電力及び温度)の確認処理>
 図57は、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1001の管理装置1030が行う状態確認処理を示すフローチャートである。図54に示すフローチャートと比較して、温度の判定を行う処理(S435)が追加されている点が相違する。
<Confirmation process of chassis status (power and temperature)>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a state confirmation process performed by the management apparatus 1030 of the article management system 1001 according to this modification. Compared with the flowchart shown in FIG. 54, a difference is that a process for determining temperature (S435) is added.
 本変形例では、通信部37がアライブ信号を受信した後(S434でYes)、判定部1038は、温度が所定の範囲内であるか否かを判定する(S435)。温度が所定の範囲内ではない場合(S435でNo)、判定部1038は、エラー報知を行い、解錠禁止指示を送信する(S436)。 In the present modification, after the communication unit 37 receives the alive signal (Yes in S434), the determination unit 1038 determines whether or not the temperature is within a predetermined range (S435). When the temperature is not within the predetermined range (No in S435), the determination unit 1038 performs error notification and transmits an unlocking prohibition instruction (S436).
 温度が所定の範囲内である場合(S435でYes)、判定部1038は、解錠禁止指示を生成することなく、アライブ信号の受信の待機状態に移行する(S430に戻る)。つまり、温度が所定の範囲内である場合には、解錠禁止指示が制御装置1020に送信されないので、制御装置1020では、電力供給の遮断前と同じ状態(通常状態)に戻る。したがって、カードリーダ60が人物情報を読み取った場合には、照合結果に応じて、ロック機構70が解錠される。 When the temperature is within the predetermined range (Yes in S435), the determination unit 1038 shifts to a standby state for receiving an alive signal without generating an unlocking prohibition instruction (returns to S430). That is, when the temperature is within the predetermined range, the unlocking prohibition instruction is not transmitted to the control device 1020, and thus the control device 1020 returns to the same state (normal state) as before the power supply is shut off. Therefore, when the card reader 60 reads the person information, the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked according to the collation result.
 <効果など>
 例えば、ロック機構70の解錠が禁止された場合には、権限のある管理者が復旧を行う必要があり、復旧には手間と時間とが必要になる虞がある。復旧するまでは、物品2を取り出すことができなくなって、ユーザにとって不便である。
<Effects>
For example, when unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 is prohibited, it is necessary for an authorized administrator to perform recovery, and there is a possibility that time and effort are required for recovery. Until the product is restored, the article 2 cannot be taken out, which is inconvenient for the user.
 これに対して、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1001は、筐体10内部の温度を測定する温度センサ1010を備え、錠制御部1022は、判定部1038によって共通の電力が遮断されたと判定された場合において、以下の処理を行なう。すなわち、錠制御部1022は、(i)共通の電力が遮断されたと推定される推定時刻以降で温度センサ1010によって測定された温度が所定の範囲外である場合に、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止し、(ii)推定時刻以降で温度センサ1010によって測定された温度が所定の範囲内を維持している場合に、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止しない。 On the other hand, the article management system 1001 according to the present modification includes a temperature sensor 1010 that measures the temperature inside the housing 10, and the lock control unit 1022 determines that the common power is cut off by the determination unit 1038. In the case where it is, the following processing is performed. That is, the lock control unit 1022 (i) unlocks the lock mechanism 70 when the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time when the common power is estimated to be cut off is outside the predetermined range. (Ii) When the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 1010 after the estimated time is maintained within a predetermined range, the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 is not prohibited.
 これにより、筐体10内の温度が所定の範囲内を維持されていた場合には、物品2の品質の劣化は生じないので、ロック機構70の解錠を禁止しなくてもよい。したがって、物品2の品質に問題がない場合には、仮に停電などで電力供給の遮断があったとしても、電力の回復後には、通常通り物品2の取り出しを行うことができる。 Thereby, when the temperature in the housing 10 is maintained within a predetermined range, the quality of the article 2 is not deteriorated, so that the unlocking of the lock mechanism 70 may not be prohibited. Therefore, when there is no problem in the quality of the article 2, even if the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like, the article 2 can be taken out as usual after the power is restored.
 なお、本変形例では、管理装置1030が温度管理を行う例について示したが、制御装置1020が温度管理を行ってもよい。この場合、通信部26は、温度情報を管理装置1030に送信しなくてよいので、送信する情報量を減らすことができ、消費電力を低減することができる。 In addition, in this modification, although the management apparatus 1030 showed about the example which performs temperature management, the control apparatus 1020 may perform temperature management. In this case, the communication unit 26 does not have to transmit the temperature information to the management device 1030. Therefore, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced, and the power consumption can be reduced.
 また、本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、温度センサ1010を備えるが、温度センサ1010の代わりに、又は、温度センサ1010に加えて、筐体10の温度以外の状態を検出するセンサを備えてもよい。例えば、本変形例に係る物品管理システムは、湿度センサを備えてもよい。また、筐体10内に気流又は水流などを形成している場合には、気流又は水流センサを備えてもよい。 The article management system according to the present modification includes the temperature sensor 1010, but includes a sensor that detects a state other than the temperature of the housing 10 instead of or in addition to the temperature sensor 1010. Also good. For example, the article management system according to this modification may include a humidity sensor. Further, when an air flow or a water flow is formed in the housing 10, an air flow or water flow sensor may be provided.
 [第2の変形例]
 続いて、第4の実施の形態の第2の変形例について説明する。
[Second Modification]
Then, the 2nd modification of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated.
 上記の第4の実施の形態では、制御装置920から管理装置930にアライブ信号を定期送信する。これに対して、本変形例では、制御装置920は、アライブ信号を定期送信しない。アライブ信号の定期送信の代わりに、制御装置920は、電力回復後にリブート信号を送信する。 In the fourth embodiment, the alive signal is periodically transmitted from the control device 920 to the management device 930. On the other hand, in the present modification, the control device 920 does not regularly transmit the alive signal. Instead of periodic transmission of the alive signal, the control device 920 transmits a reboot signal after the power is restored.
 図58は、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの動作を示すシーケンス図である。なお、本変形例に係る物品管理システムの構成は、第4の実施の形態と同じである。 FIG. 58 is a sequence diagram showing the operation of the article management system according to this modification. Note that the configuration of the article management system according to the present modification is the same as that of the fourth embodiment.
 本変形例では、図58に示すように、電力供給が遮断されるまでは、電力状態に関する処理を特に行わない。電力供給が遮断された後、電力が回復した(S420)後、制御装置920は、リブート信号を生成し(S450)、通信部26を介して、リブート信号を管理装置930に送信する(S451)。 In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 58, the processing relating to the power state is not particularly performed until the power supply is cut off. After power supply is cut off and power is restored (S420), the control device 920 generates a reboot signal (S450) and transmits the reboot signal to the management device 930 via the communication unit 26 (S451). .
 なお、リブート信号は、電力供給が回復したことを示す受電信号の一例である。具体的には、リブート信号は、電力供給が遮断されて、制御装置920の動作が停止した後、電力供給が回復し、制御装置920が再起動(リブート)したことを示す信号である。このように、本変形例では、情報処理部923は、共通の電力の受電が停止した後に再開した場合のみ、リブート信号を送信する。 Note that the reboot signal is an example of a power reception signal indicating that power supply has been restored. Specifically, the reboot signal is a signal indicating that the power supply is restored and the control device 920 is restarted (rebooted) after the power supply is cut off and the operation of the control device 920 is stopped. As described above, in the present modification, the information processing unit 923 transmits a reboot signal only when the reception of the common power is stopped and then restarted.
 管理装置930では、通信部37がリブート信号を受信した場合に、判定部938は、制御装置920と筐体10への共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する(S452)。判定部938は、解錠禁止指示を生成し(S425)、制御装置920に送信する(S426)。以降の処理は、第4の実施の形態と同様である。 In the management device 930, when the communication unit 37 receives the reboot signal, the determination unit 938 determines that the common power to the control device 920 and the housing 10 is cut off (S452). The determination unit 938 generates an unlocking prohibition instruction (S425) and transmits it to the control device 920 (S426). Subsequent processing is the same as in the fourth embodiment.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システムでは、例えば、情報処理部923は、受電部24による共通の電力の受電が停止した後に再開した場合のみ、リブート信号を送信し、判定部938は、リブート信号を受信した場合に、共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する。 As described above, in the article management system according to the present modification, for example, the information processing unit 923 transmits a reboot signal only when power reception by the power reception unit 24 is stopped and then restarted, and the determination unit 938. Determines that the common power is cut off when the reboot signal is received.
 これにより、アライブ信号のように信号の定期送信を行わなくてよいので、消費電力を少なくすることができる。 This makes it possible to reduce power consumption because it is not necessary to perform periodic signal transmission like an alive signal.
 なお、物品管理システムは、無停電電源装置(UPS:Uninterrupted Power Supply)を備えてもよい。制御装置920又は1020は、無停電電源装置からの電源供給を受けたことを管理装置930又は1030にリブート信号の代わりに送信してもよい。 The article management system may include an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The control device 920 or 1020 may transmit that the power supply from the uninterruptible power supply has been received to the management device 930 or 1030 instead of the reboot signal.
 (第5の実施の形態)
 続いて、第5の実施の形態について説明する。
(Fifth embodiment)
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described.
 第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システムでは、所定の電圧を印加した場合にロック機構70が解錠される例について示したが、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムでは、電圧の印加だけでは解錠せず、解錠させるための制御信号を合わせて受信した場合に解錠するロック機構を備える。 In the article management system according to the first embodiment, an example is shown in which the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked when a predetermined voltage is applied. However, in the article management system according to the present embodiment, only voltage application is performed. In this case, a lock mechanism is provided that is not unlocked but is unlocked when a control signal for unlocking is received together.
 以下では、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムのロック機構の構成を中心に説明する。本実施の形態に係る物品管理システムが備える他の構成要素は、第1の実施の形態などと同様である。 Hereinafter, the configuration of the lock mechanism of the article management system according to the present embodiment will be mainly described. Other components included in the article management system according to the present embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment.
 [構成]
 図59は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101の制御装置1120とロック機構1170との接続関係を示す図である。本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101は、第1の実施の形態などと同様に、開閉可能な筐体10の内部に収納される複数の物品2を管理するシステムである。図59に示すように、物品管理システム1101は、配線1110と、制御装置1120と、ロック機構1170と、開閉センサ80とを備える。図示しないが、物品管理システム1101は、さらに、管理装置30と、庫内カメラ40と、コードリーダ50と、カードリーダ60と、案内部90とを備える。
[Constitution]
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170 of the article management system 1101 according to the present embodiment. The article management system 1101 according to the present embodiment is a system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in the case 10 that can be opened and closed, as in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59, the article management system 1101 includes a wiring 1110, a control device 1120, a lock mechanism 1170, and an open / close sensor 80. Although not shown, the article management system 1101 further includes a management device 30, an internal camera 40, a code reader 50, a card reader 60, and a guide unit 90.
 図59には、制御装置1120とロック機構1170との各々の筐体10との位置関係が明らかになるように、筐体10を模式的に示している。具体的には、制御装置1120は、筐体10の外部に設置され、ロック機構1170は、筐体10の内部に設置されている。 FIG. 59 schematically illustrates the housing 10 so that the positional relationship between the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170 with respect to each housing 10 is clarified. Specifically, the control device 1120 is installed outside the housing 10, and the lock mechanism 1170 is installed inside the housing 10.
 配線1110は、制御装置1120とロック機構1170とを電気的かつ物理的に接続するケーブルである。本実施の形態では、配線1110は、2本の電源線1111及び1112と、制御線1113とを含んでいる。 The wiring 1110 is a cable that electrically and physically connects the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170. In this embodiment mode, the wiring 1110 includes two power supply lines 1111 and 1112 and a control line 1113.
 電源線1111及び1112は、ロック機構1170の電子錠71に所定の電圧(例えば12V)を供給するための配線である。電源線1111及び1112は制御装置1120の給電部25と電子錠71とを接続している。電源線1112には、給電部25と電子錠71との間にリレー回路1173(スイッチ)が挿入されている。なお、本実施の形態では、電源線1111と電源線1112との間には、電子錠71を解錠させるための所定の電圧が印加されている。 The power lines 1111 and 1112 are wires for supplying a predetermined voltage (for example, 12 V) to the electronic lock 71 of the lock mechanism 1170. The power lines 1111 and 1112 connect the power supply unit 25 of the control device 1120 and the electronic lock 71. A relay circuit 1173 (switch) is inserted between the power supply unit 25 and the electronic lock 71 in the power line 1112. In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage for unlocking the electronic lock 71 is applied between the power supply line 1111 and the power supply line 1112.
 制御線1113は、制御信号を伝送するための配線である。制御線1113は、制御装置1120の錠制御部1122と、ロック機構1170のデコード回路1174とに接続されている。 The control line 1113 is a wiring for transmitting a control signal. The control line 1113 is connected to the lock control unit 1122 of the control device 1120 and the decode circuit 1174 of the lock mechanism 1170.
 本実施の形態では、筐体10が専用品でなく、制御装置1120とロック機構1170とを既製品の筐体10に取り付けるため、配線1110が筐体10の外部に露出する。このため、悪意者によって配線1110の切断又は加工などが可能となる。例えば、悪意者は、電源線1111及び1112を切断し、所定の電圧を加えることで、不正に電子錠71を解錠することができる。本実施の形態では、この不正を防止するため、ロック機構1170は、リレー回路1173及びデコード回路1174を備え、制御装置1120から送信した制御信号に基づいて、電子錠71の解錠を行う。 In the present embodiment, the housing 10 is not a dedicated product, and the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170 are attached to the ready-made housing 10, so that the wiring 1110 is exposed to the outside of the housing 10. For this reason, the wiring 1110 can be cut or processed by a Service-to-Self. For example, the Service-to-Self can disconnect the power lines 1111 and 1112 and apply a predetermined voltage to unlock the electronic lock 71 illegally. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent this fraud, the lock mechanism 1170 includes a relay circuit 1173 and a decode circuit 1174, and unlocks the electronic lock 71 based on a control signal transmitted from the control device 1120.
 制御装置1120は、ロック機構1170を制御する。図59に示すように、制御装置1120は、錠制御部1122を備える。 The control device 1120 controls the lock mechanism 1170. As shown in FIG. 59, the control device 1120 includes a lock control unit 1122.
 錠制御部1122は、ロック機構1170を解錠するための制御信号(解錠信号)を生成する。具体的には、錠制御部1122は、照合結果が人物の一致を示す場合(すなわち、個人認証が成功した場合)に、解錠信号を生成する。錠制御部1122は、生成した解錠信号を、配線1110の制御線1113を介してロック機構1170のデコード回路1174に出力する。 The lock control unit 1122 generates a control signal (unlock signal) for unlocking the lock mechanism 1170. Specifically, the lock control unit 1122 generates an unlock signal when the collation result indicates that the person matches (that is, when the personal authentication is successful). The lock control unit 1122 outputs the generated unlock signal to the decode circuit 1174 of the lock mechanism 1170 via the control line 1113 of the wiring 1110.
 具体的には、錠制御部1122は、複数のビットからなるビットパターン1122bに基づいて変調した信号を解錠信号として生成して出力する。例えば、錠制御部1122は、ビットパターン1122bに基づいてハイ(H)とロー(L)とが変化する電圧信号を、解錠信号として制御線1113を介して出力する。 Specifically, the lock control unit 1122 generates and outputs a signal modulated based on the bit pattern 1122b including a plurality of bits as an unlock signal. For example, the lock control unit 1122 outputs a voltage signal that changes between high (H) and low (L) based on the bit pattern 1122b via the control line 1113 as an unlock signal.
 本実施の形態では、ビットパターン1122bは、錠制御部1122が備える記憶部1122aに記憶されている。ビットパターン1122bは、デコード回路1174の記憶部1174aに記憶されたビットパターン1174bと同じである。図59には、ビットパターン1174bの一例として、「11010010」で表される8ビットのパターンを示しているが、これに限らない。 In the present embodiment, the bit pattern 1122b is stored in the storage unit 1122a included in the lock control unit 1122. The bit pattern 1122b is the same as the bit pattern 1174b stored in the storage unit 1174a of the decode circuit 1174. FIG. 59 shows an 8-bit pattern represented by “11010010” as an example of the bit pattern 1174b, but is not limited thereto.
 ロック機構1170は、筐体10の開閉を制限する。図59に示すように、ロック機構1170は、電子錠71と、リレー回路1173と、デコード回路1174とを備える。また、図示していないが、ロック機構1170は、メス型鍵72を備えている。 The lock mechanism 1170 restricts the opening and closing of the housing 10. As shown in FIG. 59, the lock mechanism 1170 includes an electronic lock 71, a relay circuit 1173, and a decode circuit 1174. Although not shown, the lock mechanism 1170 includes a female key 72.
 電子錠71は、第1の実施の形態で示した電子錠71と同様に、所定の電圧が印加された場合に解錠し、かつ、電圧無印加の場合に施錠状態を維持する電子錠である。すなわち、電子錠71は、ノーマリオフ型の電子錠である。電子錠71は、筐体10の本体部11の内側面に固定されている。電圧が無印加の場合は、爪部71aが突出して、扉12に固定されたメス型鍵72の穴72a(図示せず)に挿入されることで、ロック機構1170は施錠される。所定の電圧が印加された場合には、爪部71aが保持筐体71b内に収納されて爪部71aとメス型鍵72とが係止しなくなるので、ロック機構1170が解錠される。 Similar to the electronic lock 71 shown in the first embodiment, the electronic lock 71 is an electronic lock that is unlocked when a predetermined voltage is applied and that maintains a locked state when no voltage is applied. is there. That is, the electronic lock 71 is a normally-off type electronic lock. The electronic lock 71 is fixed to the inner surface of the main body 11 of the housing 10. When no voltage is applied, the claw portion 71a protrudes and is inserted into the hole 72a (not shown) of the female key 72 fixed to the door 12, whereby the lock mechanism 1170 is locked. When a predetermined voltage is applied, the claw portion 71a is housed in the holding housing 71b and the claw portion 71a and the female key 72 are not locked, so that the lock mechanism 1170 is unlocked.
 リレー回路1173は、所定の電圧の電子錠71への印加及び無印加を切り替える回路である。リレー回路1173は、デコード回路1174によってオンオフが制御されるスイッチ1173aを有する。 The relay circuit 1173 is a circuit that switches between application and non-application of a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71. The relay circuit 1173 includes a switch 1173a that is controlled to be turned on / off by the decode circuit 1174.
 デコード回路1174は、制御装置1120から送信される制御信号をデコードし、デコードした制御信号が電子錠71の解錠を示す場合に、リレー回路1173に所定の電圧を電子錠71に印加させる。具体的には、デコード回路1174は、ビットパターン1174bを記憶する記憶部1174aを備える。デコード回路1174は、制御線1113を介して送信された制御信号を復調し、制御信号に含まれるビットパターンが、ビットパターン1174bに一致するか否かを判定する。 The decoding circuit 1174 decodes the control signal transmitted from the control device 1120, and causes the relay circuit 1173 to apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71 when the decoded control signal indicates the unlocking of the electronic lock 71. Specifically, the decode circuit 1174 includes a storage unit 1174a that stores a bit pattern 1174b. The decode circuit 1174 demodulates the control signal transmitted via the control line 1113, and determines whether or not the bit pattern included in the control signal matches the bit pattern 1174b.
 制御信号に含まれるビットパターンがビットパターン1174bに一致した場合、デコード回路1174は、リレー回路1173のスイッチ1173aをオンする。これにより、所定の電圧が電子錠71に印加されて、電子錠71が解錠される。 When the bit pattern included in the control signal matches the bit pattern 1174b, the decode circuit 1174 turns on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173. Thereby, a predetermined voltage is applied to the electronic lock 71 and the electronic lock 71 is unlocked.
 制御信号に含まれるビットパターンがビットパターン1174bに一致しない場合、デコード回路1174は、リレー回路1173のスイッチ1173aをオンしない。このため、不正な処理により、制御線1113に何らかの信号が加えられたとしても、ビットパターン1174bに一致しない限り、ロック機構1170は解錠しない。 When the bit pattern included in the control signal does not match the bit pattern 1174b, the decode circuit 1174 does not turn on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173. For this reason, even if any signal is added to the control line 1113 by an unauthorized process, the lock mechanism 1170 is not unlocked unless it matches the bit pattern 1174b.
 [動作]
 次に、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101の動作を説明する。
[Operation]
Next, the operation of the article management system 1101 according to this embodiment will be described.
 図60は、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101のロック機構1170が行う動作を示すフローチャートである。図60に示す処理は、例えば、図13に示す解錠処理(S30)を詳細化したものである。すなわち、制御装置1120から解錠信号を受信した場合に行われる。 FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an operation performed by the lock mechanism 1170 of the article management system 1101 according to this embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 60 is a detailed version of the unlocking process (S30) shown in FIG. That is, it is performed when an unlock signal is received from the control device 1120.
 ロック機構1170では、デコード回路1174が解錠信号を受信するまで待機する(S510でNo)。解錠信号を受信した場合(S510でYes)、デコード回路1174は、解錠信号をデコードすることで、解錠信号に含まれるビットパターンを取得する。デコード回路1174は、取得したビットパターンが記憶部1174aに記憶されたビットパターン1174bと一致するか否かを判定する(S512)。 The lock mechanism 1170 waits until the decode circuit 1174 receives the unlock signal (No in S510). When the unlock signal is received (Yes in S510), the decode circuit 1174 decodes the unlock signal to acquire the bit pattern included in the unlock signal. The decode circuit 1174 determines whether or not the acquired bit pattern matches the bit pattern 1174b stored in the storage unit 1174a (S512).
 ビットパターンが一致した場合(S512でYes)、すなわち、解錠信号が電子錠71の解錠を示す場合に、デコード回路1174は、リレー回路1173に所定の電圧を電子錠71に印加させる。具体的には、リレー回路1173のスイッチ1173aがオンされて、電子錠71に電圧が印加され、爪部71aが保持筐体71b内に収納されることで、ロック機構1170が解錠する(S514)。 When the bit patterns match (Yes in S512), that is, when the unlock signal indicates unlocking of the electronic lock 71, the decode circuit 1174 causes the relay circuit 1173 to apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71. Specifically, the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173 is turned on, a voltage is applied to the electronic lock 71, and the claw portion 71a is housed in the holding housing 71b, whereby the lock mechanism 1170 is unlocked (S514). ).
 ビットパターンが一致しない場合(S512でNo)、デコード回路1174は、リレー回路1173のスイッチ1173aをオンせず、オフ状態を維持する。このため、ロック機構1170は解錠されず、施錠状態が維持される(S516)。 If the bit patterns do not match (No in S512), the decode circuit 1174 does not turn on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173 and maintains the off state. For this reason, the lock mechanism 1170 is not unlocked and the locked state is maintained (S516).
 なお、ビットパターンが一致しない場合には、何らかの不正な処理が行われた可能性がある。このため、ロック機構1170は、筐体10の近傍に居る人物、又は、制御装置1120若しくは管理装置30にエラーを報知してもよい。例えば、ロック機構1170は、制御線1113を介して制御装置1120にエラーを通知してもよい。あるいは、ロック機構1170は、筐体10の内部で案内部90と接続されており、表示部91又は音声出力部92にエラー表示又は警告音などを出力させてもよい。 Note that if the bit patterns do not match, some unauthorized processing may have been performed. For this reason, the lock mechanism 1170 may notify the person in the vicinity of the housing 10 or the control device 1120 or the management device 30 of the error. For example, the lock mechanism 1170 may notify the controller 1120 of an error via the control line 1113. Alternatively, the lock mechanism 1170 may be connected to the guide unit 90 inside the housing 10 and cause the display unit 91 or the audio output unit 92 to output an error display or a warning sound.
 [効果など]
 以上のように、本実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101は、開閉可能な筐体10の内部に収納される複数の物品2を管理する物品管理システムであって、筐体10の内部に設置され、筐体10の開閉を制限するロック機構1170と、筐体10の外部に設置され、ロック機構1170を制御する制御装置1120と、ロック機構1170と制御装置1120とを電気的かつ物理的に接続する配線1110とを備えている。ロック機構1170は、所定の電圧が印加された場合に解錠し、かつ、電圧無印加の場合に施錠状態を維持する電子錠71と、所定の電圧の電子錠71への印加及び無印加を切り替えるリレー回路1173と、制御装置1120から送信される制御信号をデコードし、デコードした制御信号が電子錠71の解錠を示す場合に、リレー回路1173に所定の電圧を電子錠71に印加させるデコード回路1174とを有している。配線1110は、電子錠71に所定の電圧を供給するための電源線1111及び1112と、制御信号を伝送するための制御線1113とを含む。
[Effects, etc.]
As described above, the article management system 1101 according to the present embodiment is an article management system that manages a plurality of articles 2 housed in the openable / closable casing 10, and is installed in the casing 10. The lock mechanism 1170 that restricts the opening and closing of the housing 10, the control device 1120 that is installed outside the housing 10 and controls the lock mechanism 1170, and the lock mechanism 1170 and the control device 1120 are electrically and physically connected. Wiring 1110 to be connected is provided. The lock mechanism 1170 unlocks when a predetermined voltage is applied, and maintains the locked state when no voltage is applied, and applies and does not apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71. The relay circuit 1173 to be switched and the control signal transmitted from the control device 1120 are decoded. When the decoded control signal indicates the unlocking of the electronic lock 71, the relay circuit 1173 applies a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71. Circuit 1174. The wiring 1110 includes power supply lines 1111 and 1112 for supplying a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71, and a control line 1113 for transmitting a control signal.
 これにより、悪意者が配線1110を切断して外部から電子錠71に電圧を印加しようとしたとしても、リレー回路1173によって電子錠71には電圧が印加されない。このため、ロック機構1170は解錠されないので、筐体10に収納された物品2の盗難などを防止することができる。 Thus, even if a Service-to-Self disconnects the wiring 1110 and tries to apply a voltage to the electronic lock 71 from the outside, no voltage is applied to the electronic lock 71 by the relay circuit 1173. For this reason, since the locking mechanism 1170 is not unlocked, it is possible to prevent the article 2 stored in the housing 10 from being stolen.
 また、例えば、制御装置1120は、複数のビットからなるビットパターン1122bに基づいて変調した信号を解錠信号として出力する。 Also, for example, the control device 1120 outputs a signal modulated based on a bit pattern 1122b composed of a plurality of bits as an unlock signal.
 これにより、複数のビットからなるビットパターンを利用することで、解錠信号の複雑性を高めることができる。このため、ロック機構1170のセキュリティを高めることができ、物品2の保護レベルを高めることができる。 This makes it possible to increase the complexity of the unlock signal by using a bit pattern composed of a plurality of bits. For this reason, the security of the lock mechanism 1170 can be increased and the protection level of the article 2 can be increased.
 なお、本実施の形態では、解錠信号として、複数のビットからなるビットパターンに基づいて変調した信号を用いたがこれに限らない。例えば、解錠信号は、単発のパルス信号でもよい。 In the present embodiment, a signal modulated based on a bit pattern composed of a plurality of bits is used as the unlock signal, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the unlock signal may be a single pulse signal.
 (第5の実施の形態の変形例)
 以下では、第5の実施の形態の複数の変形例について説明する。なお、以下の変形例では、第5の実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点の説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a plurality of modifications of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the following modified example, differences from the fifth embodiment will be mainly described, and description of common points will be omitted or simplified.
 [第1の変形例]
 まず、第5の実施の形態の第1の変形例について、図61を用いて説明する。
[First Modification]
First, a first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
 図61は、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1201の制御装置1220とロック機構1270との接続関係を示す図である。本変形例に係る物品管理システム1201は、第5の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101と比較して、制御装置1120及びロック機構1170の代わりに、制御装置1220及びロック機構1270を備える点が相違する。 FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the control device 1220 and the lock mechanism 1270 of the article management system 1201 according to this modification. Compared with the article management system 1101 according to the fifth embodiment, the article management system 1201 according to this modification includes a control device 1220 and a lock mechanism 1270 instead of the control device 1120 and the lock mechanism 1170. Is different.
 制御装置1220は、錠制御部1222を備える。錠制御部1222は、乱数生成器1228を備える。 The control device 1220 includes a lock control unit 1222. The lock control unit 1222 includes a random number generator 1228.
 乱数生成器1228は、乱数を生成する第1乱数生成器の一例である。乱数生成器1228は、例えば、M系列乱数を生成するが、特に限らない。乱数生成器1228は、時間の経過と共に異なる乱数を生成する。例えば、乱数生成器1228は、1分以下の短い時間間隔で、異なる乱数を生成する。 The random number generator 1228 is an example of a first random number generator that generates random numbers. For example, the random number generator 1228 generates an M-sequence random number, but is not limited thereto. The random number generator 1228 generates different random numbers over time. For example, the random number generator 1228 generates different random numbers at short time intervals of 1 minute or less.
 錠制御部1222は、乱数生成器1228が生成する乱数に基づいてビットパターンを生成し、生成したビットパターンに基づいて変調した信号を解錠信号として出力する。ビットパターンは、複数のビットから構成され、ビット数は特に限られない。 The lock control unit 1222 generates a bit pattern based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1228, and outputs a signal modulated based on the generated bit pattern as an unlock signal. The bit pattern is composed of a plurality of bits, and the number of bits is not particularly limited.
 ロック機構1270は、デコード回路1274を備える。デコード回路1274は、乱数生成器1275を備える。 The lock mechanism 1270 includes a decode circuit 1274. The decoding circuit 1274 includes a random number generator 1275.
 乱数生成器1275は、乱数を生成する第2乱数生成器の一例である。乱数生成器1275は、制御装置1220の乱数生成器1228と同期されている。具体的には、乱数生成器1275は、乱数生成器1228と同じタイミングで同じ乱数を生成する。 The random number generator 1275 is an example of a second random number generator that generates random numbers. The random number generator 1275 is synchronized with the random number generator 1228 of the control device 1220. Specifically, the random number generator 1275 generates the same random number at the same timing as the random number generator 1228.
 デコード回路1274は、乱数生成器1275が生成する乱数に基づいて、解錠信号をデコードする。具体的には、デコード回路1274は、乱数生成器1275が生成する乱数に基づいてビットパターンを生成する。デコード回路1274は、生成したビットパターンと、解錠信号を復調することで得られるビットパターンとを比較する。 The decoding circuit 1274 decodes the unlock signal based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1275. Specifically, the decoding circuit 1274 generates a bit pattern based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1275. The decode circuit 1274 compares the generated bit pattern with a bit pattern obtained by demodulating the unlock signal.
 2つのビットパターンが一致した場合に、デコード回路1274は、リレー回路1173のスイッチ1173aをオンし、電子錠71に所定の電圧を印加させる。これにより、ロック機構1270が解錠される。2つのビットパターンが一致しない場合には、デコード回路1274は、リレー回路1173のスイッチ1173aをオンせずにオフ状態を維持する。これにより、ロック機構1270は解錠されない。 When the two bit patterns match, the decode circuit 1274 turns on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173 to apply a predetermined voltage to the electronic lock 71. Thereby, the lock mechanism 1270 is unlocked. If the two bit patterns do not match, the decode circuit 1274 maintains the off state without turning on the switch 1173a of the relay circuit 1173. Thereby, the lock mechanism 1270 is not unlocked.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1201では、例えば、制御装置1220は、乱数生成器1228を備え、乱数生成器1228が生成する乱数に基づいてビットパターンを生成し、生成したビットパターンに基づいて変調した信号を解錠信号として出力する。 As described above, in the article management system 1201 according to this modification, for example, the control device 1220 includes the random number generator 1228, generates a bit pattern based on the random number generated by the random number generator 1228, and generates the generated bit. A signal modulated based on the pattern is output as an unlock signal.
 これにより、乱数を用いることで、解錠信号の複雑性を高めることができ、ロック機構1270のセキュリティを高めることができる。 Thus, by using a random number, the complexity of the unlock signal can be increased, and the security of the lock mechanism 1270 can be increased.
 また、例えば、乱数生成器1228は、時間の経過と共に異なる乱数を生成し、デコード回路1274は、乱数生成器1228と同期された乱数生成器1275を有し、乱数生成器1275が生成する乱数に基づいて、解錠信号をデコードする。 Further, for example, the random number generator 1228 generates different random numbers over time, and the decoding circuit 1274 has a random number generator 1275 synchronized with the random number generator 1228, and generates random numbers generated by the random number generator 1275. Based on this, the unlock signal is decoded.
 これにより、乱数が時間の経過と共に変化するので、あるタイミングでの解錠信号のビットパターンが悪意者に知られたとしても、そのビットパターンは僅かな時間しか使えない。このため、悪意者によるロック機構1270の不正な解錠を抑制することができ、ロック機構1270のセキュリティを一層高めることができる。 Because of this, the random number changes over time, so even if the bit pattern of the unlock signal at a certain timing is known to the Service-to-Self, the bit pattern can be used only for a short time. For this reason, unauthorized unlocking of the lock mechanism 1270 by the Service-to-Self can be suppressed, and the security of the lock mechanism 1270 can be further enhanced.
 [第2の変形例]
 次に、第5の実施の形態の第2の変形例について、図62を用いて説明する。
[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
 図62は、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1301の制御装置1320とロック機構1170との接続関係を示す図である。本変形例に係る物品管理システム1301は、第5の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101と比較して、制御装置1120の代わりに制御装置1320を備える点が相違する。 FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the control device 1320 and the lock mechanism 1170 of the article management system 1301 according to this modification. The article management system 1301 according to the present modification is different from the article management system 1101 according to the fifth embodiment in that a control device 1320 is provided instead of the control device 1120.
 第5の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1101と同様に、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1301においても、制御装置1320とロック機構1170とを接続する配線1110が筐体10の外部に露出している。このため、悪意者による切断又は加工などの不正な行為が行われる虞がある。 Similar to the article management system 1101 according to the fifth embodiment, also in the article management system 1301 according to this modification, the wiring 1110 that connects the control device 1320 and the lock mechanism 1170 is exposed to the outside of the housing 10. ing. For this reason, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as cutting or processing by a Service-to-Self is performed.
 制御装置1320は、通知部1321を備える。通知部1321は、電子錠71の解錠を指示してから所定期間以内に、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が開けられたことが検知されない場合に、管理装置30にエラーを通知する。例えば、配線1110が切断された場合、錠制御部1122が解錠信号を送信したとしても、ロック機構1170は解錠されない。このため、筐体10が解錠されずに、開閉センサ80から開信号が制御装置1320に送信されない。したがって、解錠信号を出力して、通常であれば筐体10が開けられるはずであるのに筐体10が開けられない場合に、通知部1321は、管理装置30にエラーを通知する。これにより、管理装置30では、管理者に筐体10及び制御装置1320などの異常を伝えることができる。 The control device 1320 includes a notification unit 1321. The notification unit 1321 notifies the management device 30 of an error when the opening / closing sensor 80 does not detect that the housing 10 has been opened within a predetermined period after instructing the unlocking of the electronic lock 71. For example, when the wiring 1110 is disconnected, the lock mechanism 1170 is not unlocked even if the lock control unit 1122 transmits an unlock signal. For this reason, the casing 10 is not unlocked, and the open signal is not transmitted from the open / close sensor 80 to the control device 1320. Therefore, the notification unit 1321 notifies the management device 30 of an error by outputting an unlocking signal when the housing 10 cannot be opened although the housing 10 should normally be opened. As a result, the management device 30 can notify the administrator of the abnormality of the housing 10 and the control device 1320.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1301は、例えば、筐体10の開閉を検知する開閉センサ80を備え、制御装置1320は、電子錠71の解錠を指示してから所定期間以内に、開閉センサ80によって筐体10が開けられたことが検知されない場合に、管理装置30にエラーを通知する通知部1321を備える。 As described above, the article management system 1301 according to the present modification includes, for example, the opening / closing sensor 80 that detects opening / closing of the housing 10, and the control device 1320 instructs the unlocking of the electronic lock 71 for a predetermined period. The notification unit 1321 that notifies the management device 30 of an error when the opening / closing sensor 80 does not detect that the housing 10 has been opened is provided.
 これにより、制御装置1320及び筐体10などに異常が発生した場合に、管理装置30にエラーを通知することができる。 Thereby, when an abnormality occurs in the control device 1320, the casing 10, or the like, an error can be notified to the management device 30.
 なお、ロック機構1170は、第4の実施の形態と同様に、アライブ信号を制御装置1320に定期送信してもよい。例えば、ロック機構1170は、制御線1113を利用してアライブ信号を制御装置1320に送信する。悪意者によって配線1110が切断された場合には、アライブ信号が制御装置1320で受信できなくなる。制御装置1320では、所定期間内にアライブ信号を受信しなかった場合に、通知部1321は、管理装置30にエラーを通知してもよい。 Note that the lock mechanism 1170 may periodically transmit an alive signal to the control device 1320 as in the fourth embodiment. For example, the lock mechanism 1170 transmits an alive signal to the control device 1320 using the control line 1113. When the wiring 1110 is disconnected by a Service-to-Self, the alive signal cannot be received by the control device 1320. In the control device 1320, the notification unit 1321 may notify the management device 30 of an error when the alive signal is not received within a predetermined period.
 (変形例)
 ここで、物品管理システムの変形例について説明する。本変形例では、ユーザの通信端末を利用して、筐体10の開閉を行う前に購入処理(決済処理)を行う点が、上記の各実施の形態とは相違する。以下では、各実施の形態との相違点を中心に説明し、共通点の説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Modification)
Here, a modified example of the article management system will be described. This modification is different from the above embodiments in that a purchase process (payment process) is performed before opening / closing the housing 10 using a user's communication terminal. Hereinafter, differences from the respective embodiments will be mainly described, and description of common points will be omitted or simplified.
 [構成]
 図63は、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1401の構成を示すブロック図である。図63に示すように、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1401は、通信端末1410を備える。また、物品管理システム1401は、第1の実施の形態に係る物品管理システム1と比較して、カードリーダ60を備えない点が相違している。本変形例では、カードリーダ60の代わりに、コードリーダ50が人物情報の取得を行う取得部として機能する。
[Constitution]
FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an article management system 1401 according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 63, the article management system 1401 according to this modification includes a communication terminal 1410. Further, the article management system 1401 is different from the article management system 1 according to the first embodiment in that it does not include the card reader 60. In this modification, instead of the card reader 60, the code reader 50 functions as an acquisition unit that acquires personal information.
 なお、本明細書を通じて、筐体10と制御装置20とをあわせて(他の実施の形態、および、その変形例を含めて)、物品管理装置と称する。 Throughout this specification, the casing 10 and the control device 20 are collectively referred to as an article management device (including other embodiments and modifications thereof).
 通信端末1410は、スマートフォン、携帯電話などの携帯情報端末である。あるいは、通信端末1410は、パーソナルコンピュータ(PC)などの据置型の装置でもよい。図63に示すように、通信端末1410は、表示部1411と、制御部1412と、通信部1413とを備える。 The communication terminal 1410 is a portable information terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone. Alternatively, the communication terminal 1410 may be a stationary device such as a personal computer (PC). As illustrated in FIG. 63, the communication terminal 1410 includes a display unit 1411, a control unit 1412, and a communication unit 1413.
 表示部1411は、液晶表示装置又は有機EL表示装置などであり、マトリクス状に配置された複数の画素を備える。表示部1411は、制御部1412によって生成される画像及び映像などを表示する。具体的には、表示部1411は、物品2の購入画面又は予約画面などを表示する。表示部1411は、例えば、タッチパネルディスプレイであり、表示された各種画面は、ユーザによって操作可能である。 The display unit 1411 is a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, and includes a plurality of pixels arranged in a matrix. The display unit 1411 displays images and videos generated by the control unit 1412. Specifically, the display unit 1411 displays a purchase screen or a reservation screen for the article 2. The display unit 1411 is, for example, a touch panel display, and various displayed screens can be operated by the user.
 制御部1412は、通信端末1410の動作を制御する。制御部1412は、例えば、プログラムが格納された不揮発性メモリ、プログラムを実行するための一時的な記憶領域である揮発性メモリ、入出力ポート、プログラムを実行するプロセッサなどを有する。 The control unit 1412 controls the operation of the communication terminal 1410. The control unit 1412 includes, for example, a nonvolatile memory in which a program is stored, a volatile memory that is a temporary storage area for executing the program, an input / output port, and a processor that executes the program.
 制御部1412は、例えば、物品管理システム1401の動作プログラム(アプリケーションプログラム)を実行する。制御部1412は、当該動作プログラムを実行することで、物品2の選択画面、決済画面、解錠コード表示画面、エラー表示画面などを生成し、表示部1411に表示させる。なお、制御部1412は、ウェブブラウザを起動してもよく、表示部1411に表示させる各種画面は、管理装置30によって生成された画像であってもよい。 The control unit 1412 executes an operation program (application program) of the article management system 1401, for example. By executing the operation program, the control unit 1412 generates a selection screen, a settlement screen, an unlock code display screen, an error display screen, and the like of the article 2 and causes the display unit 1411 to display them. Note that the control unit 1412 may activate a web browser, and various screens displayed on the display unit 1411 may be images generated by the management device 30.
 通信部1413は、管理装置30の通信部37と通信を行うことで、各種情報などの送受信を行う。通信部1413は、無線通信又は有線通信を行う。通信部1413は、例えば、Wi-Fi(登録商標)又は、3G、4G若しくはLTEなどの通信規格に基づく無線通信を行う。 The communication unit 1413 transmits and receives various types of information by communicating with the communication unit 37 of the management device 30. The communication unit 1413 performs wireless communication or wired communication. For example, the communication unit 1413 performs wireless communication based on a communication standard such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark), 3G, 4G, or LTE.
 [動作]
 続いて、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1401の動作について、図64を用いて説明する。図64は、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1401の通信端末1410の動作を示すフローチャートである。
[Operation]
Next, the operation of the article management system 1401 according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the operation of the communication terminal 1410 of the article management system 1401 according to this modification.
 本変形例では、ユーザは、通信端末1410を操作することで、物品2の購入を行う。つまり、筐体10を開ける前に、物品2の購入を行う。具体的には、ユーザは、通信端末1410を操作することで、物品管理システム1401の動作プログラムを起動させる。なお、物品管理システム1401による物品2の購入用のウェブページにアクセスしてもよい。 In this modification, the user purchases the article 2 by operating the communication terminal 1410. That is, the article 2 is purchased before the housing 10 is opened. Specifically, the user activates the operation program of the article management system 1401 by operating the communication terminal 1410. Note that a web page for purchasing the article 2 by the article management system 1401 may be accessed.
 通信端末1410では、ユーザによる操作に基づいて、制御部1412が動作プログラムを起動する。制御部1412は、物品2の選択画面を生成して表示部1411に表示させる(S600)。具体的には、制御部1412は、筐体10内に収納されている複数の物品2の種別及び価格などを示す情報を管理装置30から取得し、取得した情報に基づいて選択画面を生成する。ユーザは、選択画面を見ながら希望する物品2を1つ以上選択する。 In the communication terminal 1410, the control unit 1412 starts an operation program based on an operation by the user. The control unit 1412 generates a selection screen for the article 2 and displays it on the display unit 1411 (S600). Specifically, the control unit 1412 acquires information indicating the types, prices, and the like of the plurality of articles 2 stored in the housing 10 from the management device 30, and generates a selection screen based on the acquired information. . The user selects one or more desired articles 2 while viewing the selection screen.
 制御部1412は、ユーザが選択した物品2の決済処理を行う(S602)。具体的には、選択された物品2の種別及び個数を示す情報を、通信部1413を介して管理装置30に送信する。管理装置30の課金部33では、通信端末1410から送信された情報に基づいて課金額を決定して、ユーザに課金する。なお、課金処理は、管理装置30ではなく、通信端末1410が行ってもよい。 The control unit 1412 performs a settlement process for the article 2 selected by the user (S602). Specifically, information indicating the type and number of selected articles 2 is transmitted to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 1413. The charging unit 33 of the management device 30 determines a charging amount based on information transmitted from the communication terminal 1410 and charges the user. The billing process may be performed by the communication terminal 1410 instead of the management device 30.
 なお、選択と同時に購入(決済)が完了してもよく、あるいは、制御部1412は、購入の確認画面を生成し、表示部1411には確認画面が表示されてもよい。また、クレジットカード又は銀行口座などの決済情報が予め登録されていない場合には、制御部1412は、この時点で登録画面を生成して、表示部1411に表示させてもよい。 Note that the purchase (settlement) may be completed simultaneously with the selection, or the control unit 1412 may generate a purchase confirmation screen and the display unit 1411 may display the confirmation screen. If payment information such as a credit card or a bank account is not registered in advance, the control unit 1412 may generate a registration screen at this time and display the registration screen on the display unit 1411.
 決済が完了した後、制御部1412は、選択した物品2を示す情報(物品2に固有の情報)と、通信端末1410の利用者(所有者)を示す人物情報(カード情報)とに基づいて、例えば、図65に示すように、QRコード(登録商標)1501などの識別情報を含む解錠コード表示画面1500を生成し、表示部1411に表示させる(S604)。当該識別情報は、筐体10のロック機構70の解錠に使用される情報である。なお、図65は、本変形例に係る解錠コード表示画面1500の一例を示す図である。 After the settlement is completed, the control unit 1412 is based on information indicating the selected item 2 (information unique to the item 2) and personal information (card information) indicating the user (owner) of the communication terminal 1410. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, an unlock code display screen 1500 including identification information such as QR code (registered trademark) 1501 is generated and displayed on the display unit 1411 (S604). The identification information is information used for unlocking the lock mechanism 70 of the housing 10. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the unlock code display screen 1500 according to the present modification.
 具体的には、ユーザは、表示部1411に表示されたQRコード(登録商標)1501を、筐体10のコードリーダ50に読み取らせる。これにより、制御部21の情報処理部23は、読み取ったQRコード(登録商標)1501に含まれる情報を、通信部26を介して管理装置30に送信する。管理装置30の照合部32では、QRコード(登録商標)1501に含まれる人物情報に基づいて個人認証を行う。 Specifically, the user causes the code reader 50 of the housing 10 to read the QR code (registered trademark) 1501 displayed on the display unit 1411. Thereby, the information processing unit 23 of the control unit 21 transmits the information included in the read QR code (registered trademark) 1501 to the management apparatus 30 via the communication unit 26. The verification unit 32 of the management device 30 performs personal authentication based on the personal information included in the QR code (registered trademark) 1501.
 なお、表示部1411に表示されるQRコード(登録商標)1501などの識別情報は、使用条件が制限された情報である。例えば、表示部1411に表示されてから所定期間(1分以内)にコードリーダ50に読み取らせない場合に消滅し、エラー表示画面などが表示されてもよい。 Note that identification information such as a QR code (registered trademark) 1501 displayed on the display unit 1411 is information with limited use conditions. For example, it may disappear when the code reader 50 cannot read it within a predetermined period (within 1 minute) after being displayed on the display unit 1411, and an error display screen or the like may be displayed.
 以降の処理は、第1の実施の形態と同様であり、個人認証が成功した場合には、ロック機構70が解錠されるので、ユーザは、購入した物品2を筐体10から取り出すことができる。ユーザは、取り出した物品2に付された識別表示51をコードリーダ50に読み取らせることにより、管理装置30では、購入された物品2とユーザが取り出した物品2とが一致しているか否かを判定することができる。 The subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment. When the personal authentication is successful, the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked, and the user can take out the purchased article 2 from the housing 10. it can. When the user causes the code reader 50 to read the identification display 51 attached to the taken-out article 2, the management apparatus 30 determines whether the purchased article 2 and the article 2 taken out by the user match. Can be determined.
 以上のように、本変形例に係る物品管理システム1401によれば、事前に購入処理を行わせることができるので、物品2の管理をより厳重にすることができる。また、例えば、不正な処理による管理者の損害の発生などを抑制することができる。また、カードリーダ60を備えなくてもよいので、構成をより簡略化することができる。また、庫内カメラ40も備えなくてもよくなるので、さらに構成を簡略化することができる。 As described above, according to the article management system 1401 according to the present modification, the purchase process can be performed in advance, so that the management of the article 2 can be made more strict. Further, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage to the administrator due to unauthorized processing. Further, since the card reader 60 need not be provided, the configuration can be further simplified. Moreover, since it becomes unnecessary to provide the internal camera 40, the configuration can be further simplified.
 なお、通信端末1410が据置型のコンピュータなどである場合、通信端末1410は、表示部1411の代わりに、QRコード(登録商標)1501を出力する出力部を備えてもよい。例えば、通信端末1410は、プリンタなどの出力装置にQRコード(登録商標)1501を出力してもよい。プリンタは、例えば、QRコード(登録商標)1501を紙に印刷する。ユーザは、紙に印刷されたQRコード(登録商標)1501をコードリーダ50にかざすことで、筐体10の解錠を行わせることができる。 When the communication terminal 1410 is a stationary computer or the like, the communication terminal 1410 may include an output unit that outputs a QR code (registered trademark) 1501 instead of the display unit 1411. For example, the communication terminal 1410 may output a QR code (registered trademark) 1501 to an output device such as a printer. For example, the printer prints QR code (registered trademark) 1501 on paper. The user can unlock the housing 10 by holding the QR code (registered trademark) 1501 printed on paper over the code reader 50.
 (他の実施の形態)
 以上、1つ又は複数の態様に係る物品管理システムについて、実施の形態に基づいて説明したが、本開示は、これらの実施の形態に限定されるものではない。本開示の主旨を逸脱しない限り、当業者が思いつく各種変形を本実施の形態に施したもの、及び、異なる実施の形態における構成要素を組み合わせて構築される形態も、本開示の範囲内に含まれる。
(Other embodiments)
Although the article management system according to one or more aspects has been described based on the embodiments, the present disclosure is not limited to these embodiments. Unless it deviates from the main point of this indication, the form which carried out various deformation | transformation which those skilled in the art thought to this embodiment, and the structure constructed | assembled combining the component in different embodiment is also included in the scope of this indication. It is.
 例えば、物品2は、弁当2a~2cには限られない。物品2は、筐体10に収納可能なものであればよい。具体的には、物品2は、魚、野菜、肉などの生鮮食料品、若しくは、飲料水、又は、冷凍食品などでもよい。あるいは、物品2は、筐体10の冷蔵機能又は冷凍機能などを必要としない物品でもよい。例えば、物品2は、パン、レトルト食品、お菓子などの食料品である。また、物品2は、食料品でなくてもよく、宝飾品、衣料品、本若しくは雑誌、または文房具などでもよい。 For example, the article 2 is not limited to the lunch boxes 2a to 2c. The article 2 may be anything that can be stored in the housing 10. Specifically, the article 2 may be fresh food such as fish, vegetables, meat, or drinking water or frozen food. Alternatively, the article 2 may be an article that does not require the refrigeration function or the freezing function of the housing 10. For example, the article 2 is a food product such as bread, retort food, and sweets. In addition, the article 2 may not be food, but may be jewelry, clothing, books or magazines, stationery, or the like.
 また、例えば、筐体10の開閉方式は、特に限定されない。横開き、縦開き、スライド式、観音開きなどでもよい。また、筐体10の開閉方式は、図42で示した個別筐体710と同様に、引き出し式でもよい。 Also, for example, the opening / closing method of the housing 10 is not particularly limited. Horizontal opening, vertical opening, sliding type, double doors, etc. may be used. Further, the opening / closing method of the housing 10 may be a pull-out type as in the case of the individual housing 710 shown in FIG.
 また、例えば、庫内カメラ40をコードリーダ50として利用してもよい。例えば、庫内カメラ40は、扉12の裏側に取り付けられており、扉12が閉じられている場合には、筐体10の内部を撮影し、扉12が開けられている場合には、コードリーダ50として機能してもよい。 Further, for example, the internal camera 40 may be used as the code reader 50. For example, the internal camera 40 is attached to the back side of the door 12, and when the door 12 is closed, the inside of the housing 10 is photographed, and when the door 12 is opened, the code is It may function as the reader 50.
 また、例えば、上記の実施の形態では、コードリーダ50及び案内部90を筐体10に取り付ける例について示したが、これに限らない。例えば、ユーザが所持するスマートフォン、携帯電話などの携帯情報端末が、コードリーダ50及び案内部90の少なくとも一方として機能してもよい。当該携帯情報端末は、例えば、個人認証用の識別カードとしての機能も有してもよい。 Further, for example, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the code reader 50 and the guide unit 90 are attached to the housing 10 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a portable information terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone possessed by the user may function as at least one of the code reader 50 and the guide unit 90. The mobile information terminal may also have a function as an identification card for personal authentication, for example.
 ここで、携帯情報端末を利用した場合のユーザの動作及び物品管理システム1の動作について、図4を参照しながら説明する。 Here, the operation of the user and the operation of the article management system 1 when using the portable information terminal will be described with reference to FIG.
 例えば、ユーザは、物品管理システムのアプリケーションプログラムを携帯情報端末に予めインストールしておく。ユーザは、携帯情報端末を操作することで、当該アプリケーションプログラムを起動し、購入予定の物品2(弁当)を選択する。ここで、アプリケーションプログラムの代わりに、ウェブページ上で物品2を選択してもよい。アプリケーションプログラム及びウェブページなどは、例えば、管理装置30によって作成され管理されている。なお、物品2の選択は任意であり、行われなくてもよい。 For example, the user installs an application program for the article management system in the portable information terminal in advance. The user activates the application program by operating the portable information terminal, and selects the item 2 (lunch) to be purchased. Here, the article 2 may be selected on the web page instead of the application program. Application programs, web pages, and the like are created and managed by the management device 30, for example. The selection of the article 2 is arbitrary and may not be performed.
 ユーザは、携帯情報端末をカードリーダ60にかざすことで、個人認証を行わせる(S1)。これにより、ロック機構70が解錠される(S2)ので、ユーザは筐体10を開けて、物品2を取り出す(S3)。このとき、ユーザは、筐体10(扉12)を閉じてもよい(S5)。 The user performs personal authentication by holding the portable information terminal over the card reader 60 (S1). Thereby, since the lock mechanism 70 is unlocked (S2), the user opens the housing 10 and takes out the article 2 (S3). At this time, the user may close the housing 10 (door 12) (S5).
 ユーザは、携帯情報端末のカメラを利用して、取り出した物品2のQRコード(登録商標)(識別表示51)を読み込む(S4)。携帯情報端末のディスプレイには、例えば、ユーザが取り出した物品2が購入対象のもので正しいかどうかなどの確認画面が表示される。確認画面には、物品2に関する情報と、当該情報を管理装置30に送信するための送信ボタンなどとが表示される。このとき、確認画面には、送信ボタンの代わりに、又は、送信ボタンに加えて、購入対象のもので正しいかどうかをユーザに選択させる選択ボタン(例えば、Yes/Noボタン)などが含まれてもよい。ユーザが送信ボタンを押すことにより、管理装置30に識別表示51に含まれる識別情報などが送信される。 The user reads the QR code (registered trademark) (identification display 51) of the taken-out article 2 using the camera of the portable information terminal (S4). On the display of the portable information terminal, for example, a confirmation screen is displayed as to whether or not the article 2 taken out by the user is correct for purchase. On the confirmation screen, information about the article 2 and a transmission button for transmitting the information to the management apparatus 30 are displayed. At this time, the confirmation screen includes a selection button (for example, a Yes / No button) that allows the user to select whether the purchase target is correct in place of or in addition to the transmission button. Also good. When the user presses the transmission button, the identification information included in the identification display 51 is transmitted to the management apparatus 30.
 その後、携帯情報端末のディスプレイには、課金情報などの案内情報が表示される。また、筐体10の庫内の個数と取り出した物品2の個数とが相違する場合などには、ディスプレイには、エラー画面が表示される。 After that, guidance information such as billing information is displayed on the display of the portable information terminal. In addition, when the number in the cabinet 10 is different from the number of articles 2 taken out, an error screen is displayed on the display.
 また、例えば、複数の物品2を筐体10の外部で検知する第2検知部として、RFID(Radio Frequency IDentifier)を利用してもよい。例えば、物品管理システムは、第2検知部として筐体10を含む所定範囲に通信範囲を有するRFIDリーダと、複数の物品2の各々に付されたRFIDとを備えてもよい。物品2に付されたRFIDが通信範囲内から出たことをRFIDリーダが検知することができる。 Further, for example, as a second detection unit that detects a plurality of articles 2 outside the housing 10, an RFID (Radio Frequency IDentifier) may be used. For example, the article management system may include an RFID reader having a communication range in a predetermined range including the housing 10 as the second detection unit, and an RFID attached to each of the plurality of articles 2. The RFID reader can detect that the RFID attached to the article 2 has come out of the communication range.
 また、例えば、上記の実施の形態では、予め人物リスト35に登録された人物(すなわち、特定人物)のみが物品2の取り出し(購入)を行うことができる例について示したが、これに限らない。例えば、認証処理などを行わず、不特定多数の人物が利用することができてもよい。あるいは、最初の利用時に、人物リスト35に登録することができてもよい。例えば、カードリーダ60がクレジットカードなどの決済用の情報を読み取り、読み取った情報を人物リスト35に登録してもよい。 For example, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which only a person (that is, a specific person) registered in the person list 35 in advance can take out (purchase) the article 2 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. . For example, an unspecified number of people may be able to use without performing authentication processing. Alternatively, it may be possible to register in the person list 35 at the first use. For example, the card reader 60 may read payment information such as a credit card and register the read information in the person list 35.
 また、例えば、上記の実施の形態では、物品管理システム1が制御装置20と管理装置30とを備える例について示したが、物品管理システム1は、管理装置30を備えなくてもよい。具体的には、制御装置20は、管理装置30が備える各構成要素を備えてもよい。例えば、制御装置20は、比較部31などを備える。なお、制御装置20は、通信部26を備えなくてよく、制御装置20内での信号の出力を行う出力部を備える。 Further, for example, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the article management system 1 includes the control device 20 and the management device 30 has been described, but the article management system 1 may not include the management device 30. Specifically, the control device 20 may include each component included in the management device 30. For example, the control device 20 includes a comparison unit 31 and the like. Note that the control device 20 does not need to include the communication unit 26 and includes an output unit that outputs a signal within the control device 20.
 また、例えば、物品管理システムを見守りシステムに応用することができる。具体的には、一人暮らしの家庭に物品管理システムを適用してもよい。例えば、家庭用冷蔵庫を筐体10として物品管理システムを適用する。冷蔵庫からの物品2の取り出しが行われている場合には、住人が通常通り生活を営んでいることが分かる。一方で、通常であれば、物品2の取り出しが行われる時間帯に物品2の取り出しが行われない場合、住人に何らかの異変(体調不良、不慮の事故など)が生じたと判定することができる。 Also, for example, the article management system can be watched and applied to the system. Specifically, the article management system may be applied to a family living alone. For example, the article management system is applied using a household refrigerator as the housing 10. When the article 2 is taken out from the refrigerator, it can be seen that the resident lives as usual. On the other hand, normally, when the article 2 is not taken out during the time when the article 2 is taken out, it can be determined that some kind of abnormality (physical condition, unexpected accident, etc.) has occurred in the resident.
 見守りシステムに応用する場合、管理装置30は、物品2の取り出し履歴を時系列データとして記憶する。管理装置30は、取り出し履歴に基づいて、住人の生活に異変が生じたと判定し、医療関係者又は管理者への通知を行う。これにより、例えば、住人の異変の早期発見に役立てることができる。 When applied to the watching system, the management device 30 stores the takeout history of the article 2 as time series data. Based on the retrieval history, the management device 30 determines that a change has occurred in the life of the resident, and notifies the medical personnel or the manager. Thereby, for example, it can be used for early detection of a resident's change.
 なお、このような場合、課金処理及び照合(個人認証)処理などは行わなくてもよい。つまり、物品管理システムは、課金部33及び照合部32などを備えなくてもよい。 In such a case, it is not necessary to perform charging processing and verification (personal authentication) processing. That is, the article management system may not include the billing unit 33 and the matching unit 32.
 また、上記の各実施の形態は、特許請求の範囲又はその均等の範囲において種々の変更、置き換え、付加、省略などを行うことができる。 Further, each of the above-described embodiments can be variously changed, replaced, added, omitted, etc. within the scope of the claims or an equivalent scope thereof.
 (他の実施の形態)
 発明者らは、本開示において、以下の態様についても、独立した態様であると認識している。
(Other embodiments)
In the present disclosure, the inventors recognize that the following aspects are also independent aspects.
 (第1の態様)
 開閉可能な筐体の内部に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理システムであって、前記筐体の内部に設置され、前記筐体の開閉を制限するロック機構と、前記筐体の外部に設置され、前記ロック機構を制御する制御装置と、前記ロック機構と前記制御装置とを電気的かつ物理的に接続する配線とを備えている。前記ロック機構は、所定の電圧が印加された場合に解錠し、かつ、電圧無印加の場合に施錠状態を維持する電子錠と、前記所定の電圧の前記電子錠への印加及び無印加を切り替えるリレー回路と、前記制御装置から送信される制御信号をデコードし、デコードした制御信号が前記電子錠の解錠を示す場合に、前記リレー回路に前記所定の電圧を前記電子錠に印加させるデコード回路とを有している。前記配線は、前記電子錠に前記所定の電圧を供給するための電源線と、前記制御信号を伝送するための制御線とを含んでいる。
(First aspect)
An article management system for managing one or more articles housed in an openable / closable casing, wherein the lock management mechanism is installed inside the casing and restricts opening / closing of the casing; A control device that is installed outside and controls the lock mechanism, and wiring that electrically and physically connects the lock mechanism and the control device. The locking mechanism unlocks when a predetermined voltage is applied, and maintains an unlocked state when no voltage is applied, and applies and does not apply the predetermined voltage to the electronic lock. A relay circuit to be switched, and a decoding unit that decodes a control signal transmitted from the control device and causes the relay circuit to apply the predetermined voltage to the electronic lock when the decoded control signal indicates unlocking of the electronic lock Circuit. The wiring includes a power supply line for supplying the predetermined voltage to the electronic lock and a control line for transmitting the control signal.
 (第2の態様)
 前記制御装置は、複数のビットからなるビットパターンに基づいて変調した信号を前記制御信号として出力する第1の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Second aspect)
The article management system according to the first aspect, wherein the control device outputs a signal modulated based on a bit pattern including a plurality of bits as the control signal.
 (第3の態様)
 前記制御装置は、第1乱数生成器を備え、当該第1乱数生成器が生成する乱数に基づいて前記ビットパターンを生成し、生成したビットパターンに基づいて変調した信号を前記制御信号として出力する第2の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Third aspect)
The control device includes a first random number generator, generates the bit pattern based on a random number generated by the first random number generator, and outputs a signal modulated based on the generated bit pattern as the control signal. The article management system according to the second aspect.
 (第4の態様)
 前記第1乱数生成器は、時間の経過と共に異なる乱数を生成し、前記デコード回路は、前記第1乱数生成器と同期された第2乱数生成器を有し、当該第2乱数生成器が生成する乱数に基づいて、前記制御信号をデコードする第3の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Fourth aspect)
The first random number generator generates different random numbers over time, and the decoding circuit includes a second random number generator synchronized with the first random number generator, and the second random number generator generates The article management system according to the third aspect, wherein the control signal is decoded based on a random number to be transmitted.
 (第5の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体の開閉を検知する開閉センサを備え、前記制御装置は、前記電子錠の解錠を指示してから所定期間以内に、前記開閉センサによって前記筐体が開けられたことが検知されない場合に、管理装置にエラーを通知する通知部を備える第1の態様から第4の態様までのいずれか1態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(5th aspect)
The article management system further includes an opening / closing sensor for detecting opening / closing of the casing, and the control device causes the casing to be opened by the opening / closing sensor within a predetermined period after instructing the unlocking of the electronic lock. The article management system according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, comprising a notification unit that notifies the management device of an error when it is not detected that the opening has been made.
 (第6の態様)
 開閉可能な筐体の内部に収納される1以上の物品を、前記筐体の内部で検知する第1検知部と、前記1以上の物品の少なくとも1つである対象物品を、前記筐体の外部で検知する第2検知部と、前記第1検知部による検知結果を示す第1検知情報、及び、前記第2検知部による検知結果を示す第2検知情報を出力する出力部とを備える物品管理システム。
(Sixth aspect)
A first detection unit that detects one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing inside the casing, and a target article that is at least one of the one or more articles Article comprising: a second detection unit that detects externally; an output unit that outputs first detection information indicating a detection result by the first detection unit; and second detection information indicating a detection result by the second detection unit Management system.
 (第7の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記第1検知情報と前記第2検知情報とに基づいて、前記筐体の開閉の前後における前記1以上の物品の増減数である第1個数と前記筐体の外部で前記第2検知部によって検知された物品の個数である第2個数との比較を行う比較部を備える第6の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Seventh aspect)
The article management system further includes, based on the first detection information and the second detection information, a first number that is an increase / decrease number of the one or more articles before and after opening / closing of the casing, The article management system according to the sixth aspect, further comprising a comparison unit that performs comparison with a second number that is the number of articles detected by the second detection unit.
 (第8の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体を開ける人物を示す人物情報を取得する取得部を備え、前記出力部は、さらに、前記人物情報を出力する第7の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Eighth aspect)
The article management system according to the seventh aspect, wherein the article management system further includes an acquisition unit that acquires person information indicating a person who opens the casing, and the output unit further outputs the person information.
 (第9の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、予め登録された1以上の人物を示す人物リストと、前記人物情報が示す人物とを照合し、人物の一致又は不一致を示す照合結果を出力する照合部を備える第8の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Ninth aspect)
The article management system further includes a collation unit that collates a person list indicating one or more persons registered in advance with a person indicated by the person information, and outputs a matching result indicating matching or mismatching of the persons. The article management system according to the eighth aspect.
 (第10の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体の開閉を制限するロック機構と、
 前記ロック機構を制御する錠制御部とを備え、前記錠制御部は、前記照合結果が人物の一致を示す場合に、前記ロック機構を解錠する第9の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Tenth aspect)
The article management system further includes a lock mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the housing;
A lock control unit that controls the lock mechanism, wherein the lock control unit unlocks the lock mechanism when the collation result indicates that the person matches.
 (第11の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体の内部に配置され、前記1以上の物品の少なくとも1つを個別に収納する1以上の個別収納スペースを形成する開閉式の1以上の個別筐体と、前記1以上の個別筐体の各々の開閉を制限する1以上の個別ロック機構と、前記1以上の個別ロック機構を制御する個別錠制御部とを備え、前記1以上の個別筐体の1つは、予め定められた人物に割り当てられ、
 前記個別錠制御部は、前記照合結果が前記予め定められた人物との一致を示す場合に、前記1以上の個別ロック機構のうち、前記予め定められた人物に割り当てられた個別筐体に対応する個別ロック機構を解錠する第9の態様または10の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Eleventh aspect)
The article management system further includes at least one openable / closable individual casing disposed inside the casing and forming at least one individual storage space for individually storing at least one of the one or more articles. And one or more individual lock mechanisms for restricting the opening and closing of each of the one or more individual casings, and an individual lock control unit for controlling the one or more individual lock mechanisms. Is assigned to a predetermined person,
The individual lock control unit corresponds to an individual case assigned to the predetermined person among the one or more individual lock mechanisms when the collation result indicates a match with the predetermined person. The article management system according to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, wherein the individual locking mechanism is unlocked.
 (第12の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記人物情報が示す人物に、前記1以上の物品の少なくとも1つの対価を課金する課金部を備える第8の態様から第11の態様までのいずれか1つに記載の物品管理システム。
(Twelfth aspect)
The article management system according to any one of the eighth to eleventh aspects, further comprising a billing unit that charges at least one consideration of the one or more articles to a person indicated by the person information. Goods management system.
 (第13の態様)
 前記課金部は、前記比較部による比較結果が前記第1個数と前記第2個数との一致を示す場合に、前記対象物品の対価を課金する第12の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(13th aspect)
The article management system according to a twelfth aspect, wherein the billing unit charges the price of the target article when a comparison result by the comparison unit indicates that the first number matches the second number.
 (第14の態様)
 前記課金部は、前記比較部による比較結果が前記第1個数と前記第2個数との不一致を示す場合に、前記1以上の物品のうち最も価格が高い物品の価格に、前記第1個数と前記第2個数とのうち大きい方の個数を乗じた値を、前記対価として課金する第12の態様または第13の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(14th aspect)
When the comparison result by the comparison unit indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number, the billing unit sets the first number and the price of the highest priced item among the one or more items. The article management system according to the twelfth aspect or the thirteenth aspect, in which a value obtained by multiplying the larger one of the second numbers is charged as the consideration.
 (第15の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記比較部による比較結果が前記第1個数と前記第2個数との不一致を示す場合に、前記人物に報知する報知部を備える第12の態様から第14の態様までのいずれか1つに記載の物品管理システム。
(15th aspect)
The article management system further includes a notification unit that notifies the person when a comparison result by the comparison unit indicates a mismatch between the first number and the second number. The article management system according to any one of the above.
 (第16の態様)
 前記第1検知部は、前記筐体の内部を撮影する1以上のカメラである第7の態様から第15の態様までのいずれか1つに記載の物品管理システム。
(Sixteenth aspect)
The said 1st detection part is an article | item management system as described in any one from the 7th aspect to the 15th aspect which is one or more cameras which image | photograph the inside of the said housing | casing.
 (第17の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体の内部で、かつ、前記1以上のカメラの撮影範囲内に配置され、前記撮影範囲の死角を映す鏡を備える第16の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(17th aspect)
The article management system according to the sixteenth aspect, further comprising a mirror that is disposed inside the casing and within a photographing range of the one or more cameras and reflects a blind spot of the photographing range. .
 (第18の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記1以上の物品の各々に付された、所定色若しくは所定形状のマーカー又は反射材を備える第16の態様又は第17の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(18th aspect)
The article management system according to the sixteenth aspect or the seventeenth aspect, further comprising a marker or a reflecting material having a predetermined color or a predetermined shape attached to each of the one or more articles.
 (第19の態様)
 前記第1検知部は、前記筐体が開けられる前、又は、前記筐体が開けられた直後に前記筐体の内部を撮影することで、第1庫内画像を生成し、前記筐体が閉じられた後に前記筐体の内部を撮影することで、第2庫内画像を生成し、前記出力部は、前記第1庫内画像及び前記第2庫内画像を前記第1検知情報として出力し、
 前記比較部は、前記第1庫内画像及び前記第2庫内画像の各々を画像処理することで、前記第1個数を計数する第16の態様から第18の態様までのいずれか1つに記載の物品管理システム。
(19th aspect)
The first detector generates a first interior image by photographing the inside of the casing before the casing is opened or immediately after the casing is opened. The second interior image is generated by photographing the inside of the housing after being closed, and the output unit outputs the first interior image and the second interior image as the first detection information. And
The comparing unit performs any one of the sixteenth aspect to the eighteenth aspect for counting the first number by performing image processing on each of the first internal image and the second internal image. The article management system described.
 (第20の態様)
 前記第1検知部は、前記1以上の物品の各々に着脱自在に取り付けられる1以上の着脱式センサを有する第7の態様から第15の態様までのいずれか1つに記載の物品管理システム。
(20th aspect)
The article management system according to any one of the seventh to fifteenth aspects, wherein the first detection unit includes one or more detachable sensors that are detachably attached to each of the one or more articles.
 (第21の態様)
 前記1以上の着脱式センサの各々は、対応する物品の少なくとも一部を挟持する挟持部を有し、前記挟持部が互いに接触した場合に通電することで、前記対応する物品の脱離を検知する第20の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(21st aspect)
Each of the one or more detachable sensors has a holding part that holds at least a part of the corresponding article, and detects the detachment of the corresponding article by energizing when the holding parts come into contact with each other. The article management system according to the twentieth aspect.
 (第22の態様)
 前記1以上の着脱式センサの各々は、一辺を軸として互いに回動自在に組み合わされ、一方が、対応する物品に載置される2枚の板部を有し、前記2枚の板部が互いに接触した場合に通電することで、前記対応する物品の脱離を検知する第20の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Twenty-second aspect)
Each of the one or more detachable sensors is rotatably combined with one side as an axis, and one of the two or more detachable sensors has two plate portions placed on a corresponding article, and the two plate portions are The article management system according to the twentieth aspect, wherein the detachment of the corresponding article is detected by energizing when they contact each other.
 (第23の態様)
 前記第1検知部は、さらに、前記1以上の着脱式センサを支持する支持板を有する第20の態様から第22の態様までのいずれかひとつに記載の物品管理システム。
(23rd aspect)
The said 1st detection part is an article | item management system as described in any one from the 20th aspect to the 22nd aspect which has a support plate which supports the said 1 or more detachable sensor further.
 (第24の態様)
 前記1以上の物品は、前記筐体の内部で積み重ねられて収納され、前記第1検知部は、積み重ねられた前記1以上の物品のうち最上段に位置する物品の高さを検知する第7の態様から第15の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(24th aspect)
The one or more articles are stacked and stored inside the casing, and the first detection unit detects a height of an article positioned at the top of the one or more stacked articles. The article management system according to any one of the above aspects to the fifteenth aspect.
 (第25の態様)
 前記第1検知部は、前記1以上の物品の重量を検知する第7の態様から第15の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(25th aspect)
The article management system according to any one of the seventh to fifteenth aspects, wherein the first detection unit detects the weight of the one or more articles.
 (第26の態様)
 前記筐体の内部には、前記1以上の物品を個別に収納する1以上の個別収納スペースが設けられ、前記第1検知部は、前記個別収納スペース毎に配置された、対応する個別収納スペースに配置される物品を検知する1以上のセンサを有する第7の態様から第15の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(26th aspect)
In the housing, one or more individual storage spaces for individually storing the one or more articles are provided, and the first detection unit is arranged for each individual storage space. The article management system according to any one of the seventh to fifteenth aspects, which includes one or more sensors that detect articles arranged in the area.
 (第27の態様)
 前記第2検知部は、前記1以上の物品の各々に付された識別表示を読み取るコードリーダである第7の態様から第26の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(27th aspect)
The article management system according to any one of the seventh aspect to the twenty-sixth aspect, wherein the second detection unit is a code reader that reads an identification display attached to each of the one or more articles.
 (第28の態様)
 前記識別表示は、バーコード又は二次元コードである第27の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(28th aspect)
The article management system according to the twenty-seventh aspect, wherein the identification display is a barcode or a two-dimensional code.
 (第29の態様)
 前記第2検知部は、前記対象物品が前記筐体の内部に収納された姿勢と同じ姿勢である場合に、前記対象物品に付された識別表示を読み取り可能となるような検知範囲を有する第27の態様又は第28の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(29th aspect)
The second detection unit has a detection range in which the identification display attached to the target article can be read when the target article has the same attitude as the attitude stored in the housing. The article management system according to 27th aspect or 28th aspect.
 (第30の態様)
 前記識別表示は、付された物品に固有の情報であり、前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記第2検知部が同一の識別表示を複数回読み取った場合に、前記人物に報知する報知部を備える第27の態様から第29の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(Thirty aspect)
The identification display is information unique to the attached article, and the article management system further includes a notification unit that notifies the person when the second detection unit reads the same identification display a plurality of times. The article management system according to any one of the twenty-seventh aspect to the twenty-ninth aspect.
 (第31の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体を開ける人物に前記対象物品を案内する案内部を備える第7の態様から第30の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(Thirty-first aspect)
The article management system according to any one of the seventh to thirty aspects, further comprising a guide unit that guides the target article to a person who opens the casing.
 (第32の態様)
 前記案内部は、前記対象物品の収納位置を案内する案内情報を表示する表示部を有する第31の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Thirty-second aspect)
The article management system according to the thirty-first aspect, wherein the guide unit includes a display unit that displays guidance information for guiding a storage position of the target article.
 (第33の態様)
 前記案内部は、前記対象物品の収納位置を案内する案内情報を音声として出力する音声出力部を有する第31の態様又は第32の態様に記載の物品管理システム。
(Thirty-third aspect)
The article management system according to the thirty-first or thirty-second aspect, wherein the guide unit includes a voice output unit that outputs guidance information for guiding a storage position of the target article as a voice.
 (第34の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、前記出力部を備える制御装置と、前記比較部を備える管理装置とを備え、前記出力部は、無線通信又は有線通信により、前記第1検知情報及び前記第2検知情報を前記管理装置に送信することで、前記第1検知情報及び前記第2検知情報を前記比較部に出力する第7の態様から第33の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(34th aspect)
The article management system includes a control device including the output unit and a management device including the comparison unit, and the output unit receives the first detection information and the second detection information by wireless communication or wired communication. The article management system according to any one of the seventh aspect to the 33rd aspect, in which the first detection information and the second detection information are output to the comparison unit by being transmitted to the management device.
 (第35の態様)
 前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体を備える第6の態様から第34の態様までのいずれか一つに記載の物品管理システム。
(35th aspect)
The article management system according to any one of the sixth to thirty-fourth aspects further comprising the housing.
 (第36の態様)
 開閉可能な筐体の内部において、予め定められた位置に収納される1以上の物品を、前記筐体の内部で検知する検知部と、前記検知部による検知結果を示す検知情報を出力する出力部とを備え、前記出力部は、前記1以上の物品の少なくとも1つである対象物品が収納された位置から移動されたことを前記検知部が検知した場合に、前記対象物品の位置を示す位置情報を前記検知情報として出力する物品管理システム。
(Thirty-sixth aspect)
A detection unit that detects one or more articles stored in a predetermined position inside the case that can be opened and closed, and an output that outputs detection information indicating a detection result by the detection unit. And the output unit indicates the position of the target article when the detection unit detects that the target article, which is at least one of the one or more articles, has been moved from the stored position. An article management system that outputs position information as the detection information.
 本開示は、簡単な構成で複数の物品を管理することができる汎用性の高い物品管理システム、物品管理装置、管理装置および物品管理方法として利用でき、例えば、自動販売システムなどに利用することができる。 The present disclosure can be used as a highly versatile article management system, an article management apparatus, a management apparatus, and an article management method that can manage a plurality of articles with a simple configuration. For example, the present disclosure can be used in a vending system. it can.
1,701,801,901,1001,1101,1201,1301,1401 物品管理システム
2 物品
2a,2b,2c 弁当
3 ユーザ
10,10a 筐体
11 本体部
11a 収納空間
12 扉
13,13a,13b 棚材
14 温度調整部
15 電源コード
20,720,820,920,1020,1120,1220,1320 制御装置
21,921,1021,1412 制御部
22,922,1022,1122,1222 錠制御部
23,823,923 情報処理部
24 受電部
25 給電部
26,37,1413 通信部
30,730,830,930,1030 管理装置
31 比較部
32,732 照合部
33 課金部
34,1122a,1174a 記憶部
35,735 人物リスト
36 価格リスト
40 庫内カメラ(第1検知部)
41 撮影範囲
42 鏡
43 範囲
44 マーカー
50 コードリーダ(第2検知部)
51 識別表示
52 ラベル
53 検知範囲
60 カードリーダ(取得部)
70,1170,1270 ロック機構
71,771 電子錠
71a,771a 爪部
71b,771b 保持筐体
72 メス型鍵
72a 穴
73 接続ケーブル
80 開閉センサ
90 案内部
91,1411 表示部
92 音声出力部
140,240,340 庫内センサユニット
141,341 支持板
142 電極部
143,243 着脱式センサ
143a クリップ本体
143b 挟持部
143c 導電部
143d,343a ガイド部
144,344 配線
243a,243b,343b 板部
243c 軸部
342 レール部
343 センサ部
440,841,842,843 重量センサ
540 個別収納ユニット
541 フィルム本体
542 貫通孔
543 接触式センサ
610 個別収納棚
611,711 枠体部
613 棚部
613a,713 個別収納スペース
640 個別センサ
691 発光部
710 個別筐体
712 引き出し部
714 把持部
727 個別錠制御部
770 個別ロック機構
772 凹部
831 特定部
836 収納位置テーブル
938,1038 判定部
1010 温度センサ
1110 配線
1111,1112 電源線
1113 制御線
1122b,1174b ビットパターン
1173 リレー回路
1173a スイッチ
1174,1274 デコード回路
1228,1275 乱数生成器
1321 通知部
1410 通信端末
1500 解錠コード表示画面
1501 QRコード(登録商標)
1,701,801,901,1001,1101,1201,1301,1401 Goods management system 2 Goods 2a, 2b, 2c Lunch box 3 User 10, 10a Case 11 Main body 11a Storage space 12 Doors 13, 13a, 13b Shelf 14 Temperature adjuster 15 Power cord 20, 720, 820, 920, 1020, 1120, 1220, 1320 Controller 21, 921, 1021, 1412 Controller 22, 922, 1022, 1122, 1222 Lock controller 23, 823, 923 Information processing unit 24 Power receiving unit 25 Power feeding unit 26, 37, 1413 Communication unit 30, 730, 830, 930, 1030 Management device 31 Comparison unit 32, 732 Verification unit 33 Charging unit 34, 1122a, 1174a Storage unit 35, 735 Person list 36 Price List 40 Inside Camera (First Detection Unit)
41 Shooting range 42 Mirror 43 Range 44 Marker 50 Code reader (second detection unit)
51 Identification Display 52 Label 53 Detection Range 60 Card Reader (Acquisition Unit)
70, 1170, 1270 Lock mechanism 71, 771 Electronic lock 71a, 771a Claw part 71b, 771b Holding housing 72 Female key 72a Hole 73 Connection cable 80 Opening / closing sensor 90 Guide part 91, 1411 Display part 92 Audio output part 140, 240 , 340 Inside sensor unit 141, 341 Support plate 142 Electrode part 143, 243 Detachable sensor 143a Clip body 143b Holding part 143c Conductive part 143d, 343a Guide part 144, 344 Wiring 243a, 243b, 343b Plate part 243c Shaft part 342 Rail 343 Sensor unit 440, 841, 842, 843 Weight sensor 540 Individual storage unit 541 Film body 542 Through hole 543 Contact sensor 610 Individual storage shelf 611, 711 Frame body 613 Shelves 613a, 713 Individual storage space 64 Individual sensor 691 Light emitting unit 710 Individual housing 712 Drawer 714 Gripping unit 727 Individual lock control unit 770 Individual lock mechanism 772 Recess 831 Specific unit 836 Storage position table 938, 1038 Judgment unit 1010 Temperature sensor 1110 Wiring 1111, 1112 Power line 1113 Control Line 1122b, 1174b Bit pattern 1173 Relay circuit 1173a Switch 1174, 1274 Decoding circuit 1228, 1275 Random number generator 1321 Notification unit 1410 Communication terminal 1500 Unlock code display screen 1501 QR code (registered trademark)

Claims (11)

  1.  電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理システムであって、
     前記筐体と共通の電力を受ける受電部と、
     前記共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する送信部と、
     前記受電信号を受信し、受信した前記受電信号に基づいて前記共通の電力の遮断を判定する判定部とを備える
     物品管理システム。
    An article management system that manages one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing that receives power supply,
    A power receiving unit that receives power common to the housing;
    A transmission unit for transmitting a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the common power;
    An article management system comprising: a determination unit that receives the power reception signal and determines the interruption of the common power based on the received power reception signal.
  2.  前記送信部は、前記受電部が前記共通の電力を受けている期間、定期的に前記受電信号を送信し、
     前記判定部は、所定期間、前記受電信号を受信しなかった場合に、前記共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する
     請求項1に記載の物品管理システム。
    The transmission unit periodically transmits the power reception signal while the power reception unit receives the common power,
    The article management system according to claim 1, wherein the determination unit determines that the common power is cut off when the power reception signal is not received for a predetermined period.
  3.  前記送信部は、前記受電部による前記共通の電力の受電が停止した後に再開した場合のみ、前記受電信号を送信し、
     前記判定部は、前記受電信号を受信した場合に、前記共通の電力が遮断されたと判定する
     請求項1に記載の物品管理システム。
    The transmission unit transmits the power reception signal only when receiving the common power by the power reception unit is stopped and then restarted,
    The article management system according to claim 1, wherein the determination unit determines that the common power is cut off when the power reception signal is received.
  4.  前記受電部は、外部から電力を、前記共通の電力として受け、
     前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記受電部が受けた電力を前記筐体に供給する給電部を備える
     請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の物品管理システム。
    The power receiving unit receives power from the outside as the common power,
    The article management system according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the article management system further includes a power feeding unit that supplies power received by the power receiving unit to the housing.
  5.  前記物品管理システムは、さらに、
     前記筐体の開閉を制限するロック機構と、
     前記ロック機構を制御する錠制御部とを備え、
     前記錠制御部は、前記判定部によって前記共通の電力が遮断されたと判定された場合に、前記ロック機構の解錠を禁止する
     請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の物品管理システム。
    The article management system further includes:
    A lock mechanism for restricting opening and closing of the housing;
    A lock control unit for controlling the lock mechanism,
    The article management system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the lock control unit prohibits unlocking of the lock mechanism when the determination unit determines that the common power is cut off.
  6.  前記ロック機構は、所定の電圧が印加された場合に解錠し、かつ、電圧無印加の場合に施錠状態を維持する電子錠を有する
     請求項5に記載の物品管理システム。
    The article management system according to claim 5, wherein the lock mechanism includes an electronic lock that unlocks when a predetermined voltage is applied and maintains a locked state when no voltage is applied.
  7.  前記物品管理システムは、さらに、前記筐体内部の温度を測定する温度測定部を備え、
     前記錠制御部は、前記判定部によって前記共通の電力が遮断されたと判定された場合において、(i)前記共通の電力が遮断されたと推定される推定時刻以降で前記温度測定部によって測定された温度が所定の範囲外である場合に、前記ロック機構の解錠を禁止し、(ii)前記推定時刻以降で前記温度測定部によって測定された温度が前記所定の範囲内を維持している場合に、前記ロック機構の解錠を禁止しない
     請求項5又は6に記載の物品管理システム。
    The article management system further includes a temperature measurement unit that measures the temperature inside the housing.
    When the determination unit determines that the common power is cut off, the lock control unit is measured by the temperature measurement unit after the estimated time when (i) the common power is estimated to be cut off. When the temperature is out of the predetermined range, the unlocking of the lock mechanism is prohibited, and (ii) the temperature measured by the temperature measuring unit after the estimated time is maintained within the predetermined range The article management system according to claim 5 or 6, wherein unlocking of the lock mechanism is not prohibited.
  8.  電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理装置であって、
     前記筐体と共通の電力を受ける受電部と、
     前記共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する送信部とを有する
     物品管理装置。
    An article management device that manages one or more articles stored in an openable / closable casing that receives power supply,
    A power receiving unit that receives power common to the housing;
    An article management apparatus comprising: a transmission unit that transmits a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the common power.
  9.  受電部を有する物品管理装置と接続される管理装置であって、
     前記物品管理装置の前記受電部が受けた電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を受信する受信部と、
     受信した前記受電信号に基づいて前記電力の遮断を判定する判定部とを備えた
    管理装置。
    A management device connected to an article management device having a power receiving unit,
    A reception unit that receives a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the power received by the power reception unit of the article management apparatus;
    A management device comprising: a determination unit that determines interruption of the power based on the received power reception signal.
  10.  電力供給を受ける開閉可能な筐体を備え、前記筐体に収納される1以上の物品を管理する物品管理装置を用いた物品管理方法であって、
     前記筐体と共通の電力を受け、
     前記共通の電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を送信する
    物品管理方法。
    An article management method using an article management apparatus that includes an openable / closable casing for receiving power supply and manages one or more articles stored in the casing,
    Receives the same power as the case,
    An article management method for transmitting a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the common power.
  11.  受電部を有する物品管理装置と接続される管理装置を用いた物品管理方法であって、
     前記物品管理装置の前記受電部が受けた電力の受電状態を示す受電信号を受信し、
     受信した前記受電信号に基づいて前記電力の遮断を判定する
    物品管理方法。
    An article management method using a management apparatus connected to an article management apparatus having a power receiving unit,
    Receiving a power reception signal indicating a power reception state of the power received by the power reception unit of the article management apparatus;
    An article management method for determining interruption of the power based on the received power reception signal.
PCT/JP2018/002739 2017-01-31 2018-01-29 Article management system, article management device, management device, and article management method WO2018143126A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-016110 2017-01-31
JP2017016151A JP2020055650A (en) 2017-01-31 2017-01-31 Article control system
JP2017016110A JP2020055649A (en) 2017-01-31 2017-01-31 Article management system
JP2017-016087 2017-01-31
JP2017016087A JP2020057027A (en) 2017-01-31 2017-01-31 Article management system
JP2017-016151 2017-01-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018143126A1 true WO2018143126A1 (en) 2018-08-09

Family

ID=63039656

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/002739 WO2018143126A1 (en) 2017-01-31 2018-01-29 Article management system, article management device, management device, and article management method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018143126A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111523348A (en) * 2019-02-01 2020-08-11 百度(美国)有限责任公司 Information generation method and device and equipment for man-machine interaction
JPWO2022024774A1 (en) * 2020-07-30 2022-02-03
JP7269424B1 (en) 2022-09-22 2023-05-08 PayPay株式会社 Portable terminal, information processing method and information processing program

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5531108U (en) * 1978-08-14 1980-02-28
JPH06195549A (en) * 1992-06-08 1994-07-15 Toshimitsu Ito Automatic vending machine for constant-temperature storage food
JP2002267335A (en) * 2001-03-07 2002-09-18 Sharp Corp Containing compartment
JP2012244879A (en) * 2011-05-24 2012-12-10 Panasonic Corp Power outage monitoring system, control device, server device, and power outage monitoring program
JP2016005417A (en) * 2014-06-19 2016-01-12 株式会社Nttドコモ Power controller and power control method
US20160113422A1 (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-04-28 Leer, Inc. Ice merchandiser with on-product financial payment system

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5531108U (en) * 1978-08-14 1980-02-28
JPH06195549A (en) * 1992-06-08 1994-07-15 Toshimitsu Ito Automatic vending machine for constant-temperature storage food
JP2002267335A (en) * 2001-03-07 2002-09-18 Sharp Corp Containing compartment
JP2012244879A (en) * 2011-05-24 2012-12-10 Panasonic Corp Power outage monitoring system, control device, server device, and power outage monitoring program
JP2016005417A (en) * 2014-06-19 2016-01-12 株式会社Nttドコモ Power controller and power control method
US20160113422A1 (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-04-28 Leer, Inc. Ice merchandiser with on-product financial payment system

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111523348A (en) * 2019-02-01 2020-08-11 百度(美国)有限责任公司 Information generation method and device and equipment for man-machine interaction
JP2020191062A (en) * 2019-02-01 2020-11-26 バイドゥ ユーエスエイ エルエルシーBaidu USA LLC Method and device for generating information and device for human-computer interaction
JP7030092B2 (en) 2019-02-01 2022-03-04 バイドゥ ユーエスエイ エルエルシー Information generation method and equipment and equipment for human-computer interaction
US11328568B2 (en) 2019-02-01 2022-05-10 Baidu.Com Times Technology (Beijing) Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for generating information, and device for human-computer interaction
CN111523348B (en) * 2019-02-01 2024-01-05 百度(美国)有限责任公司 Information generation method and device and equipment for man-machine interaction
JPWO2022024774A1 (en) * 2020-07-30 2022-02-03
WO2022024774A1 (en) * 2020-07-30 2022-02-03 株式会社J-オイルミルズ Food disposal timing management device, food disposal timing management system, and food disposal timing management method
JP7224547B2 (en) 2020-07-30 2023-02-17 株式会社J-オイルミルズ Food waste time management device, food waste time management system, and food waste time management method
JP7269424B1 (en) 2022-09-22 2023-05-08 PayPay株式会社 Portable terminal, information processing method and information processing program
JP2024046307A (en) * 2022-09-22 2024-04-03 PayPay株式会社 Portable terminal, information processing method, and information processing program

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102001806B1 (en) Smart vending machine with product selection after opening door
US9500006B2 (en) Easily managed electronic cabinet lock
WO2018143126A1 (en) Article management system, article management device, management device, and article management method
US10176469B2 (en) Interactive jewelry vending machine
US11528454B2 (en) Lock system including automation notification and surveillance integration
CN108364400A (en) sales counter and its control method
US20120047972A1 (en) Electronic key for merchandise security device
CN109791650A (en) Rechargeable tool and battery status monitoring in automated tool control system
US11544982B2 (en) Self-service modular drop safes with messenger access capability
JP2009264000A (en) Key management device
CN110555925A (en) Shelf cabinet for selling commodities and commodity determining method
CN210142376U (en) Intelligent cabinet
JP7482383B2 (en) Delivery management system, management server, delivery management method, and program recording medium
CN107230290A (en) A kind of swinging intelligent positioning bookcase and self-service public browsing system
US11282028B2 (en) Storage devices and operation methods thereof
US20240177106A1 (en) Storage devices and operation methods thereof
US20230169813A1 (en) Merchandise display security systems and methods
JP2020057027A (en) Article management system
CN108577275A (en) Locker
US20120086546A1 (en) System and method for controlling access to a source of electrical power
JP2020055649A (en) Article management system
JP2020055650A (en) Article control system
JP2014098955A (en) Automatic reception device and reception system
US20210335079A1 (en) Shared equipment leasing device, method and system therefor
CN213458235U (en) Self-service terminating machine of getting it filled sells based on medical insurance electronic voucher prescription circulation

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18748513

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18748513

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1